Alcatel-Lucent 1850 - Nokia Documentation

Title page

Alcatel-Lucent 1850

Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) | Release 7.0

CLI User Provisioning Guide

365-372-406R7.0

CC109746990

ISSUE 1

NOVEMBER 2009

Legal notice

Legal notice

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective

owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.

Conformance statements

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15 Class A

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protections against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment

generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be

required to correct the interference at the user’s expense.

Security statement

In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,

applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any

allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.

Limited warranty

Alcatel-Lucent provides a limited warranty for this product. For more information, consult your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team.

Contents

About this document

Purpose ......................................................................................................................................................................................... xviixvii

Reason for revision .................................................................................................................................................................. xviixvii

Safety information .................................................................................................................................................................... xviixvii

Intended audience ..................................................................................................................................................................... xviixvii

How to use this information product ................................................................................................................................ xviiixviii

Conventions used .................................................................................................................................................................... xviiixviii

User interface to system ........................................................................................................................................................... xixxix

Using procedures ......................................................................................................................................................................... xxxx

Related information ................................................................................................................................................................. xxiixxii

Technical support ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxiiixxiii

How to order ............................................................................................................................................................................. xxiiixxiii

How to comment ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxiiixxiii

1 Safety

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11-1

Structure of safety statements ................................................................................................................................................ 1-21-2

General notes on safety ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-41-4

Laser safety .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-61-6

Electrostatic discharge ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-181-18

Save these safety instructions ............................................................................................................................................. 1-211-21

Eco-environmental statements ............................................................................................................................................ 1-241-24

2 Getting started

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0

Issue 1 November 2009

iii

Before you begin ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-22-2

Procedure 2-1: Connect personal computer (PC) and establish Command Line Interface (CLI) session to

VL�C4x/VL�C6x ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-32-3

Procedure 2-2: Configure VL�C4x/VL�C6x for in-band or out-of-band connectivity ............................. 2-102-10

3 Using the Web interface

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13-1

Procedure 3-1: Web Access Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 3-23-2

Procedure 3-2: Starting the Web Interface ........................................................................................................................ 3-33-3

Web page interface .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-43-4

4 Software management

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14-1

Procedure 4-1: Determine VL�C4x/VL�C6x software versions stored in non-volatile memory .............. 4-24-2

Procedure 4-2: Copy VL�C4x/VL�C6x software image from one Image slot to the other Image slot

.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-34-34-3

Procedure 4-3: Backup or restore VL�C4x/VL�C6x configuration data ............................................................ 4-44-4

Procedure 4-4: Upgrade VL�C4x/VL�C6x software/firmware ............................................................................. 4-64-6

5 System provisioning features

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15-1

Before you begin ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-35-3

Procedure 5-1: Display ARP cache entries associated with management interfaces ........................................ 5-45-4

Procedure 5-2: View system inventory information ..................................................................................................... 5-65-6

Procedure 5-3: Display dual image status (software versions) ................................................................................. 5-95-9

Procedure 5-4: System configuration ............................................................................................................................... 5-115-11

Procedure 5-5: Log configuration and viewing ............................................................................................................ 5-365-36

Procedure 5-6: S�MP community and trap receiver configuration ...................................................................... 5-395-39

Procedure 5-7: System Utilities ......................................................................................................................................... 5-435-43

Procedure 5-8: Trap Manager configuration ................................................................................................................. 5-575-57

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

iv 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 5-9: Simple �etwork Time Protocol (S�TP) configuration .............................................................. 5-595-59

Procedure 5-10: Radius authentication server configuration .................................................................................. 5-695-69

Procedure 5-11: Secure shell configuration ................................................................................................................... 5-725-72

6 Port configuration

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16-1

Before you begin ........................................................................................................................................................................ 6-26-2

Procedure 6-1: Configure Ethernet port ............................................................................................................................ 6-36-3

Procedure 6-2: Enable/disable backplane Ethernet port .............................................................................................. 6-56-5

Procedure 6-3: Configure Ethernet port mirroring on VL�C4x circuit pack ...................................................... 6-66-6

Procedure 6-4: View statistics for Ethernet port ............................................................................................................. 6-76-7

Procedure 6-5: Configure TDM/PDH port on VL�C6x circuit pack ..................................................................... 6-86-8

7 PDH/TDM provisioning

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17-1

Before you begin ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-27-2

Procedure 7-1: Configure interface mode for VL�C6x circuit pack ...................................................................... 7-37-3

Procedure 7-2: Operate/release interface loopback ....................................................................................................... 7-47-4

Procedure 7-3: Enable/disable inband loopbacks from DSX .................................................................................... 7-57-5

Procedure 7-4: View performance monitoring (PM) reports ..................................................................................... 7-67-6

Procedure 7-5: Configure performance monitoring (PM) thresholds ................................................................... 7-77-7

Procedure 7-6: Enable/disable performance monitoring (PM) ................................................................................. 7-87-8

Procedure 7-7: Enable/disable S�MP traps ..................................................................................................................... 7-97-9

Procedure 7-8: Configure alarm parameters .................................................................................................................. 7-107-10

Procedure 7-9: View alarms ................................................................................................................................................. 7-117-11

8 Timing

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18-1

Before you begin ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-28-2

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


v

Procedure 8-1: Configure system timing for circuit pack ........................................................................................... 8-38-3

Procedure 8-2: Configure ptp-1588 timing (master mode) ...................................................................................... 8-138-13

Procedure 8-3: Configure interface timing for DS1/E1 ports ................................................................................. 8-158-15

Procedure 8-4: Configure Time of Day (ToD) distribution ..................................................................................... 8-168-16

9 Vlan

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19-1

Before you begin ........................................................................................................................................................................ 9-29-2

Procedure 9-1: Configure VLA� ......................................................................................................................................... 9-39-3

Procedure 9-2: Provision VLA� port configuration ..................................................................................................... 9-49-4

10 Routing

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-110-1

Before you begin ..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-210-2

Procedure 10-1: Address resolution protocol (ARP) routing .................................................................................. 10-310-3

Procedure 10-2: IP routing ................................................................................................................................................... 10-610-6

Procedure 10-3: DHCP .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-810-8

Procedure 10-4: Router ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-910-9

11 Switching

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-111-1

Before you begin ...................................................................................................................................................................... 11-211-2

Procedure 11-1: Enable/Disable L2CP tunneling ........................................................................................................ 11-311-3

Procedure 11-2: Configure service-multiplexing on VL�C40/42 ......................................................................... 11-511-5

Procedure 11-3: Provision Ethernet ring protection (ERP) ................................................................................... 11-2111-21

12 Quality of service (QoS)

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-112-1

Before you begin ..................................................................................................................................................................... 12-212-2

Procedure 12-1: Provision access control lists ............................................................................................................. 12-312-3

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

vi 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 12-2: Provision access control list rules .................................................................................................... 12-512-5

Procedure 12-3: Assign access control list to Ethernet interface ........................................................................... 12-612-6

Procedure 12-4: Enable/Disable QoS differentiated services operational mode .............................................. 12-712-7

Procedure 12-5: Provision QoS differentiated services ............................................................................................. 12-812-8

Procedure 12-6: View QoS differentiated services statistics ................................................................................. 12-1312-13

Procedure 12-7: Provision class of service .................................................................................................................. 12-1412-14

13 Link OA&M

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-113-1

Before you begin ..................................................................................................................................................................... 13-213-2

Procedure 13-1: Place holder .............................................................................................................................................. 13-313-3

Procedure 13-2: Configure VL�C40/42 LinkOAM (802.3ah Clause 57) ........................................................ 13-413-4

14 Service OA&M

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-114-1

Before you begin ..................................................................................................................................................................... 14-214-2

Procedure 14-1: Service OAM Place holder ................................................................................................................. 14-314-3

Procedure 14-2: Configure Ethernet service OAM using CLI commands ......................................................... 14-414-4

Procedure 14-3: Y.1731 Service OAM for VL�C42 .............................................................................................. 14-1414-14

15 Circuit emulation service (CES)

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-115-1

Before you begin ..................................................................................................................................................................... 15-215-2


Procedure 15-2: Configure circuit emulation service on VL�C60/61/62/64 .................................................... 15-415-4

16 ML-PPP

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-116-1

Before you begin ..................................................................................................................................................................... 16-216-2


Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


vii

Procedure 16-2: Configure Multi-Link PPP (ML-PPP) Termination on VL�C60/VL�C61/VL�C62 . 16-416-4

Glossary

Index

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

viii 365-372-406R7.0


List of tables

1 Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 documentation set ............................................................................................. xxiixxii

1-1 Pluggable transmission module laser safety specifications ........................................................................ 1-61-6

14-1 �o double tagging ................................................................................................................................................ 14-1214-12

14-2 Double tagging – All to one bundling ........................................................................................................... 14-1314-13

14-3 Double tagging – Service-multiplexed ......................................................................................................... 14-1314-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


ix

List of figures

1-1 Laser warning labels .............................................................................................................................................. 1-171-17

1-2 Static control wrist strap ....................................................................................................................................... 1-191-19

1-3 ESD warning label (barred-hand symbol) ..................................................................................................... 1-201-20

2-1 Inband management with Q-in-Q setup .......................................................................................................... 2-272-27

11-1 Service-multiplexing concept ............................................................................................................................. 11-611-6

11-2 Service-multiplexing U�I-��I ....................................................................................................................... 11-1211-12

11-3 Service-multiplexing ��I-U�I ....................................................................................................................... 11-1311-13

11-4 Service-multiplexing U�I-U�I ....................................................................................................................... 11-1611-16

11-5 Ethernet ring protection ...................................................................................................................................... 11-2211-22

11-6 Add node to existing Ethernet ring protection (ERP) .............................................................................. 11-3111-31

13-1 VL�C40/42 link loopback — Example 1 ...................................................................................................... 13-713-7

13-2 VL�C40/42 link loopback — Example 2 ...................................................................................................... 13-813-8

14-1 Service OAM reference model ........................................................................................................................ 14-1014-10

15-1 Circuit emulation service sample network (VL�C60s) ............................................................................ 15-815-8

15-2 Circuit emulation service sample network (VL�C60/61/62/64) ........................................................... 15-815-8

15-3 �etwork timing distribution for CES using BITS (VL�C60/61/62s) .............................................. 15-2115-21

15-4 �etwork timing distribution for CES using BITS (VL�C6x) ............................................................. 15-2115-21

15-5 �etwork timing distribution for CES using ptp-1588 (VL�C60/61/62) ......................................... 15-2415-24

15-6 �etwork timing distribution for CES using ptp-1588 (VL�C6x) ...................................................... 15-2515-25

15-7 �etwork timing distribution for CES using ptp-1588 with two masters .......................................... 15-2615-26

15-8 Circuit emulation service protection .............................................................................................................. 15-4315-43

15-9 Circuit emulation service protection - UPSR/S�CP ............................................................................... 15-4415-44

16-1 Multi-Link PPP termination on VL�C60/61/62 .......................................................................................... 16-616-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


xi

16-2 Sample timing configurations for ML-PPP on VL�C60/61/62 .......................................................... 16-2216-22

List of figures

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xii 365-372-406R7.0


List of procedures

2 Getting started

2-1 Connect personal computer (PC) and establish Command Line Interface (CLI) session to

VL�C4x/VL�C6x ................................................................................................................................................ 2-32-3

2-2 Configure VL�C4x/VL�C6x for in-band or out-of-band connectivity ............................................ 2-102-10

3 Using the Web interface

3-1 Web Access Configuration ..................................................................................................................................... 3-23-2

3-2 Starting the Web Interface ...................................................................................................................................... 3-33-3

4 Software management

4-1 Determine VL�C4x/VL�C6x software versions stored in non-volatile memory ............................ 4-24-2

4-2 Copy VL�C4x/VL�C6x software image from one Image slot to the other Image slot ................. 4-34-3

4-3 Backup or restore VL�C4x/VL�C6x configuration data .......................................................................... 4-44-4

4-4 Upgrade VL�C4x/VL�C6x software/firmware ............................................................................................ 4-64-6

5 System provisioning features

5-1 Display ARP cache entries associated with management interfaces ...................................................... 5-45-4

5-2 View system inventory information .................................................................................................................... 5-65-6

5-3 Display dual image status (software versions) ................................................................................................ 5-95-9

5-4 System configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 5-115-11

5-5 Log configuration and viewing .......................................................................................................................... 5-365-36

5-6 S�MP community and trap receiver configuration .................................................................................... 5-395-39

5-7 System Utilities ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-435-43

5-8 Trap Manager configuration ................................................................................................................................ 5-575-57

5-9 Simple �etwork Time Protocol (S�TP) configuration ............................................................................. 5-595-59

5-10 Radius authentication server configuration ................................................................................................... 5-695-69

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


xiii

5-11 Secure shell configuration ................................................................................................................................... 5-725-72

6 Port configuration

6-1 Configure Ethernet port ........................................................................................................................................... 6-36-3

6-2 Enable/disable backplane Ethernet port ............................................................................................................ 6-56-5

6-3 Configure Ethernet port mirroring on VL�C4x circuit pack .................................................................... 6-66-6

6-4 View statistics for Ethernet port ........................................................................................................................... 6-76-7

6-5 Configure TDM/PDH port on VL�C6x circuit pack ................................................................................... 6-86-8

7 PDH/TDM provisioning

7-1 Configure interface mode for VL�C6x circuit pack .................................................................................... 7-37-3

7-2 Operate/release interface loopback ..................................................................................................................... 7-47-4

7-3 Enable/disable inband loopbacks from DSX ................................................................................................... 7-57-5

7-4 View performance monitoring (PM) reports ................................................................................................... 7-67-6

7-5 Configure performance monitoring (PM) thresholds .................................................................................. 7-77-7

7-6 Enable/disable performance monitoring (PM) ................................................................................................ 7-87-8

7-7 Enable/disable S�MP traps ................................................................................................................................... 7-97-9

7-8 Configure alarm parameters ................................................................................................................................ 7-107-10

7-9 View alarms ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-117-11

8 Timing

8-1 Configure system timing for circuit pack ......................................................................................................... 8-38-3

8-2 Configure ptp-1588 timing (master mode) .................................................................................................... 8-138-13

8-3 Configure interface timing for DS1/E1 ports ................................................................................................ 8-158-15

8-4 Configure Time of Day (ToD) distribution .................................................................................................... 8-168-16

9 Vlan

9-1 Configure VLA� ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-39-3

9-2 Provision VLA� port configuration ................................................................................................................... 9-49-4

List of procedures

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xiv 365-372-406R7.0


10 Routing

10-1 Address resolution protocol (ARP) routing ................................................................................................... 10-310-3

10-2 IP routing .................................................................................................................................................................... 10-610-6

10-3 DHCP .......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-810-8

10-4 Router .......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-910-9

11 Switching

11-1 Enable/Disable L2CP tunneling ......................................................................................................................... 11-311-3

11-2 Configure service-multiplexing on VL�C40/42 ......................................................................................... 11-511-5

11-3 Provision Ethernet ring protection (ERP) .................................................................................................... 11-2111-21

12 Quality of service (QoS)

12-1 Provision access control lists .............................................................................................................................. 12-312-3

12-2 Provision access control list rules ..................................................................................................................... 12-512-5

12-3 Assign access control list to Ethernet interface ............................................................................................ 12-612-6

12-4 Enable/Disable QoS differentiated services operational mode .............................................................. 12-712-7

12-5 Provision QoS differentiated services ............................................................................................................. 12-812-8

12-6 View QoS differentiated services statistics ................................................................................................. 12-1312-13

12-7 Provision class of service ................................................................................................................................... 12-1412-14

13 Link OA&M

13-1 Place holder ............................................................................................................................................................... 13-313-3

13-2 Configure VL�C40/42 LinkOAM (802.3ah Clause 57) ......................................................................... 13-413-4

14 Service OA&M

14-1 Service OAM Place holder .................................................................................................................................. 14-314-3

14-2 Configure Ethernet service OAM using CLI commands ......................................................................... 14-414-4

14-3 Y.1731 Service OAM for VL�C42 .............................................................................................................. 14-1414-14

15 Circuit emulation service (CES)

15-1 Place holder ............................................................................................................................................................... 15-315-3

List of procedures

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


xv

15-2 Configure circuit emulation service on VL�C60/61/62/64 .................................................................... 15-415-4

16 ML-PPP

16-1 Place holder ............................................................................................................................................................... 16-316-3

16-2 Configure Multi-Link PPP (ML-PPP) Termination on VL�C60/VL�C61/VL�C62 .................. 16-416-4

List of procedures

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xvi 365-372-406R7.0


About this documentAbout this document

Purpose

This document provides examples and procedures for provisioning the Command Line

Interface (CLI) provisionable circuit packs in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service

Switch 5 (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5).

Reason for revision

This document, Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) CLI User

Provisioning Guide, Issue 1, is issued to update existing information and provide

information about the following significant Release 7.0 features.

• Transport Multiprotocol Label Switching (T-MPLS) Tunnel OAM, 1:1 tunnel

protection, basic e-line services, and T-MPLS Quality of Service (QoS) (3 classes)

supported on VL�C42B Ethernet Aggregator circuit packs.

• L�W62 Circuit Emulator circuit pack that provides the functionality of the VL�C60

Circuit Emulator circuit pack, accurate 1 Pulse Per Second (1PPS) and Time of Day

(ToD) distribution for mobile backhaul networks, E1/T1 timing output signals, and

IEEE 1588v2 Transparent Clock support.

• VLIU3 interface unit supports 1PPS and ToD distribution for mobile backhaul

networks.

Safety information

For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at

points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to

follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.

Intended audience

This Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) CLI User Provisioning Guide

is intended primarily for telecommunications technicians and communications network

providers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


xvii

Procedural information in this document is intended primarily for maintenance, operation,

and provisioning personnel responsible for the operation and maintenance of the

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch 5 (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5).

How to use this information product

This guide includes procedure chapters and supporting information (for example, safety

instructions, provisionable parameters, glossary, and index). Refer to the Contents section

to locate specific information.

Assumptions

This document assumes that users have an understanding of the following:

• Basic principles of telecommunication transmission

• Common telecommunication and system terminology (a glossary is provided in this

document to assist you)

• Test sets and tools used in the telecommunication industry

• Local operations and functional procedures of your company

• Personal computer (PC) operation, common PC terminology, and navigational

procedures in a windows-style user interface

Conventions used

The following conventions are used in this document.

• This font indicates a command.

Example:

ent-user-secu

• This font indicates a document reference.

Example:

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Product Information and

Planning Guide (document title and 9-digit ordering number)

• This font indicates buttons, icons, or menu items.

Example:

Configuration → Equipment

• This font indicates window names or special emphasis.

Example:

The Configure Equipment window is displayed.

• This font indicates lettering designations on the backplane, shelf, and circuit packs.

Example:

MN/ABN LED and ACO/TST LED simultaneously light for approximately 12 seconds

and then extinguish.

About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xviii 365-372-406R7.0


• This font indicates information that is either output by the system or is displayed

on the computer.

Example:

The response will be /* SYSTEM TID: ALU-TSS-5 */.

• Blue text indicates hyperlinks (cross-references) to other text in the document or

another step in the procedure.

Example: Procedure 5-2: “View system inventory information” (p. 5-6)

• Important messages are displayed as follows:

Important! This is important information.

User interface to system

You will interact with the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 equipped with the VL�C2

SYSCTL and VL�C50/52 SO�ET/SDH Transport circuit packs using a PC and a

windows-based graphical user interface (GUI). The GUI is called the WaveStar® Craft

Interface Terminal (WaveStar® CIT) and permits system-level and VL�C50/52 circuit

pack/port operations to be performed (for example, administration, provisioning, and fault

management).

You will interact with the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 equipped with the VL�C40/42/42B

Ethernet Aggregator, VL�C60/61/62 Circuit Emulator, and/or VL�C64 Circuit

Emulation Mini-Hub circuit packs using a PC and the Web GUI interface or Command

Line Interface (CLI) messages. The Web GUI and CLI messages permit

VL�C4x/VL�C6x circuit pack operations to be performed (for example, administration

and provisioning).

Using the Web GUI

Procedures presented in this document expect you to be familiar with the Web GUI and

navigation windows. The windows are designed to be straightforward and to contain all

information relating to a particular operation. The procedures presented in this document

rely on the information provided in the window displays. Therefore, it is imperative that

you read all the information provided in a window before continuing an operational

function.

Using the Command Line Interface (CLI) messages

For a detailed description of the Command Line Interface (CLI) messages and general

information about using the Command Line Interface (CLI), refer to Alcatel-Lucent 1850

Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide.

About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


xix

Using procedures

To find instructions for performing a specific job, first determine the procedure category

(for example, acceptance or node turn-up). After determining the procedure category, go

to the corresponding procedure chapter and find the procedure in the chapter Contents

table.

The procedures in the following chapters contain step-by-step instructions to accomplish

a distinct user job:

• Chapter 2, “Getting started”

• Chapter 3, “Using the Web interface”

• Chapter 4, “Software management”

• Chapter 5, “System provisioning features”

• Chapter 6, “Port configuration”

• Chapter 7, “PDH/TDM provisioning”

• Chapter 8, “Timing”

• Chapter 9, “Vlan”

• Chapter 10, “Routing”

• Chapter 11, “Switching”

• Chapter 12, “Quality of service (QoS)”

• Chapter 13, “Link OA&M”

• Chapter 14, “Service OA&M”

• Chapter 15, “Circuit emulation service (CES)”

• Chapter 16, “ML-PPP”

Some procedures are referenced from multiple procedures to support a job function you

are performing. Proceed to a supporting procedure only when it is referred to by another

procedure. Supporting procedures are not to be accessed directly except by very

experienced personnel.

Important! Perform all steps in a procedure sequentially, unless that step sends you to

another step or procedure.

Unless otherwise instructed, if one procedure sends you to another procedure, you

must return to the first procedure after you complete the second. After you have

completed the first procedure element, you have finished.

If/Then statements in a procedure

If …/Then … columns in a procedure contain only one condition that is true in a table

cell under the If … column. Perform the action in the related table cell under the Then …

column. Then continue to the next sequential step or as directed by the action under the

Then … column.

About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xx 365-372-406R7.0


Verifying actions

Sometimes you will be asked to verify that actions have occurred. This may take the form

of a formal statement with the expected response. At other times, you will be instructed to

merely verify that the action occurred. If the expected response is not observed and a

specific trouble-clearing reference is not made, reference the Trouble clearing procedures

chapter in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Maintenance and

Trouble-Clearing Guide, to start trouble clearing.

About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


xxi

Related information

The following table lists the documents included in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5

documentation set.

Table 1 Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 documentation set

Comcode Document Number Title

�A 365-372-330 WaveStar®

CIT

109 746 933 365-372-400R7.0 Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch

(TSS-5) Product Information and Planning

Guide


(TSS-5) User Provisioning Guide


(TSS-5) Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing

Guide


(TSS-5) Installation and System Turn-Up Guide


(TSS-5) TL1 Command Guide for MSPP


(TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide


(TSS-5) CLI User Provisioning Guide


(TSS-5) TL1 Command Guide for T-MPLS

�A ED8C956-10 Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch

(TSS-5) Release 7.0.0 Engineering and Ordering

Information

�A ED8C956-20 Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch

(TSS-5) Release 7.0.0 Interconnect Information

109 747 766

Paper

�A Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch

(TSS-5) Software Release Description

109 747 774

CD-ROM

109 747 782 �A Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch

(TSS-5) Release 7.0.0 Customer Documentation

(CD-ROM)

About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxii 365-372-406R7.0


Technical support

For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the

Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact

information.

How to order

To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representative or use Online

Customer Support (OLCS) (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com) .

How to comment

To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.

alcatel-lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline

([email protected]) .

About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


xxiii

http://alcatel-lucent.com/support/

http://alcatel-lucent.com/support/

http://support.alcatel-lucent.com



http://infodoc.alcatel-lucent.com/comments/



mailto:[email protected]


1 1Safety

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides important safety instructions for Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport

Service Switch 5 (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5).

Contents

Structure of safety statements 1-2

General notes on safety 1-4

Laser safety 1-6

Electrostatic discharge 1-18

Save these safety instructions 1-21

Eco-environmental statements 1-24

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


1-1

Structure of safety statements

Overview

Safety statements describe the safety risks relevant while performing tasks on

Alcatel-Lucent products during deployment and/or use. Failure to avoid the hazards may

have serious consequences.

General structure

Safety statements include the following structural elements:

Item Structure element Purpose

1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury

(optional)

2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)

3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard

4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or

injury

5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail

6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard

7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement

(optional)

Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injurydue to the size and weight of the equipment.

Always use three people or a lifting device to transportand position this equipment. [ABC123]

CAUTION

Lifting hazard

B C D

E F

G

H

Safety Structure of safety statements

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-2 365-372-406R7.0


Signal words

The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:

Signal word Meaning

DA�GER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will

result in death or serious injury.

WAR�I�G Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

death or serious injury.

CAUTIO� Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

minor or moderate injury.

�OTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.

Safety Structure of safety statements

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


1-3

General notes on safety

Overview

All responsible technical personnel must read this chapter before servicing the system.

Always keep the most recent issue of this document close to the equipment.

In addition to the general safety instructions in this chapter, users must also observe the

specific safety instructions in the individual chapters.

The equipment complies with the current national and international safety requirements.

It is provided with a high degree of operational safety resulting from many years of

development experience and continuous stringent quality checks.

Potential sources of danger

The equipment is safe in normal operation. However, some potential sources of danger

cannot be completely eliminated. In particular, these may arise during the following

operations:

• Opening of housings or equipment covers

• Manipulation of any kind within the equipment, even if it has been disconnected from

the power supply

• Disconnection of optical or electrical connections

• Through possible contact with live pairs, laser light, hot surfaces, sharp edges, or

components sensitive to electrostatic discharge

Special safety instructions

Laser safety and handling components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) are

vitally important to the equipment. For special safety instructions concerning laser safety

and electrostatic discharge, refer to sections “Laser safety” (p. 1-6) and “Electrostatic

discharge” (p. 1-18).

General safety requirements

In order to keep the technically unavoidable residual risk to a minimum, it is imperative

to observe the following rules.

• Transport, storage, and operation of the unit/system must be under the permissible

conditions only.

See accompanying documentation and information on the unit/system.

• Installation, configuration, and disassembly must be performed only by expert

personnel referring to the respective documentation.

Due to the complexity of the unit/system, the personnel performing installation,

configuration, and disassembly require special training.

Safety General notes on safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-4 365-372-406R7.0


• Expert and authorized users are required to operate the unit/system.

Operate the unit/system only after having read and understood the chapter on safety

and the parts of the documentation relevant to operation. For complex systems,

additional training is recommended. Any obligatory training for operating and service

personnel must be carried out and documented.

• Do not operate the unit/system unless it is in perfect working order.

Immediately report any faults or errors that might affect safety.

• Operate the unit/system with the proper connections and under the environmental

conditions as described in the documentation.

• Only qualified Alcatel-Lucent personnel or expert personnel authorized by

Alcatel-Lucent are permitted to perform conversions or changes to the system or parts

of the system (including the software).

All changes performed by other persons lead to a complete exemption from liability.

Do not use components or spare parts that are not recommended by the manufacturer

and those not listed in the procurement documents.

• Only specially qualified personnel are permitted to remove or disable safety facilities,

clear faults and errors, and maintain the equipment.

Strictly observe the respective parts of the documentation, and consult the

documentation during the selection of measurement and test equipment.

• Document and archive all work related to calibrations, special tests after repairs, and

regular safety checks.

• Use non-system software at your own risk. The use/installation of non-system

software can adversely affect the normal functioning of the unit/system.

Safety General notes on safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


1-5

Laser safety

System compliance

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 complies with the following laser safety regulations and

standards:

• Alcatel-Lucent declares that Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 complies with the

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards IEC 60825-1 Edition 1.0

and its amendment 1 (1997) and amendment 2 (2001) and IEC 60825-2 Edition 3.1

(2007). It is a Class I/1 laser optical fiber communication systems “product” under the

IEC classification.

• Alcatel-Lucent declares that Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 complies with the CE�ELEC

standards E� 60825-1 Edition 1994 and its amendment 1 (2002) and amendment 2

(2001) and E� 60825-2 Edition 2004. It is a Class I/1 laser optical fiber

communication systems “product” under the IEC classifications.

• Alcatel-Lucent declares that Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 complies with the Food and

Drug Administration’s Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH)

regulations 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11. It is a Class I/1 laser optical fiber

communication systems “product” under the FDA.

This Product is designed to ensure that personnel operating the product are not

endangered by laser radiation during normal operation and fault conditions. This product

does not present a risk of eye injury because it is fully enclosed and does not contain

embedded lasers greater than Class I/1 unless otherwise noted.

The following table shows the pluggable transmission module (PTM) laser safety

specifications and the supported circuit packs. The following Class 1 SFP transceivers are

Alcatel-Lucent approved.

Table 1-1 Pluggable transmission module laser safety specifications

Module Code Supported

Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Output

Power

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Connector

Type

FDA Class/

IEC Class

100BASE-LX-I1 VL�C35

VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

1310 −8.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

Safety Laser safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-6 365-372-406R7.0


Table 1-1 Pluggable transmission module laser safety specifications (continued)


Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Output

Power

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Connector

Type

FDA Class/

IEC Class

1000BASE-ZX-I1 VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

1550 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

BASE-T-C1 electrical VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

�A �A �A RJ45 �A

GE-1X2XFC-LX-I1 VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

1310 −3.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

Safety Laser safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


1-7



Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Output

Power

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Connector

Type

FDA Class/

IEC Class

GE-1X2XFC-SX-I1 VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

850 −2.5 Multimode

(50 and

62.5)

LC I(L�50)/1

GE-131T149R-I1 VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

1310 (TX)

1490 (RX)

+2.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

GE-149T131R-I1 VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

1490 (TX)

1310 (RX)

+2.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

OC3IR1-I1 VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C64

1310 -8.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

Safety Laser safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-8 365-372-406R7.0




Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Output

Power

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Connector

Type

FDA Class/

IEC Class

OC3LR1-I1 VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C64

1310 0.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

OC12IR1-I1 VL�C50

VL�C52

1310 −8.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

OC12LR1-I1 VL�C50

VL�C52

1310 +2.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

OC12LR2-I1 VL�C50

VL�C52

1550 +2.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

622-131T155R-I1 VL�C50

VL�C52

1310 (TX)

1550 (RX)

+2.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

622-155T131R-I1 VL�C50

VL�C52

1550 (TX)

1310 (RX)

+2.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

S155I2 VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C64

1310 −8.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

S622C47EL VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C64

1471 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

S622C49EL VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C64

1491 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

S622C51EL VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C64

1511 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

S622C53EL VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C64

1531 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

S622C55EL VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C64

1551 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

Safety Laser safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


1-9



Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Output

Power

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Connector

Type

FDA Class/

IEC Class

S622C57EL VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C64

1571 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

S622C59EL VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C64

1591 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

S622C61EL VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C64

1611 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

SGEC47EL VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

1471 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

SGEC49EL VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

1491 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

Safety Laser safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-10 365-372-406R7.0




Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Output

Power

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Connector

Type

FDA Class/

IEC Class

SGEC51EL VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

1511 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

SGEC53EL VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

1531 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

SGEC55EL VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

1551 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

Safety Laser safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


1-11



Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Output

Power

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Connector

Type

FDA Class/

IEC Class

SGEC57EL VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

1571 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

SGEC59EL VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

1591 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

SGEC61EL VL�C40

VL�C42

VL�C42B

VL�C50

VL�C52

VL�C60

VL�C61

VL�C62

VL�C64

1611 +5.0 Single

Mode (9)

LC I(L�50)/1

Safety Laser safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-12 365-372-406R7.0


General laser information

Optical fiber telecommunication systems, their associated test sets, and similar operating

systems use semiconductor laser transmitters that emit infrared (IR) light at wavelengths

between approximately 800 nanometers (nm) and 1600 nm. The emitted light is above the

red end of the visible spectrum, which is normally not visible to the human eye. Although

radiant energy at near-IR wavelengths is officially designated invisible, some people can

see the shorter wavelength energy even at power levels several orders of magnitude below

any that have been shown to cause injury to the eye.

Conventional lasers can produce an intense beam of monochromatic light.

Monochromatic light is a single wavelength output of pure color that may be visible or

invisible to the eye. A conventional laser produces a small-sized beam of light, and

because the beam size is small, the power density (also called irradiance) is very high.

Consequently, lasers and laser products are subject to federal and applicable state

regulations as well as international standards for their safe operation.

A conventional laser beam expands very little over distance, or is said to be very well

collimated. Thus, conventional laser irradiance remains relatively constant over distance.

However, lasers used in lightwave systems have a large beam divergence, typically 10 to

20 degrees. Here, irradiance obeys the inverse square law (doubling the distance reduces

the irradiance by a factor of four) and rapidly decreases over distance.

Lasers and eye damage

The optical energy emitted by laser and high-radiance LEDs in the 400 to 1400–nm range

may cause eye damage if absorbed by the retina. When a beam of light enters the eye, the

eye magnifies and focuses the energy on the retina magnifying the irradiance. The

irradiance of the energy that reaches the retina is higher than at the cornea and, if

sufficiently intense, may cause a retinal burn.

The damage mechanism at the wavelengths used in optical fiber telecommunications is

thermal in origin; for example, damage caused by heating. Therefore, a specific amount

of energy is required for a definite time to heat an area of retinal tissue. Damage to the

retina occurs only when one looks at the light sufficiently long that the product of the

retinal irradiance and the viewing time exceeds the damage threshold. Optical energies

above 1400 nm cause corneal and skin burns, but these optical energies do not affect the

retina. The thresholds for injury at wavelengths greater than 1400 nm are significantly

higher than those for wavelengths in the retinal hazard region.

Classification of lasers

Manufacturers of lasers and laser products in the United States are regulated by the Food

and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH)

under 21 CFR 1040. These regulations require manufacturers to certify each laser or laser

product as belonging to one of the following classes: I, II, lla, IlIa, lllb, or IV.

Safety Laser safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


1-13

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international standards body

that writes laser safety standards under IEC-60825. Classification schemes are similar and

divided into Classes 1, 1M, 2, 2M, 3B, 3R, and 4. Lasers are classified according to the

accessible emission limits and their potential for causing injury.

Optical fiber telecommunication systems are generally classified as Class I/1, because,

under normal operating conditions, all energized laser transmitting circuit packs are

terminated on optical fibers which enclose the laser energy with the fiber sheath forming

a protective housing. Also, a protective housing/access panel is typically installed in front

of the laser circuit pack shelves. The circuit packs themselves, however, may be

FDA/CDRH Class I, IIIb, or IV or IEC Class 1, 1M, 3B, 3R, or 4. State-of-the-art Raman

and EDFA optical amplifiers have now extended into the Class IV/4 designations.

Laser safety precautions for optical fiber telecommunications systems

In its normal operating mode, an optical fiber telecommunication system is totally

enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Class I/1 system under the FDA/CDRH

and IEC classifications.

The fiber optic cables that interconnect various components of an optical fiber

telecommunication system can disconnect or break and may expose people to lightwave

emission. Also, certain measurements and maintenance procedures may expose the

technician to emission from the semiconductor laser during installation and servicing.

Unlike more familiar laser devices, such as solid-state and gas lasers, the emission pattern

of a semiconductor laser results in a highly divergent beam. In a divergent beam, the

irradiance (power density) decreases rapidly with distance. The greater the distance, the

less energy will enter the eye and the less potential risk for eye injury. If you inadvertently

view an unterminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided eye at distances greater

than 5 to 6 inches, normally, it will not cause eye injury provided that the power in the

fiber is less than a few milliwatts at the near IR wavelengths and a few tens of milliwatts

at the far IR wavelengths. However, damage may occur if you use an optical instrument

such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe to stare at the energized fiber end.

Safety Laser safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-14 365-372-406R7.0


Laser radiation

CAUTION

Laser hazard

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.

Do not view directly into the laser beam with optical instruments such as a fiber

microscope because viewing of laser emission in excess of Class 1 limits significantly

increases the risk of eye damage.

�ever look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector as long as the optical

source is switched on.

Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber

connectors.

Laser safety precautions for enclosed systems

Under normal operating conditions, optical fiber telecommunication systems are

completely enclosed. Observe the following laser safety precautions for enclosed

systems:

• Because of the potential for eye damage, do not stare into optical connectors or

broken fibers.

• Do not under any circumstances perform laser/fiber optic operations before

satisfactorily completing laser safety training.

• Since viewing lightwave emission directly in excess of Class I/1 limits with an optical

instrument such as an eye loupe greatly increases the risk of eye damage,

observe/follow laser safety labels. Appropriate labels must appear in plain view, in

close proximity to the optical port on the protective housing/access panel of the

terminal equipment

Laser safety precautions for unenclosed systems

During service, maintenance, or restoration, an optical fiber telecommunication system is

considered unenclosed. Observe the following laser safety precautions for unenclosed

systems:

• Only authorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to do service, maintenance, and

restoration. Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated, energized optical

connectors at close distances. Laser modules associated with the optical ports of laser

circuit packs are typically recessed, which limits the exposure distance. Optical port

shutters, automatic power reduction (APR), and automatic power shutdown (APSD)

Safety Laser safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


1-15

are engineering controls that are also used to limit the emissions. However, do not

stare or look directly into the optical port with optical instruments or magnifying

lenses when removing or replacing laser circuit packs. (�ormal eye wear or indirect

viewing instruments, such as a Find-R-Scopes, are not considered magnifying lenses

or optical instruments.)

• Only authorized, trained personnel shall use the optical test equipment during

installation or servicing since this equipment contains semiconductor lasers. (Some

examples of optical test equipment are Optical Time Domain Reflectometers

[OTDRs] and Hand-Held Loss Test Sets.)

• Do not, under any circumstance, scan a fiber with an optical test set without verifying

that all laser sources on the fiber are turned off.

• Only authorized personnel are permitted in the immediate area of the optical fiber

telecommunication systems during installation and service.

For guidance on the safe use of optical fiber optic communication systems in the

workplace, consult A�SI Z136.2, American �ational Standard for Safe Use of Optical

Fiber Communication Systems Utilizing Laser Diodes and LED Sources in the United

States or outside the United States, IEC-60825, Part 2.

Safety Laser safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-16 365-372-406R7.0


Laser warning labels

The following figure shows the different types of laser warning labels:

Legend

1. Laser symbol

2. Laser classification label (This label may show only the laser class or both the laser

class and the maximum output power.)

3. Laser warning label

Figure 1-1 Laser warning labels

FAULT

MA-metro-428

LIHTR

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATIONWHEN OPEN AND FIBERDISCONNECTED

Avoid direct exposure to beam

Do not view beam directly withoptical instruments

CLASS 1 LASER

PRODUCT

3

1

2

DANGER

Safety Laser safety

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


1-17

Electrostatic discharge

Overview

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) (for example, caused by touching with the hand) can

destroy semiconductor components. The correct operation of the complete system is then

no longer assured.

ESD warning

NOTICE

ESD hazard

ESD can destroy electronic components.

Always keep circuit packs in antistatic covers. Use the original packaging if possible. Use

a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on the

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 system to prevent ESD damage to sensitive components.

All semiconductor components are basically sensitive to ESD. The ESD can also affect

the components indirectly.

ESD considerations

This section describes the precautions required to prevent ESD damage.

Circuit pack handling precautions

Industry experience has shown that all integrated circuit packs can be damaged by static

electricity that builds up on work surfaces and personnel. The static charges are produced

by various charging effects of movement and contact with other objects. Dry air allows

greater static charges to accumulate. Higher potentials are measured in areas with low

relative humidity, but potentials high enough to cause damage can occur anywhere.

Observe the following precautions when handling circuit packs/units to prevent ESD

damage.

• Assume all circuit packs contain solid-state electronic components that can be

damaged by ESD.

• When handling circuit packs (for example storing, installing, and removing) or when

working on the backplane, always wear a grounded wrist strap or wear a heel strap

and stand on a grounded, static-dissipating floor mat.

• Wear working garment made of 100% cotton to avoid ESD.

• Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outermost

edges. �ever touch the components, conductors, or connector pins.

Safety Electrostatic discharge

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-18 365-372-406R7.0


• Store and ship circuit packs and components in their shipping packing. Circuit packs

and components must be packed and unpacked only at workplaces suitably protected

against build-up of charge.

• Observe all warning labels on bags and cartons. Whenever possible, do not remove

circuit packs from antistatic packaging until ready to insert them into slots.

• If possible, open all circuit packs at a static-safe work position, using properly

grounded wrist straps and static-dissipating table mats.

• Always store and transport circuit packs in static-safe packaging. Shielding is not

required unless specified.

• Keep all static-generating materials such as food wrappers, plastics, and Styrofoam®

containers away from all circuit packs. When removing circuit packs from a shelf,

immediately place the circuit packs in static-safe packages.

• Whenever possible, maintain relative humidity above 20 percent.

Important! Ensure that any connectors on the shelf interconnection panel that are not

cabled are fitted with a plastic dust cap to provide ESD protection.

Static control wrist straps

To reduce the possibility of ESD damage, the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 shelf is

equipped with an ESD grounding jack to enable personnel to ground themselves using

wrist straps [Figure 1-2, “Static control wrist strap” (p. 1-19)], while handling circuit

packs or working on the shelf. Check the wrist straps periodically with a wrist strap tester

to ensure that they are working properly.

Important! The grounding jack is located on the front of the wall-mounted and

rack-mounted shelves.

Figure 1-2 Static control wrist strap

ToGroundConnection

NC-USM-110


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


1-19

Barred-hand symbol

Circuit packs containing components that are especially sensitive to ESD are identified by

warning labels bearing the barred-hand symbol. The following figure shows the

barred-hand symbol.

Figure 1-3 ESD warning label (barred-hand symbol)

MA-metro-429


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-20 365-372-406R7.0


Save these safety instructions

READ A�D U�DERSTA�D ALL I�STRUCTIO�S.

When installing, operating, or maintaining this equipment, always follow basic safety

precautions to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the

following:

1. Read and understand all instructions.

2. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on this product.

3. Operate this product only from the type of power sources that are indicated on the

marking label.

4. Connect this product only to the type of power sources recommended by

Alcatel-Lucent. For information on the powering instructions, consult the

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Installation and System

Turn-Up Guide.

5. This equipment is suitable for mounting on a concrete or other noncombustible

surface only. For information on proper mounting instructions, consult the


Turn-Up Guide.

6. Install only equipment identified in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch

(TSS-5) Installation and System Turn-Up Guide. Use of other equipment may result in

improper connection of circuitry leading to fire or injury to persons.

7. Ensure that all metallic telecommunication interfaces (traffic ports) that leave the

building premises are connected to telecommunication devices that provide primary

and secondary protection, as applicable.

8. Do not use this product near water; for example, in a wet basement.

9. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall

and cause serious damage to the product.

10. Use caution when installing or modifying telecommunications lines.

11. �ever install telecommunications wiring during a lightning storm.

12. �ever install telecommunications connections in wet locations.

13. �ever touch uninsulated telecommunications wires or terminals unless the

telecommunications line has been disconnected at the network interface.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intendedto alert the user to the presence of important operating andmaintenance (servicing) instructions in the literatureaccompanying this product.

Safety Save these safety instructions

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


1-21

14. �ever touch uninsulated wiring or terminals carrying direct current or ringing current,

and never leave this wiring exposed. Protect and tape uninsulated wiring and

terminals to avoid risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to service personnel.

15. �ever push objects of any kind into this product through slots as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or

electrical shock. �ever spill liquids of any kind on the product.

16. To protect the unit from overheating, slots and openings in the unit are provided for

ventilation. Do not block or cover these openings. Do not place this product in a

built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.

17. To reduce the risk of an electrical shock, do not disassemble this product. Service

should be performed by trained personnel only. Opening or removing covers and/or

circuit boards may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect

reassembly can cause electrical shock when the unit is subsequently used.

18. Some of the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 family hardware modules contain

FDA/CDRH Class I/IEC Class 1 single-mode laser products that are enclosed

lightwave transmission systems.

Under normal operating conditions, lightwave transmission systems are completely

enclosed; however, the following precautions must be observed because of the

potential for eye damage:

• Do not stare directly into the optical connectors terminating the cables.

• Ensure that technicians have satisfactorily completed an approved training course

before performing lightwave/lightguide operations.

• Do not use optical instruments such as an eye loupe to view a fiber or

unterminated connector.

More information about laser safety can be found in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850

Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Installation and System Turn-Up Guide.

19. For a unit intended to be powered from −48 VDC or +24 VDC voltage sources, read

and understand the following:

• Use only Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) −48 VDC or +24 VDC sources.

• Disconnect up to two power supply connections when removing power from the

system.

• Provide a readily accessible disconnect device as part of the building installation.

• Ensure that there is no exposed wire when the input power cables are connected to

the unit.

• Include an independent frame ground drop to building ground. Refer to the


Turn-Up Guide.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-22 365-372-406R7.0


This electrical ground symbol is marked on the product, adjacent to the ground

(earth) area for the connection of the ground (earth) conductor.

• This equipment is to be installed only in Restricted Access Areas on Business and

Customer Premises Applications in Accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and

110-18 of the �ational Electrical Code, A�SI/�FPA �o. 70. Other installations

exempt from the enforcement of the �ational Electrical Code may be engineered

according to the accepted practices of the local telecommunications utility.

20. For a unit intended to be powered from 100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC voltage sources,

read and understand the following:

• Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid

cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

• Do not staple or otherwise attach the power supply cord to the building surfaces.

• Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of

fire or electrical shock.

• Install the socket outlet near the equipment so that it is readily accessible.

• This product is equipped with a three-wire grounding type plug, a plug having a

third (grounding) pin. This plug is intended to fit only into a grounding type

power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the

outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the

safety purpose of the grounding type plug. Do not use a 3-to-2-prong adapter at

the receptacle. Use of this type adapter may result in risk of electrical shock

and/or damage to this product.

• Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where

the cord may be abused by persons walking on it.

21. Unplug this product from the wall outlet, and refer servicing to qualified service

personnel under the following conditions:

• When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.

• If liquid has been spilled into the product.

• If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

• If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions

(Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions because

improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require

extensive work by qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.)

• If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

• If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.

SAVE THESE I�STRUCTIO�S.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


1-23

Eco-environmental statements

Overview

The statements that follow are the eco-environmental statements that apply to

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 when deployed in the European Union, China, Canada, and

the United States.

Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be established

for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or other end user,

or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling targets for the

return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.

For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging

waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Services -

Environmental Health and Safety organization.

Material content compliance

European Union RoHS

European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC, “Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous

Substances” (RoHS), restricts the use of lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium,

and certain flame retardants in electrical and electronic equipment. This Directive applies

to electrical and electronic products placed on the EU market after 1 July 2006, with

various exemptions, including an exemption for lead solder in network infrastructure

equipment. Alcatel-Lucent products shipped to the EU after 1 July 2006 comply with the

EU RoHS Directive.

China RoHS

The People's Republic of China Ministry of Information Industry has published a

regulation (Order #39) and associated standards regarding restrictions on hazardous

substances (China RoHS). Currently, the legislation requires all Electronic and

Information Products (EIP) to comply with certain labeling and documentation

requirements. Alcatel-Lucent products manufactured on or after 1 March 2007, that are

intended for sale to customers in the China market, must comply with these requirements.

In accordance with the People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard

“Marking for the Control of Pollution Caused by Electronic Information Product”

(SJ/T11364- 2006), customers may access Alcatel-Lucent Hazardous Substances Table

(http://www.alcatel-sbell.com.cn/wwwroot/images/upload/private/1/media/ChinaRoHS.

pdf) .

Safety Eco-environmental statements

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-24 365-372-406R7.0


http://www.alcatel-sbell.com.cn/wwwroot/images/upload/private/1/media/ChinaRoHS.pdf



Recycling / take-back / disposal of products

Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbols shown below shall be collected

and treated at the end of their useful life, in compliance with applicable European Union

and other local legislation. They shall not be disposed of as part of unsorted municipal

waste. Due to materials that may be contained in the product and batteries, such as heavy

metals, the environment and human health may be negatively impacted as a result of

inappropriate disposal.

�ote: For electronic products put on the market in the European Union, a solid bar

under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates that the product was put on the market

after 13 August 2005.

Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where

applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of

Alcatel-Lucent products bearing the logo at the end of their useful life, or products

displaced by Alcatel-Lucent equipment offers.

For information regarding take-back, recycling, or disposal of equipment by

Alcatel-Lucent or for equipment take-back requests, visit the Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back

web page (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/product_takeback) or contact Alcatel-Lucent

Takeback Support ([email protected]) . For technical information on product

treatment, consult the Alcatel-Lucent Recycling Information web page

(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/product_recycling) .

Safety Eco-environmental statements

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


1-25

http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/product_takeback






http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/product_recycling

http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/product_recycling

2 2Getting started

Overview

Purpose

Use this section to connect a PC and configure initial parameters for in-band or

out-of-band connectivity to the VL�C4x/VL�C6x circuit packs.

Out-of-band connectivity refers to using the RS-232 console port on the VLIU or the

MGMT LA� service port on the VL�C4x/VL�C6x faceplate to access the

VL�C4x/VL�C6x.

In-band connectivity allows you to access the VL�C4x/VL�C6x from a local or remote

PC using the Ethernet network and the IP address information assigned to the

VL�C4x/VL�C6x. You must configure the VL�C4x/VL�C6x network parameters with

IP address information (IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway) to access the

VL�C4x/VL�C6x in-band. All the network LA� ports will share one IP address.

Initial configuration for connectivity requires you to use either the RS-232 console port or

the MGMT LA� service port.

Contents

Before you begin 2-2

Procedure 2-1: Connect personal computer (PC) and establish Command Line

Interface (CLI) session to VL�C4x/VL�C6x

2-3

Procedure 2-2: Configure VL�C4x/VL�C6x for in-band or out-of-band

connectivity

2-10

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-1

Before you begin

Before you begin

Important! Command Line Interface (CLI) commands or the Web GUI is required to

interface with the VL�C40/42/42B Ethernet Aggregator, VL�C60/61/62 Circuit

Emulator, and VL�C64 Circuit Emulation Mini-Hub circuit packs.

Determine whether you will configure the switch for in-band or out-of-band connectivity.

Required equipment

All procedures in this chapter require that the following equipment is available:

• Personal Computer (PC) and related cables specified in the procedures.

• Wrist Strap

Important! If additional equipment is required to perform a specific procedure, the

additional equipment is listed in the procedure.

Getting started Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-2 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 2-1: Connect personal computer (PC) and establish

Command Line Interface (CLI) session to VLNC4x/VLNC6x

Overview

Use this procedure to connect PC and establish a local or remote CLI session with the

VL�C4x/VL�C6x circuit pack.

Required equipment

At least one of the following cables is required for direct connection to the network

element:

• RS-232 cable with an RJ-45 connector on one end for the RS-232 console port

(RS232 M2 or RS232 M1) on the VLIU, and a PC serial connector on the other end

for connection to the PC.

• CAT5 Ethernet straight-through or a cross-over cable for the RJ-45 MGMT LAN port

on the VL�C4x/VL�C6x faceplate, any of the 20 "in-band" FE Ethernet ports on the

VLIU, or any of the GbE SFP ports on the VL�C4x/VL�C6x faceplate.

For detailed cabling information, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service

Switch (TSS-5) Installation and System Turn-Up Guide.

Before you begin

Prior to performing this procedure:

1. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line

Interface Guide, and become familiar with the command structure.

2. Refer to “Electrostatic discharge” (p. 1-18) in Chapter 1, “Safety”.

3. If required, obtain a valid user ID and password for the required network element.

4. If establishing a local/remote CLI session with a network element using Telnet or

SSH, obtain the required IP address of the port (MGMT LAN port or in-band Ethernet

network LA� ports) being used for the management interface.

Step

As required, refer to one of the following procedures to establish a CLI session.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Establish local CLI session using RS-232 console port.

Reference: Procedure 2-1.1: “Connect personal computer (PC) and establish local

CLI session using RS-232 console port” (p. 2-5)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Establish local CLI session using MGMT LAN serviceport.

Getting started Procedure 2-1: Connect personal computer (PC) and

establish Command Line Interface (CLI) session to

VLNC4x/VLNC6x...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-3


CLI session using MGMT LA� serviceport” (p. 2-7)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Establish remote CLI session using Ethernet network.

Reference: Procedure 2-1.3: “Connect personal computer (PC) and establish remote

CLI session using Ethernet network” (p. 2-9)

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Getting started Procedure 2-1: Connect personal computer (PC) and

establish Command Line Interface (CLI) session to

VLNC4x/VLNC6x...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-4 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 2-1.1: Connect personal computer (PC) and

establish local CLI session using RS-232 console port

Overview

Use this procedure to connect PC and establish a local CLI session with the

VL�C4x/VL�C6x circuit pack using the RS-232 console port.

The RS-232 (RS232 M1) port on the front of the VLIU connects to the Main 1 slot. The

RS-232 (RS232 M2) port on the front of the VLIU connects to the Main 2 slot. The

VL�C6x may be installed in either Main 1 or Main 2. The VL�C4x may only be

installed in the Main 2 slot.

The RS-232 ports are not generally recommended for use in connecting to the

VL�C4x/VL�C6x. It is normally used by service personnel.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use an appropriate cable to connect the RS-232 RJ-45 type console port on the VLIU to

an available serial port of the PC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Establish a terminal emulation session (HyperTerminal, Procomm, or similar session)

using the following default values:

• Baud Rate (bps): 9600

• Character Size (bits): 8

• Flow Control: Disable

• Stop Bits: 1

• Parity: none

• VT100 emulation

Result: The login User prompt displays when the terminal interface initializes.

If the login prompt does not display, try changing the baud rate of the connection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter user name and password.

Important! The default User name is admin and the password is blank.

Result: The User EXEC prompt [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) >] displays.

The prompt may be changed using the set prompt <prompt_string> command

in the user privilege mode.

Getting started Procedure 2-1.1: Connect personal computer (PC) and


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line

Interface Guide, for help on using the CLI commands.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-6 365-372-406R7.0



establish local CLI session using MGMT LAN serviceport

Overview

Use this procedure to connect PC and establish a local CLI session with the

VL�C4x/VL�C6x circuit pack using the MGMT LAN port on the faceplate of the circuit

pack.

This procedure assumes that the proper connection interfaces have already been

configured using the procedures in Procedure 2-2: “Configure VL�C4x/VL�C6x for

in-band or out-of-band connectivity ” (p. 2-10).

This procedure also assumes that Telnet or secure shell (SSH) access has been configured.

See Telnet Commands and/or Secure Shell (SSH) commands in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Obtain the IP address of the MGMT LAN port from your network administrator, if

required, or use the default IP address if it has not been changed.

Default IP addresses may be one of the following:

• For R4.1 and later releases: 169.254.1.1 for VL�C40, VL�C42/42B, VL�C60,

VL�C61, VL�C62, and VL�C64

• For releases prior to R4.1: (192.168.0.2 [VL�C40]), (192.168.0.3 [VL�C60]).

Important! You must also obtain a user name and password if the default user name

of admin has been changed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Connect the MGMT LAN port on the faceplate of the VL�C4x/VL�C6x circuit pack to

the �IC card of the PC. If you are connecting the PC directly to the �E, use the LA�

10Base-T cross-over cable. If you connecting the PC to a hub, use the LA� 10Base-T

straight-through cable.

Important! If you are uncertain that the MGMT LAN port or Ethernet network LA�

port has already been provisioned, connecting via the serial port is recommended.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Establish a Telnet or secure shell (SSH) session from your PC using the default IP address

or the IP address obtained from your network administrator.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-7


...................................................................................................................................................................................................






...................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-8 365-372-406R7.0



establish remote CLI session using Ethernet network

Overview

Use this procedure to establish a remote CLI session with the VL�C4x/VL�C6x circuit

pack.

Important! This procedure assumes that the proper connection interfaces have

already been configured using the procedures in Procedure 2-2: “Configure

VL�C4x/VL�C6x for in-band or out-of-band connectivity ” (p. 2-10).

This procedure also assumes that Telnet or secure shell (SSH) access has been

configured. See Telnet Commands and/or Secure Shell (SSH) commands in the

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface

Guide.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Obtain a user name and password, if required, and the IP address of the

VL�C4x/VL�C6x from your network administrator.

Important! You must obtain a user name and password if the default user name of

admin has been changed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Establish a Telnet or secure shell (SSH) session from your PC using the default IP address

or the IP address obtained from your network administrator.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................






...................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


establish remote CLI session using Ethernet network

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-9

Procedure 2-2: Configure VLNC4x/VLNC6x for in-band or

out-of-band connectivity

Overview

Use this procedure to connect PC and configure initial parameters for in-band or

out-of-band connectivity to the VL�C4x/VL�C6x.

Out-of-band connectivity refers to using the RS-232 console port on the VLIU or the

MGMT LAN port on the VL�C4x/VL�C6x faceplate to access the VL�C4x/VL�C6x.

In-band connectivity allows you to access the VL�C4x/VL�C6x from a local or remote

PC using the Ethernet network and the IP address information assigned to the

VL�C4x/VL�C6x You must configure the VL�C4x/VL�C6x network parameters with

IP address information (IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway) to access the

VL�C4x/VL�C6x in-band. All the network LA� ports will share one IP address.

The network port and serviceport IP address information must be in different IP subnets.

Only one gateway may be defined for remote access, either on the network port or the

serviceport.

This procedure assumes that the VL�C4x/VL�C6x was not configured before and is in

the factory default state.

Required equipment

At least one of the following cables is required for direct connection to the network

element:

• RS-232 cable with an RJ-45 connector on one end for the RS232 console port (RS232

M2) or (RS232 M1) on the VLIU, and a PC serial connector on the other end for

connection to the PC.

• CAT5 Ethernet straight-through or a cross-over cable for the RJ-45 MGMT LAN port

on the VL�C4x/VL�C6x faceplate, any of the 20 "in-band" FE Ethernet ports on the

VLIU for the VL�C4x, or any of the GbE SFP ports on the VL�C4x/VL�C6x

faceplate.

For detailed cabling information, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service

Switch (TSS-5) Installation and System Turn-Up Guide.

Before you begin


1. Determine whether you will configure the VL�C4x/VL�C6x for in-band or

out-of-band connectivity.

2. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line

Interface Guide, and become familiar with the command structure.

Getting started Procedure 2-2: Configure VLNC4x/VLNC6x for in-band or


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-10 365-372-406R7.0


3. Refer to “Electrostatic discharge” (p. 1-18) in Chapter 1, “Safety”.

4. Obtain the required connection parameters to be set. For example, IP address,

Gateway, and Subnet mask.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Connect PC and establish CLI session with the VL�C4x/VL�C6x.


CLI session using RS-232 console port” (p. 2-5)

Procedure 2-1.2: “Connect personal computer (PC) and establish local CLI session

using MGMT LA� serviceport” (p. 2-7)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To configure network parameters for in-band connectivity manually, refer to Procedure

2-2.1: “Configure in-band connectivity manually” (p. 2-12).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To configure network parameters for in-band connectivity using DHCP or BootP, refer to

Procedure 2-2.2: “Configure for in-band connectivity using DHCP/BootP” (p. 2-14)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To configure MGMT LAN serviceport for out-of-band connectivity using DHCP/BootP,

refer to Procedure 2-2.3: “Configure MGMT LA� serviceport for out-of-band

connectivity using DHCP/BootP” (p. 2-16)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To configure MGMT LAN serviceport for out-of-band connectivity manually, refer to

Procedure 2-2.4: “Configure MGMT LA� serviceport for out-of-band connectivity

manually” (p. 2-18)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 To configure RS-232 console port for out-of-band connectivity manually, refer to

Procedure 2-2.5: “Configure RS-232 port for out-of-band connectivity” (p. 2-20)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 To configure RS-232 console port for out-of-band connectivity manually, refer to

Procedure 2-2.6: “Configure in-band connectivity when ethertype on

VL�C40/VL�C42/VL�C42B is set to vMA�” (p. 2-22)

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Getting started Procedure 2-2: Configure VLNC4x/VLNC6x for in-band or


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-11

Procedure 2-2.1: Configure in-band connectivity manually

Overview

Use this procedure to configure for in-band connectivity. In-band connectivity allows you

to access the VL�C4x/VL�C6x from a local or remote PC using the IP address

information assigned to the VL�C4x/VL�C6x. The VL�C4x/VL�C6x must be

connected to the user's network. All the network LA� ports will share one IP address.

Related information

For related procedures using the Web GUI, refer to Procedure 5-4.4: “�etwork port

in-band connectivity” (p. 5-18) in Chapter 5, “System provisioning features”.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the User EXEC prompt [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) >, enter enable to enter the user

privilege mode.

The same password is required as for login (default is just press Enter).

Result: The user privilege prompt (ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) # displays.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Use the show network command to display default network configuration settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If required, use the network protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} command to

specify none for the network configuration protocol to be used.

Example: network protocol none.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Use the network parms command to enter the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway

address (if required) being used for the network ports. The IP Address and gateway must

be on the same subnet. Gateway is an optional parameter.

Example: (ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) #

network parms <ipaddress> <netmask> [<gateway>].

The network port and serviceport IP address information need to be in different IP

subnets. The network port and serviceport IP address information must be in different

IP subnets. Only one gateway may be defined for remote access, either on the network

port or the serviceport.

Getting started Procedure 2-2.1: Configure in-band connectivity manually

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-12 365-372-406R7.0


If this command fails, you may get an error message if the serviceport IP address has

already been assigned and this IP address for the network ports is in the same subnet.

You will have to reprovision one of the IP addresses.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Save the configuration changes using the write memory command. At the user privilege

prompt, enter write memory.

Required only if you want the current configuration information to be preserved across

reboots.

Result: System message indicates:

This operation may take a few minutes.

Management interfaces will not be available during this time.

Are you sure you want to save (y/n)?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enter y to execute the command.

Result: After a few seconds, a confirmation message appears:

Configuration Saved!

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Use the show network command to confirm your changes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Getting started Procedure 2-2.1: Configure in-band connectivity manually

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-13

Procedure 2-2.2: Configure for in-band connectivity using

DHCP/BootP

Overview

Use this procedure to configure for in-band connectivity by using DHCP/BootP. In-band

connectivity allows you to access the VL�C4x/VL�C6x from a local or remote PC using

the IP address information assigned to the VL�C4x/VL�C6x. The VL�C4x/VL�C6x

must be connected to the user's network. All the network LA� ports will share one IP

address.




serviceport.

Related information

For related procedures using the Web GUI, refer to Procedure 5-4.4: “�etwork port

in-band connectivity” (p. 5-18) in Chapter 5, “System provisioning features”.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the User EXEC prompt [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) >, enter enable to enter the user

privilege mode.

�o password is required at this time, just press Enter.

Result: The user privilege prompt [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) #] displays.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter show network command to obtain information about the VL�C4x/VL�C6x

default network configuration settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 You need to configure the BootP or DHCP server with information about the switch

obtained through the serial port connection using the show network command.

Configure the DHCP/BootP server with the following information:

• Unique IP address for the switch.

• Subnet mask for the LA�.

• Gateway IP address of the default router, if the switch is a node outside the IP range of

the LA�.

• MAC address of the VL�C4x/VL�C6x.

Getting started Procedure 2-2.2: Configure for in-band connectivity using

DHCP/BootP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-14 365-372-406R7.0


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Use the network protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} command to specify the

network configuration protocol to be used.

Example: network protocol dhcp.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Connect the VL�C4x/VL�C6x to the Ethernet network.

After the VL�C4x/VL�C6xis connected to the network, it periodically sends requests to

a BootP/DHCP server until a response is received.

Result: The VL�C4x/VL�C6x is configured with the information from the

DHCP/BootP server.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 After configuration, use the show network command to view network parameters.

If the IP address is not assigned, use the show logging buffered command to

find out the reason for DHCP failing to install the IP address. Check if the serviceport

IP address is already assigned (show serviceport) and on the same subnet as the

DHCP offered IP address. You will have to reprovision one of the IP addresses.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Getting started Procedure 2-2.2: Configure for in-band connectivity using

DHCP/BootP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-15

Procedure 2-2.3: Configure MGMT LAN serviceport for

out-of-band connectivity using DHCP/BootP

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the MGMT LAN serviceport for out-of-band connectivity.

Important! The VL�C4x/VL�C6x is initially configured for local out-of-band

connectivity through the MGMT LAN serviceport . You can keep the MGMT LAN port

default IP address (169.254.1.1) and use the MGMT LAN port locally for out-of-band

connectivity to the VL�C4x/VL�C6x, if desired.

If the MGMT LAN port is to be used for remote connectivity through the Ethernet

network, it must be connected to the LA� Ethernet network and have the proper

configuration settings for the network.





You can use this procedure to change the default configuration settings for the MGMT

LAN serviceport.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the User EXEC prompt [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) >], enter enable to enter the

user privilege mode.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter show serviceport command to obtain information about the MGMT LAN

serviceport default configuration settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Configure the DHCP/BootP server with the following information:

• Unique IP address.

• Subnet mask.

• Gateway IP address, if required.

• MAC address of the MGMT LAN port.

Getting started Procedure 2-2.3: Configure MGMT LAN serviceport for


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-16 365-372-406R7.0


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Use the serviceport protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} command to specify

the serviceport configuration protocol to be used.

Example: serviceport protocol dhcp.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Connect the MGMT LAN port to the LA� network.

After the VL�C4x/VL�C6x MGMT LAN port is connected to the network, it periodically

sends requests to a BootP/DHCP server until a response is received.


DHCP/BootP server.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 After configuration, use the show serviceport command to view network parameters.

If the IP address is not assigned, use the show logging buffered command to

find out the reason for DHCP failing to install the IP address. Check if the network IP

address is already assigned (show network) and on the same subnet as the DHCP

offered IP address. You will have to reprovision one of the IP addresses.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Interface Guide, for help on using other CLI commands.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-17

Procedure 2-2.4: Configure MGMT LAN serviceport for

out-of-band connectivity manually

Overview



connectivity through the MGMT LAN serviceport . You can keep the MGMT LAN port











LAN serviceport.

Related information

Refer to Procedure 5-4.3: “Service port configuration” (p. 5-15) in Chapter 5, “System

provisioning features”.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the User EXEC prompt, [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) >], enter enable to enter the



Result: The user privilege prompt [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) #], displays.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter show serviceport command to obtain information about the MGMT LAN

serviceport default configuration settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Use the serviceport protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} command to specify

the serviceport configuration protocol as none.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-18 365-372-406R7.0


Example: serviceport protocol none.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Use the serviceport ip command to enter the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway

address (if required) being used for the serviceport. The IP Address and gateway must be

on the same subnet. Gateway is an optional parameter.


subnets. The network port and serviceport IP address information must be in different IP

subnets. Only one gateway may be defined for remote access, either on the network port

or the serviceport.

Example: serviceport ip <ipaddress> <netmask> [<gateway>].




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If required, save the configuration changes using the write memory command. At the

user privilege prompt, enter write memory.

Required only if you want the current configuration information to be preserved across

reboots.

Result: System message indicates:

This operation may take a few minutes.

Management interfaces will not be available during this time.

Are you sure you want to save (y/n)?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enter y to execute the command.

Result: After a few seconds, a confirmation message appears:

Configuration Saved!

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Connect the MGMT LAN port to the LA� network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 After configuration, use the show serviceport command to view network parameters.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-19

Procedure 2-2.5: Configure RS-232 port for out-of-band

connectivity

Overview

Use this procedure to configure for out-of-band connectivity by using the RS-232 console

port.

Important! The VL�C4x/VL�C6x may be initially configured for out-of-band

connectivity through the RS-232 console port.

The RS-232 RJ45 port (RS232 M1 or RS232 M2) on the front of the VLIU that

connects to the Main 1 or Main 2 slot is not generally recommended for use in

connecting to the VL�C4x/VL�C6x. It is normally used by service personnel.

You can use this procedure to change the default configuration settings for the RS-232

console port.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the User EXEC prompt, [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) >], enter enable to enter the



Result: The user privilege prompt [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) #] displays.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter show serial command to obtain information about the RS-232 console port

default configuration settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the user privilege prompt, enter configure to enter the Global Config mode.


Result: The Global Config prompt [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) (Config) #] displays.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Global Config prompt, enter lineconfig to enter the Line Config mode.

�o password is required at this time, just type Enter.

Result: The Line Config prompt [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) (Line)#] displays.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If required, from the Line Config prompt, enter the serial baudrate <rate_value>

command to set the baudrate.

Getting started Procedure 2-2.5: Configure RS-232 port for out-of-band

connectivity

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-20 365-372-406R7.0


Example: serial baudrate 115200.

Range: {1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200}

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If required, from the Line Config prompt, enter the

serial timeout <timeout_value> command to set the maximum connect time.

Example: serial timeout 100.

Range: 0-160 in minutes. A value of 0 indicates that a console can be connected

indefinitely.

The other parameters (Character size, flow control, stop bits, and parity) are always

set to default values and cannot be changed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Enter exit twice to get down to the user privilege prompt [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) #].

Enter show serial command to obtain information about the serial port configuration

settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Getting started Procedure 2-2.5: Configure RS-232 port for out-of-band

connectivity

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-21

Procedure 2-2.6: Configure in-band connectivity when

ethertype on VLNC40/VLNC42/VLNC42B is set to vMAN

Overview

Use this procedure as an example for configuring for in-band connectivity when ethertype

on the VL�C4x is set to vMA�. In-band connectivity allows you to access the

VL�C4x/VL�C6x from a local or remote PC using the IP address information assigned

to the VL�C4x/VL�C6x. The VL�C4x/VL�C6x must be connected to the user's

network. Using the network configuration in this example, inband management of all

circuit packs can be performed across a Q-in-Q/Q-in-vMA� domain either locally from a

OMS network or remotely from a Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 installation.

Additional provisioning is needed for creation and maintenance of pseudo-wire services

on VL�C60/VL�C64. These are related to PS� tunnels, Pseudo-wires, BFD, routing

(static routes/arp), etc. Also in order to use the backplane ports between VL�C4x and

VL�C60/VL�C64 in a TSS-5 shelf, additional provisioning (backplane port) is

required to enable the backplane port. By default, the backplane port is disabled. LA�

cables are required between some ports.

Refer to Figure 2-1, “Inband management with Q-in-Q setup” (p. 2-27) in provisioning

the parameters in this example.

In this example, VLA� id of 800 is used for handling the management traffic from/to a

OAM network and a VLA� id of 1 is used for handling pseudo-wire data traffic and

associated control/management traffic (arp/BFD packets/etc).

Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 At TSS-5 A, login to the VL�C4x circuit pack (OAM �etwork Gateway Switch) being

provisioned.

From the User EXEC prompt [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) >, enter enable to enter the user

privilege mode.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Use the show serviceport command to display default serviceport configuration

settings.

Getting started Procedure 2-2.6: Configure in-band connectivity when


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-22 365-372-406R7.0


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If required, use the serviceport ip command to enter the IP address, subnet mask,

and gateway address (if required) being used for the serviceport. The IP Address and

gateway must be on the same subnet. Gateway is an optional parameter. Use the default

settings for the VL�C4x: 169.254.1.1; 255.255.0.0; 0.0.0.0.


serviceport ip <ipaddress> <netmask> [<gateway>].





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Use the show network command to display default network configuration settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If required, use the network protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} command to

specify none for the network configuration protocol to be used.

Example: network protocol none.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


address (if required) being used for the network ports. The IP Address and gateway must

be on the same subnet. Gateway is an optional parameter. Use network parms parameters:

152.148.119.183; 255.255.254.0; 152.148.118.1.


network parms 152.148.119.183 255.255.254.0 152.148.118.1.








...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Use the network mgmt_vlan <vlanid> command to set the Management VLA� ID

to 800 in this example.

Example: (ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) # network mgmt_vlan 800.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Enter vlan database command to enter the VLA� Config mode.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Enter vlan 800 command to create a new VLA� and assign an ID. Enter exit to return

to user privilege mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Enter configure to enter the Global Config mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Enter interface <interface-number>, where interface-number is either a-9, a-10,

or a-11 (TSS-5 A).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Enter the following commands, one at a time, to provision the parameters for ports a-9,

a-10, a-11:

1. vlan pvid 800

2. vlan participation exclude 1

3. vlan participation include 800

4. dvlan-tunnel ethertype vman

5. exit

Repeat this step for interfaces a-9, a-10, and a-11.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Enter interface <interface-number>, where interface-number is d2-1..

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Enter the following commands, one at a time, to provision the parameters for d2-1:

1. vlan tagging 1

2. vlan participation include 800

3. vlan tagging 800

4. mode dvlan-tunnel


6. exit

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Enter interface <interface-number>, where interface-number is d2-4..

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Enter the following commands, one at a time, to provision the parameters for d2-4:

1. vlan participation exclude 800


3. exit



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-24 365-372-406R7.0


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 If required, save the configuration changes using the write memory command. At the

user privilege prompt, enter write memory.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Login to the VL�C64 at TSS-5 A.


privilege mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


address (if required) being used for the serviceport. Use these settings for this VL�C64:

152.148.119.63; 255.255.254.0; 152.148.118.1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


address being used for the network ports. Use network parms parameters: 185.13.75.47;

255.255.0.0; 0.0.0.0.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 At TSS-5 B, login to the VL�C4x circuit pack being provisioned.


privilege mode.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Repeat Step 2 thru Step 17 to provision the same parameters on the VL�C4x in TSS-5 B.

The only exceptions are: (1) the network parms IP address parameter for this VL�C4x is

152.148.119.64. The netmask and gateway address are the same as the VL�C4x in

TSS-5 A; (2) There is no customer port a-11.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Login to the VL�C60 at TSS-5 B.


privilege mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


address being used for the serviceport. Use these settings for this VL�C60:

152.148.119.117; 255.255.254.0; 152.148.118.1.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-25

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


address being used for the network ports. Use network parms parameters: 185.13.75.44;

255.255.0.0; 0.0.0.0.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-26 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-1 Inband management with Q-in-Q setup

Service ProviderNetwork

Serviceport

Serviceport

Serviceport

Serviceport

A-10

A-10

A-9A-11

A-9

OAMNetwork

C

C

C C

C

C

(800)

(800)

(800)

(800)

(800)

VLNC40(Mgmt VLAN-800)

Inband Mgmt

VLNC40(Mgmt VLAN-800)

Inband Mgmt

Backplane

Backplane

D2-4

D2-4

D1-1

(1, 800)

(1)

(1)

VLNC64Out of Band Mgmt*

VLNC60Out of Band Mgmt*

Q-in-Q orQ-in-vMANtraffic

D2-1

D2-1

N

N

Untaggedmanagement

traffic

Untaggedmanagement

traffic

PW and PW relatedmanagement

(ARP/BFD) traffic

PW and PW relatedmanagement

(ARP/BFD) traffic

TSS-5 A

TSS-5 B

C

D1-1

*PSN tunnels/PW use inband network parmsIP address for ARP/BFD traffic on VLNC60/64.

Q-in-Q orQ-in-vMANtraffic

-Management traffic in outer pipe with vMan (800)-PW and PW related mgmt (ARP/BFD) traffic in outerpipe with vMAN (1)

C - Customer portN - Network port(800) - Denotes VLAN participation

- Extra LAN cables

Connect to OAM network aswell as to all VLNC40/60/64

Single Telnet session accessMultiple Telnet session access

PC

inband-mgmt-QinQ



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


2-27

3 3Using the Web interface

Overview

Purpose

The Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5 CLI based circuit packs can be managed using the CLI

command interface or the Web GUI interface. This section provides a brief introduction to

the Web GUI interface. It explains how to access the interface and use the menu structure

for system management and provisioning.

Each VL�C4x or VL�C6x pack should be connected to the network and have its IP

address configured first. The user then accesses the pack via the Web GUI by entering the

IP address of the pack as the URL in the HTTP-enabled Web browser. The Login screen is

displayed next. Once the user enters the valid username and password and connecting to

the VL�C4x or VL�C6x pack is successful, then the Web GUI main page is displayed.

To access the Web GUI, the browser must support:

• HTML 4.0 or later

• HTTP 1.1 or later

• JavaScript 1.2 or later

• Java Runtime Plug-in 1.50-06 or later

Contents

Procedure 3-1: Web Access Configuration 3-2

Procedure 3-2: Starting the Web Interface 3-3

Web page interface 3-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


3-1

Procedure 3-1: Web Access Configuration

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Configure the circuit pack for network connectivity.

Reference: Chapter 2, “Getting started”.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Establish a CLI command session with the circuit pack.

Procedure 2-1: “Connect personal computer (PC) and establish Command Line

Interface (CLI) session to VL�C4x/VL�C6x” (p. 2-3)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Verify Web GUI mode is enabled. From the Privileged EXEC Mode prompt, enter the

show ip http command. Make sure that HTTP Mode and Java Mode are both

Enabled.

If the HTTP Mode and Java Mode are not enabled: Enter ip http server and

ip http java.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using the Web interface Procedure 3-1: Web Access Configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-2 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 3-2: Starting the Web Interface

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter the IP address of the pack in the Web browser address field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 When the Login panel displays, enter your User Name and Password, then click Login.

�ote: The default User �ame is admin and the Password is blank.

Result: The Web GUI main page should display. The user should be able to manage

and configure the circuit pack by selecting any of the options in the �avigation Tree

located at left of the Web page screen.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Using the Web interface Procedure 3-2: Starting the Web Interface

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


3-3

Web page interface

Layout

The web page consists of four frames:

• The upper left frame displays the Component Logo link.

• The upper right frame displays a banner or Java Applet �avigation.

• The lower left frame displays the command �avigation Tree.

• The lower right frame displays the Web Page Content associated with the �avigation

Tree.

The �avigation Tree and the Web Contents are the two frames that allow the user to

configure and view the settings and statistics of the pack.

Navigation tree frame

The �avigation Tree displays the menu and submenu options of the management system

in a hierarchical-tree view. The tree consists of a combination of folders (main menus),

subfolders (submenus), and configuration and status HTML pages (functions). Each main

menu is a major feature, such as Switching, Routing, QoS, etc. The submenu options

under each main menu are the sub-features. The options under each submenu are the

functions of that sub-feature. In the �avigation Tree, the function is indicated by a “file”

icon. In the Web GUI, any function will have one Web Page Content frame associated

with it.

Web page content frame

For each function in the �avigation Tree, there is a corresponding Web Page Content

which allows the end user to set or view the settings for the circuit pack. The Web Page

Content is a form-based GUI screen which contains the screen title, parameter entries

(each with label and value) as well as controls such as dropdown lists, buttons, etc.

Using the Web interface Web page interface

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-4 365-372-406R7.0


4 4Software management

Overview

Purpose

This section contains software management procedures for the

VL�C40/VL�C42/VL�C42B/VL�C60/VL�C61/VL�C62/VL�C64

(VL�C4x/VL�C6x) circuit pack.

This procedure assumes that you have TFTP/SFTP server support (either a local

TFTP/SFTP server for local downloads, or a remote TFTP/SFTP server configured with

the (VL�C4x/VL�C6x) operating software).


Interface Guide for help on using CLI commands.

This chapter includes procedures to:

• Check software versions

• Copy software image from one image slot to another

• Backup and restore configuration data

Contents

Procedure 4-1: Determine VL�C4x/VL�C6x software versions stored in

non-volatile memory

4-2

Procedure 4-2: Copy VL�C4x/VL�C6x software image from one Image slot to

the other Image slot

4-3

Procedure 4-3: Backup or restore VL�C4x/VL�C6x configuration data 4-4

Procedure 4-4: Upgrade VL�C4x/VL�C6x software/firmware 4-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


4-1

Procedure 4-1: Determine VLNC4x/VLNC6x software versions

stored in non-volatile memory

Overview

The VL�C4x/VL�C6x contains up to two software loads, referred to as Image1 and

Image2. Use this procedure to determine which of the image slots contains a valid

software load and the version of each software load.

The show bootvar CLI command displays information for the version and the

activation status of the current active and backup images. The command also displays any

description text associated with an image. This command also displays the switch

activation status.

This procedure assumes that the VL�C4x/VL�C6x has been previously installed.


Interface Guide, for help on using CLI commands.

Related information

Equivalent Web GUI command: From the �avigation menu, select

System → Dual Image Status. See Procedure 5-3: “Display dual image status

(software versions)” (p. 5-9).

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Login to the VL�C4x/VL�C6x.


Reference: Procedure 2-1: “Connect personal computer (PC) and establish Command

Line Interface (CLI) session to VL�C4x/VL�C6x” (p. 2-3)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the User EXEC prompt, enter enable to enter the Privileged EXEC mode.

Result: The Privileged EXEC prompt [(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx) #] displays.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Privileged EXEC prompt, enter show bootvar to show the version and status

of the current active and backup images.

Result: The system displays the software versions held in the Image1 and Image2

memory banks. It also shows which Image is the active Image for the boot sequence.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software management Procedure 4-1: Determine VLNC4x/VLNC6x software

versions stored in non-volatile memory

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-2 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 4-2: Copy VLNC4x/VLNC6x software image from

one Image slot to the other Image slot

Overview


Image2. Use this procedure to copy one software load from one image slot to the other

image slot. This is done so that the system has a backup in case one image slot becomes

corrupted.

The copy <source> <destination> command uploads and downloads files to and

from the switch. You can also use the copy command to manage dual images (image1 and

image2) on the file system. Upload and download files from a server by using

TFTP/SFTP or Xmodem.




Related information

Equivalent Web GUI command: From the �avigation menu, select

System → System Utilities → Copy Image. See Procedure 5-7.10: “Copy

Image” (p. 5-56).

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Privileged EXEC prompt, enter copy image1 image2 or

copy image2 image1, as required.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software management Procedure 4-2: Copy VLNC4x/VLNC6x software image

from one Image slot to the other Image slot

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


4-3

Procedure 4-3: Backup or restore VLNC4x/VLNC6x

configuration data

Overview

Important! Only use this procedure to backup and restore the configuration data

within the same software release. For backup and restore of configuration data across

different releases, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5)

Software Release Description (SRD).

Use this procedure to copy (backup/restore) the startup configuration file to/from a server.

The copy <source> <destination> command uploads and downloads files to and

from the switch. You can also use the copy command to manage dual images (image1 and

image2) on the file system. Upload and download files from a server by using TFTP or

Xmodem.




Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Login to the VL�C40/VL�C42/VL�C60/VL�C61/VL�C64 .




...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To backup the system configuration file:

• From the Privileged EXEC prompt, enter

copy nvram:startup-config tftp://<ipaddr>/<filepath>/

<filename> to copy the startup-config file to the specified destination on the server.

• For example:

copy nvram:startup-config tftp://xxx.xxx.1.1/home/Admin/

Startup_Configuration_file.

Software management Procedure 4-3: Backup or restore VLNC4x/VLNC6x

configuration data

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-4 365-372-406R7.0


To restore the system configuration file:

• From the Privileged EXEC prompt, enter

copy tftp://<ipaddr>/<filepath>/<filename> nvram:startup-

config to copy the saved startup-config file to the

VL�C40/VL�C42/VL�C60/VL�C61/VL�C64.

• For example:

copy tftp://xxx.xxx.1.1/home/Admin/Startup_Configuration_file

nvram:startup-config.

Result: The system displays the details of the command entered and asks if you want

to continue

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter “y” to continue the upload/download, or “n” to abort the command.

Result: If you entered “y” to continue, the configuration file is copied to the specified

destination. �o other commands are possible while this command is executing. The

system will then display a message and then will display if the operation was

successful.

After a successful restore using the copy command with nvram:startup-config, only

the running configuration is changed with the restored data. If you need to also

change the startup-configuration, an additional “write memory” command is needed

to save the running configuration changes to nvram so that the changes will persist

during a reboot. The “write memory” command is the same as “copy

system:running-config nvram:startup-config”.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software management Procedure 4-3: Backup or restore VLNC4x/VLNC6x

configuration data

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


4-5

Procedure 4-4: Upgrade VLNC4x/VLNC6x software/firmware

Overview

Important! Depending on the combined level of in-band and LA� network

congestion, multiple, in-band software downloads might time out when using some

TFTP servers. If simultaneous in-band downloads do not complete successfully,

repeat the software download and try downloading a single software image.

Depending on the level of LA� network congestion, a single in-band software

download can also time out. Some TFTP servers include a provisionable,

transmission-retry settings. If a single software download does not complete

successfully, repeat the software download using an alternate TFTP server.

Upgrade procedures for the VL�C4x/VL�C6x circuit packs are found in the

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Software Release Description

(SRD). The SRD contains the latest upgrade procedures, known problems, and a

description of any special considerations involving this version of software.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the procedures in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Software

Release Description to perform required upgrades.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software management Procedure 4-4: Upgrade VLNC4x/VLNC6x

software/firmware

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-6 365-372-406R7.0


5 5System provisioning

features

Overview

Purpose

The System menu feature includes, but is not limited to:

• System information

• System configuration

Configuration includes many items related to the following:

– System description

– Local and remote switch access configuration

– User accounts, logins and authentication

• Forwarding database search and configuration

• Logging configuration and viewing

• Configure and display the description for all ports

• S�MP configuration

• Display port and switch statistics

• System utilities

• Trap manager

• S�TP

This section covers requirements pertaining to the System menu feature and in particular

describes the Web GUI handling of �etwork Connectivity Configuration and Backplane

Port. Any user has access to the System feature options/screens. However, only the

privilege user is able to configure the System parameters. �etwork Connectivity and

Backplane Port are supported in all packs.

Contents


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-1

Procedure 5-1: Display ARP cache entries associated with management

interfaces

5-4

Procedure 5-2: View system inventory information 5-6

Procedure 5-3: Display dual image status (software versions) 5-9

Procedure 5-4: System configuration 5-11

Procedure 5-5: Log configuration and viewing 5-36

Procedure 5-6: S�MP community and trap receiver configuration 5-39

Procedure 5-7: System Utilities 5-43

Procedure 5-8: Trap Manager configuration 5-57

Procedure 5-9: Simple �etwork Time Protocol (S�TP) configuration 5-59

Procedure 5-10: Radius authentication server configuration 5-69

Procedure 5-11: Secure shell configuration 5-72

System provisioning features Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-2 365-372-406R7.0


Before you begin

Before you begin




Required equipment

All procedures in this chapter require that the following equipment is available:

• Personal Computer (PC)

• Wrist Strap



System provisioning features Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-3

Procedure 5-1: Display ARP cache entries associated with

management interfaces

Overview

The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) dynamically maps physical (MAC) addresses to

Internet (IP) addresses. This command displays the contents of the IP stack ARP table.

The IP stack only learns ARP entries associated with the management interfaces (network

or service port).

For each connection, the following information is displayed:

• The physical (MAC) Address.

• The associated IP address.

• The identification of the port being used for the connection.

The displayed results are not the total ARP entries. ARP entries associated with routing

interfaces are not listed. To view the total ARP entries, you should also view the ARP

Table Configuration using Routing → ARP Table Configuration. See Procedure 10-1:

“Address resolution protocol (ARP) routing” (p. 10-3).



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the �avigation menu, select System → ARP Cache.

Equivalent CLI command: show arp switch.

Result: The ARP Cache window displays the current contents of the ARP cache.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If required, click Refresh to refresh the page with the latest data. See “ARP cache

entries” (p. 5-5).

System provisioning features Procedure 5-1: Display ARP cache entries associated with


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-4 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ARP cache entries

Parameter Description CLI command

MAC Address The hardware MAC address

associated with IP address the

interface or device.

show arp switch

IP Address The IP address of the

management interface or

another device on the

management network.

show arp switch

Slot/Port For a service port, the output

is Management. For a

network port, the output is the

slot or port of the physical

interface.

show arp switch

System provisioning features Procedure 5-1: Display ARP cache entries associated with


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-5

Procedure 5-2: View system inventory information

Overview

Use this procedure to display system inventory information. See “Inventory information”

(p. 5-6).



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the �avigation menu, select System → Inventory Information.

Equivalent CLI command: show version.

Result: The Inventory Information window displays the current system inventory.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If required, click Refresh to refresh the page with the latest data.

Inventory information


System

Description

The field is used to identify the switch product name.

The format of this field is the following: Alcatel-Lucent

1850TSS-5 <shelf> <appcode> <series> <sw ver>

where:

• shelf = {IS-RM | HC-RM1} for ShelfID bits =

{0101 | 0011} respectively.

In addition it could be {HC-RM10 | HC-RM2 |

HC-RM3} on VLIU10, VLIU2, VLIU3 respectively.

• appcode = {VL�C40 | VL�C42 | VL�C42B |

VL�C60 | VL�C61 | VL�C62 | VL�C64}, either

compiled-in or read from inventory EEPROM.

• series = read from inventory EEPROM.

• sw-ver = compiled-in, of the form ##.##.##.##.

show version

System provisioning features Procedure 5-2: View system inventory information

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-6 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Machine Type The machine type as defined by the Vital Product Data.

• VL�C40 - “Alcatel-Lucent 1850TSS-5 20FE/4GE

Aggregator”.

• VL�C42 - “Alcatel-Lucent 1850TSS-5 20FE/4GE

Aggregator-SE”.

• VL�C42B - “Alcatel-Lucent 1850TSS-5 20FE/4GE

Aggregator-SE/TC/TMPLS”,

• VL�C60 - “Alcatel-Lucent 1850TSS-5 8T1E1/2GE

PWE/ MLPPP”

• VL�C61 - “Alcatel-Lucent 1850TSS-5

16T1E1/2GE PWE/MLPPP”


16T1E1/2GE PWE/MLPPP/ToD”


OC-3STM-1/ 2GbE PWE”

Machine Model The machine model as defined by the Vital Product

Data. The format is Alcatel-Lucent <appcode>.

CLEI Info The Common Language Equipment �umber, as read

from EEPROM

ECI Info The Equipment Catalog Item, as read f rom EEPROM

Apparatus Code The Circuit Pack �ame, as read from EEPROM. For

example, VL�C40

Series The Circuit Pack Series, as read from EEPROM. For

example, S1:1

Serial �umber The unique box serial number for this switch, as read

from EEPROM.

FRU �umber The field replaceable unit number

Part �umber Manufacturing part number

Maintenance

Level

Indicates hardware changes that are significant to

software.

Manufacturer Manufacturer descriptor field

Burned In MAC

Address

Universally assigned network address, as read from

EEPROM.

Software

Version

The release.version.revision number of the code

currently running on the switch

Operating

System

The operating system currently running on the switch


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-7


�etwork

Processing

Device

The type of the processor microcode

Additional

Packages

This displays the additional packages incorporated into

this system


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-8 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 5-3: Display dual image status (software versions)

Overview


Image2.

Use this procedure to display information for the version and the activation status of the

current active and backup software images. It also displays any description text associated

with an image as well as the switch activation status.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the �avigation menu, select System → Dual Image Status.

Equivalent CLI command: From the Privileged EXEC prompt, enter show bootvar

to show the version and status of the current active and backup images.

Result: The Dual Image Status screen displays the Dual Image Status.

The system displays the software versions held in the Image1 and Image2 memory

banks. It also shows which Image is the active Image for the boot sequence.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If required, click Refresh to refresh the page with the latest data. See “Dual image status

display” (p. 5-9).

Dual image status display


Image 1 Ver The version number of Image1. show bootvar

Image 2 Ver The version number of Image2.

Backup The version number of the backup

copy.

Current-active Current active image

�ext-active �ext active image

System provisioning features Procedure 5-3: Display dual image status (software

versions)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-9

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Image 1 Description The text description of Image1.

Image 2 Description The text description of Image2.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-3: Display dual image status (software

versions)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-10 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 5-4: System configuration

Overview

Use these procedures to configure and/or display the following System →Configuration parameters:

• System description

• �etwork interface

– �etwork Port (�etwork Connectivity)

– Service Port

• HTTP configuration

• Telnet

• Serial port (RS232 console) access

• User Accounts, logins and authentication

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Perform the following procedures as required.

• Procedure 5-4.1: “System description, configuration and display” (p. 5-12).

• Procedure 5-4.2: “Enable/Disable 802.3x switch flow control” (p. 5-14)

• Procedure 5-4.3: “Service port configuration” (p. 5-15)

• Procedure 5-4.4: “�etwork port in-band connectivity” (p. 5-18)

• Procedure 5-4.5: “HTTP configuration (enable/disable Web GUI interface )” (p. 5-22)

• Procedure 5-4.6: “Telnet session configuration” (p. 5-24)

• Procedure 5-4.7: “Outbound Telnet client configuration” (p. 5-26)

• Procedure 5-4.8: “Serial (Console) port configuration” (p. 5-28)

• Procedure 5-4.9: “User accounts, logins, and authentication” (p. 5-29)

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4: System configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-11

Procedure 5-4.1: System description, configuration and

display

Overview

Use this procedure to configure system name, location, and contact information and

display various system data. See “System description parameters” (p. 5-12).

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the �avigation menu, select

System → Configuration → System Description.

Result: The System Description window displays the current system description.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter system name, location and contact as required.

• System Name - Alphanumeric string 1-31 characters in length.

• System Location - Alphanumeric string 1-31 characters in length.

• System Contact - Alphanumeric string 1-31 characters in length.

Equivalent CLI commands:

• From the Privileged EXEC Mode, enter show sysinfo to display system

information.

• From the Global Config Mode, enter

snmp-server {sysname <name> | location <loc> | contact <con>} to

configure system name, location, and contact

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Submit at the bottom of the screen to execute the commands.

System description parameters

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4.1: System description, configuration and

display

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-12 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


System

Description

Identifies the switch product name. The format of this

field is the following: Alcatel-Lucent 1850TSS-5 <shelf>

<appcode> <series> <sw ver> where:

• shelf = {IS-RM | HC-RM1} for ShelfID bits = {0101 |

0011} respectively.

In addition it could be {HC-RM10 | HC-RM2 |

HC-RM3} on VLIU10, VLIU2, VLIU3 respectively.

• appcode = {VL�C40 | VL�C42 | VL�C42B |

VL�C60 | VL�C61 | VL�C62 | VL�C64}, either

compiled-in or read from inventory EEPROM.

• series = read from inventory EEPROM.

• sw-ver = compiled-in, of the form ##.##.##.##.

show sysinfo

System �ame The name used to identify the switch. The factory default

is blank.

snmp-server sysname

<name>

System Location The text used to identify the location of the switch. The

factory default is blank.

snmp-server

location <loc>

System Contact The text used to identify a contact person for this switch.

The factory default is blank.

snmp-server contact

<con>

�etworkPort IP

Address(in-band)

The IP address of the network ports for in-band access. show sysinfo

ServicePort IP

Address(out-of-

band)

The IP address for the service port (Management LA�

port [MGMT LA�]) on the switch faceplate.

show sysinfo

System Object ID The base object ID for the switch’s enterprise MIB show sysinfo

System Up Time The time in days, hours and minutes since the last switch

reboot.

show sysinfo

Current S�TP

Synchronized

Time

Month, day, hour:min:sec, year in UTC, if synchronized,

otherwise “�ot Synchronized.”

show sysinfo

Current System

Time

Month, day, hour:min:sec, year in UTC. If synchronized,

the same as above.

show sysinfo

MIBs Supported A list of MIBs supported by this agent. show sysinfo

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4.1: System description, configuration and

display

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-13

Procedure 5-4.2: Enable/Disable 802.3x switch flow control

Overview

Use this procedure to enable/disable 802.3x flow control on the VL�C4x switch.

This command enables 802.3x flow control for the switch. A port-specific setting

overrides the global switch setting.

802.3x flow control works by pausing a port when the port becomes oversubscribed and

dropping all traffic for small periods of time during the congested condition. This can lead

to high-priority and network control traffic being lost.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Login to the VL�C4x.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the �avigation menu, select System → Configuration → Switch.

Result: The Switch Configuration window displays the current configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select Enable or Disable as required, then click Submit.

Equivalent CLI command:

• From the Global Config Mode, enter storm-control flowcontrol to enable

flow control.

• From the Global Config Mode, enter no storm-control flowcontrol to disable

flow control.

By default, storm-control for flowcontrol traffic is disabled.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4.2: Enable/Disable 802.3x switch flow

control

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-14 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 5-4.3: Service port configuration

Overview



connectivity through the MGMT LAN serviceport. You can keep the MGMT LAN port











LAN serviceport.

Related information

For related CLI command procedures, refer to the following in Chapter 2, “Getting

started”:

• Procedure 2-2.3: “Configure MGMT LA� serviceport for out-of-band connectivity

using DHCP/BootP” (p. 2-16)

• Procedure 2-2.4: “Configure MGMT LA� serviceport for out-of-band connectivity

manually” (p. 2-18)

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the �avigation menu, select System → Configuration → System Port.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4.3: Service port configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-15


• From the Privileged EXEC Mode, enter

serviceport ip <ipaddr> <netmask> [<gateway>] to configure the IP

address, subnet mask, and gateway.

• From the Privileged EXEC Mode, enter

serviceport protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} [noprompt] to specify

the configuration protocol.

Result: The Service Port Configuration window displays the current serviceport

configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the Service Port Configuration Protocol to be used for configuration.

If None is selected, you must configure network information for the switch manually.

If Bootp is selected, the switch periodically sends requests to a BootP server until a

response is received.

If DHCP is selected, the switch periodically sends requests to a DHCP server until a


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If you are configuring the serviceport manually (Service Port Configuration Protocol

= None), proceed to Step 7. Otherwise, continue to the next Step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If you use DHCP/BootP to configure the serviceport, you must configure the

DHCP/BootP server with the following information:




the LA�.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If the Bootp or DHCP protocol is selected for configuration, connect the MGMT LAN port

to the LA� network and click Submit at the bottom of the screen.

After the VL�C4x/VL�C6x MGMT LAN port is connected to the network, it periodically

sends requests to a BootP/DHCP server until a response is received.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-16 365-372-406R7.0


Result: The VL�C40/VL�C42/VL�C60/VL�C61/VL�C64 is configured with the

information from the DHCP/BootP server.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 If Service Port Configuration Protocol is None, enter IP address, subnet mask, and

gateway as required.

• IP Address - IPv4 Address Range. Default: 169.254.1.1

• Subnet Mask - Range: 0-255.0-255.0-255.0-255. Default: 255.255.0.0

• Default Gateway - IPv4 Address Range. Default: 0.0.0.0 (no gateway).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-17

Procedure 5-4.4: Network port in-band connectivity

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the network ports for in-band connectivity.

The network interface is the logical interface used for in-band connectivity with the

switch through any of the switch's faceplate or shelf Ethernet ports. The configuration

parameters associated with the switch's network interface do not affect the configuration

of the front panel ports through which traffic is switched or routed.

To access the switch over the in-band network you must first configure it with IP

information (IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway).

You can configure the IP information using any of the following:

• Bootp

• DHCP

• Manually through the MGMT LAN port or the EIA-232 console port.

Once you have established in-band connectivity, you can change the IP information using

any of the following:

• Terminal interface via the EIA-232 port or MGMT LAN port.

• Terminal interface via telnet.

• S�MP-based management.

• Web-based management.

Related information

For related CLI command procedures, refer to the following in Chapter 2, “Getting

started”:

• Procedure 2-2.1: “Configure in-band connectivity manually” (p. 2-12)

• Procedure 2-2.2: “Configure for in-band connectivity using DHCP/BootP” (p. 2-14)

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


System → Configuration → Network Connectivity.

Equivalent CLI commands: See “Related information” (p. 5-18).

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4.4: Network port in-band connectivity

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-18 365-372-406R7.0


Result: The �etwork Connectivity Configuration window displays the current

configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the Network Configuration Protocol to be used for configuration.

If None is selected, you must configure network information for the switch manually.

If Bootp is selected, the switch periodically sends requests to a BootP server until a


If DHCP is selected, the switch periodically sends requests to a DHCP server until a


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If you are configuring the network ports manually (Network Configuration Protocol

= None), proceed to Step 7. Otherwise, continue to the next Step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If you use DHCP/BootP to configure the network ports, you must configure the

DHCP/BootP server with the following information:




the LA�.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If the Bootp or DHCP protocol is selected for configuration, connect the switch to the

network and click Submit at the bottom of the screen.

After the VL�C4x/VL�C6x is connected to the network, it periodically sends requests to

a BootP/DHCP server until a response is received.


DHCP/BootP server.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 If Network Configuration Protocol is None, enter IP address, subnet mask, gateway

and other parameters, as required.

• IP Address - IPv4 Address Range.

• Subnet Mask - Range: 0-255.0-255.0-255.0-255.

• Default Gateway - IPv4 Address Range.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-19

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Network port parameters


IP Address IP address for the network port network parms

<ipaddr>

Subnet Mask This is the subnet mask for the network port network parms

<netmask>

Default

Gateway

This is the gateway for the network port network parms

<gateway>

Burned In

MAC Address

The burned in MAC address used for in-band connectivity.

Read from EEPROM.

show network

Locally

Administered

MAC Address

This command sets the locally administered MAC address for

the VL�C40 only.

The following rules apply:

• Bit 6 of byte 0, called the U/L bit, indicates whether the

address is universally administered (b'0') or locally

administered (b'1').

• Bit 7 of byte 0, called the I/G bit, indicates whether the

destination address is an individual address (b'0') or a

group address (b'1').

A locally administered address must have bit 6 O� (b'1') and

bit 7 OFF (b'0'). For example, the second character of the

twelve character macaddr must be 2, 6, A, or E.

network mac-address

<mac-addr>

MAC Address

Type

Specify whether the burned-in or the locally administered

MAC address should be used for in-band connectivity for the

VL�C40 only. The factory default is to use the burned-in

MAC address.

Values are: Burned In or Locally Administered.

network mac-type

{local | burnedin}

�etwork

Configuration

Protocol

Current

Specifies what the switch should do following power-up:

transmit a Bootp request, transmit a DHCP request, or do

nothing (None). The factory default is None.

network protocol

{none | bootp |

dhcp}

Management

VLA� ID

The Management VLA� on the circuit pack. Valid values: an

integer in the range of 1 to 3965. The default value is 1.

network mgmt_vlan

<vlanid>


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-20 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Management

Priority

The priority of the Management VLA� on the pack. Valid

values: an integer in the range of 0 to 7. The default value is 0.

network mgmt_

priority {0-7}

Control VLA�

ID1

The Control VLA� on the pack. It applies to VL�C6x circuit

packs only. By default the value of Control VLA� ID is the

same as that of Management VLA� ID. Valid values: an

integer in the range of 1 to 3965.

network cntl_vlan

<vlanid>

1

This command configures the control VLA� ID on the pack. The pack uses this VLA� to send control traffic

(ARP, ping, and telnet) to IP addresses in different subnet from its network port. For example if the IP address

of the network port is 100.100.10.10 (mask 255.255.0.0) then ARP traffic to resolve 20.20.10.10 (or ping for

200.200.10.10) will be sent over the control VLA� ID on the pack. The pack generates the control traffic above

during ARP resolution of PS� Tunnel, sending ping requests towards other endpoint of PS� Tunnel, telnet to

other endpoint of PS� Tunnel.

The pack will continue to send control traffic for the IP address on the same subnet as its network port, over

management VLA�. In the above example, ARP traffic to resolve 100.100.10.20 (or ping towards

100.100.10.20) will be sent over management VLA� on the pack.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-21

Procedure 5-4.5: HTTP configuration (enable/disable Web GUI

interface )

Overview

Use this procedure to enable access to the switch through the Web GUI interface. When

access is enabled, you can login to the switch from the Web GUI interface. When access

is disabled, you cannot login to the Web server on the switch. Disabling the Web GUI

interface takes effect immediately. All interfaces are affected. By default access is

enabled.

To use the Web GUI, each VL�C4x or VL�C6x pack should be connected to the network

and have its IP address configured first (See Chapter 2, “Getting started”.) The user then

accesses the pack via the Web GUI by entering the IP address of the pack as the URL in

the HTTP-enabled Web browser. The Login screen is displayed next. Once the user enters

the valid username and password and connecting to the VL�C4x or VL�C6x pack is

successful, then the Web GUI main page is displayed.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


System → Configuration → HTTP Configuration.

Result: The HTTP Configuration window displays the current configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter/Select the following parameters as required, then click Submit.

Parameters:

• HTTP Admin Mode — Used to Enable or Disable the Administrative Mode of

HTTP.

• Java Mode — Used to Enable or Disable web Java Mode.

• HTTP Session Soft Timeout (Minutes) — Used to set the inactivity timeout for

HTTP sessions. The value must be in the range of zero (0) to 60 minutes. A value of

zero (0) corresponds to an infinite timeout. The default value is 5 minutes.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4.5: HTTP configuration (enable/disable Web

GUI interface )

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-22 365-372-406R7.0


• HTTP Session Hard Timeout (Hours) — Used to set the hard timeout for HTTP

sessions. This timeout is unaffected by the activity level of the session. The value

must be in the range of zero (0) to 168 hours. A value of zero (0) corresponds to an

infinite timeout. The default value is 24 hours.

• Maximum Number of HTTP Sessions — Used to set the maximum allowable

number of HTTP sessions. The value must be in the range of zero (0) to 16. The

default value is 16.


• From the Privileged EXEC Mode, enter ip http server to enable HTTP access.

• From the Privileged EXEC Mode, enter ip http java to enable the Web Java

mode.

By default, HTTP access and Java mode is enabled.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4.5: HTTP configuration (enable/disable Web

GUI interface )

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-23

Procedure 5-4.6: Telnet session configuration

Overview

Use this procedure to enable or disable access to the switch using Telnet.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the �avigation menu, select System → Configuration → Telnet Session.

Result: The Telnet Session Configuration window displays the current configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Parameters:

• Telnet Server Admin Mode — Administrative mode for inbound telnet sessions.

Setting this value to Disable shuts down the telnet port. If the admin mode is set to

Disable, then all existing telnet connections are disconnected. The default value is

Enable.

• Allow New Telnet Sessions — If you set this to No, new telnet sessions will not be

allowed. The factory default is Yes.

• Maximum Number of Telnet Sessions — This command specifies the maximum

number of inbound Telnet connection sessions that can be established. A value of 0

indicates that no Telnet connections can be established.. The maximum is 5, which is

also the factory default.

• Telnet Session Timeout (minutes) — Specifies how many minutes of inactivity

should occur on a telnet session before the session is logged off. You may enter any

number from 1 to 160. The factory default is 5.


• From the Privileged EXEC Mode, enter ip telnet server enable to enable

Telnet sessions to the system and enable the Telnet Server Admin Mode.

• From the Line Config Mode, enter transport input telnet to regulate new

incoming and outgoing Telnet sessions. If enabled, new Telnet sessions can be

established until there are no more sessions available. An established session remains

active until the session is ended or an abnormal network error ends the session.

If the Telnet Server Admin Mode is disabled, Telnet sessions cannot be established,

you must specify the ip telnet server enable command to enable Telnet

Server Admin Mode.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4.6: Telnet session configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-24 365-372-406R7.0


• From the Privileged EXEC Mode, enter telnetcon maxsessions <value> to

specify the maximum number of inbound Telnet connection sessions that can be

established. A value of 0 indicates that no Telnet connections can be established.

• From the Privileged EXEC Mode, enter telnetcon timeout <value> to set the

inbound Telnet connection session timeout value in minutes. A session is active as

long as the session has not been idle for the value set.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4.6: Telnet session configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-25

Procedure 5-4.7: Outbound Telnet client configuration

Overview

Use this procedure to regulate new outbound Telnet connections. If enabled, new

outbound Telnet sessions can be established until the system reaches the maximum

number of simultaneous outbound Telnet sessions allowed. An established session

remains active until the session is ended or an abnormal network error ends it.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


System → Configuration → Outbound Telnet Client Configuration.

Result: The Outbound Telnet Client Configuration window displays the current

configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Parameters:

• Telnet Server Admin Mode — Administrative mode for outbound telnet sessions.

Setting this value to Disable shuts down the telnet port. If the admin mode is set to

Disable, then all existing telnet connections are disconnected. The default value is

Enable.

• Allow New Telnet Sessions — If you set this to No, new telnet sessions will not be

allowed. The factory default is Yes.

• Maximum Sessions — This command specifies the maximum number of

simultaneous outbound Telnet sessions. A value of 0 indicates that no outbound Telnet

session can be established. The maximum is 5, which is also the factory default.

• Session Timeout (minutes) — Specifies how many minutes of inactivity should

occur on a telnet session before the session is logged off. You may enter any number

from 1 to 160. The factory default is 5.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4.7: Outbound Telnet client configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-26 365-372-406R7.0



• From the Privileged EXEC Mode, enter ip telnet server enable to enable

Telnet sessions to the system and enable the Telnet Server Admin Mode.

• From the Line Config Mode, enter transport output telnet to enable new

outbound Telnet sessions.

This command regulates new outbound Telnet connections. If enabled, new outbound

Telnet sessions can be established until the system reaches the maximum number of

simultaneous outbound Telnet sessions allowed. An established session remains active

until the session is ended or an abnormal network error ends it.

• From the Line Config Mode, enter session-limit <value> to specify the

maximum number of simultaneous outbound Telnet sessions. A value of 0 indicates

that no outbound Telnet session can be established. The maximum is 5, which is also

the factory default.

• From the Line Config Mode, enter session-timeout <value> to specify how

many minutes of inactivity should occur on a telnet session before the session is

logged off. You may enter any number from 1 to 160. The factory default is 5.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4.7: Outbound Telnet client configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-27

Procedure 5-4.8: Serial (Console) port configuration

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the RS-232 console serial port for connection of the

switch to a terminal desktop system running terminal emulation software.

The RS-232 (RS232 M1) port on the front of the VLIU connects to the Main 1 slot. The

RS-232 (RS232 M2) port on the front of the VLIU connects to the Main 2 slot.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the �avigation menu, select System → Configuration → Serial Port.

Result: The Serial Port Configuration window displays the current configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Parameters:

• Serial Port Login Timeout (minutes) — Specifies how many minutes of

inactivity should occur on a serial port connection before the switch closes the

connection. Enter a number between 0 and 160. The factory default is 5. Entering 0

disables the timeout.

• Baud Rate (bps) — Select the default baud rate for the serial port connection from

the pull-down menu. You may choose from 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,

57600, and 115200 baud. The factory default is 9600 baud.


• From the Line Config Mode, enter serial baudrate <rate_value> to provision

the communication rate of the terminal interface. The supported rates are 1200, 2400,

4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200. Default is 9600.

• From the Line Config Mode, enter serial timeout <timeout_value> to

specify the maximum connect time, in minute, that a serial console login will remain

active without console activity. A value of 0 indicates that a console can be connected

indefinitely. Range: 0 - 160. Default is 5.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4.8: Serial (Console) port configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-28 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 5-4.9: User accounts, logins, and authentication

Overview

Use this procedure to:

• Create new user accounts or reconfigure an existing account.

• Configure user authentication lists to validate switch or port access.

• Assign users to login lists used for authentication.

Each configured user is assigned to a login list that specifies how the user should be

authenticated when attempting to access the switch or a port on the switch. After creating

a new user account on the User Account screen, you should assign that user to a login list

for the switch and, if necessary, to a login list for the ports using the Port Access Control

User Login Configuration screen.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Refer to the following as required for configuration:

• “User Accounts” (p. 5-29).

• “Authentication List Configuration” (p. 5-31).

• “Login Session” (p. 5-33).

• “Authentication List Summary” (p. 5-33).

• “User Login” (p. 5-34).

• “Authentication Login List Summary” (p. 5-35).

User Accounts

The system has two default users: admin and guest. The admin user can view and

configure system settings, and the guest user can only view settings. The admin user

cannot be deleted, and there is only one user (admin) allowed with read/write privileges.

By default, both of these accounts have blank passwords. The names are not case

sensitive. There can be up to five read-only users on the system.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → Configuration → User Accounts.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-4.9: User accounts, logins, and

authentication

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-29

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The User Accounts window displays the current configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the User drop-down box, select Create to create a new user. Or, select an existing

user you want to delete or change.

You can use this screen to reconfigure an existing account, or to create a new one. Use

this drop-down menu to select one of the existing accounts, or select 'Create' to add a new

one, provided the maximum of five 'Read Only' accounts has not been reached.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter/Select the following parameters as required, then click Submit to create or change

an existing account. Click Delete to delete a user account.

Parameters:

• User Name — Enter the name you want to give to the new account if you are

creating a new account. User names are up to eight characters in length and are not

case sensitive. Valid characters include all the alphanumeric characters as well as the

dash ('-') and underscore ('_') characters. User name "default" is not valid.

Up to six user names can be defined. The user name is not case sensitive when you

add and delete users, or when a user logs in. However, when you use the user name to

set the user password, authentication, or encryption, you must enter the user name in

the same case that was used when it was created.

• Password — Enter the optional new or changed password for the account. It will not

display as it is typed, only asterisks (*) will show. Passwords are up to eight

alphanumeric characters in length, and are case sensitive.

• Confirm Password — Enter the password again, to confirm that you entered it

correctly. This field will not display, but will show asterisks (*).

• Access Mode — Display only. Indicates the user's access mode. The admin account

always has 'Read/Write' access, and all other accounts have 'Read Only' access.

SNMP v3 User Configuration — You should use this menu if you are using the

S�MPv3 protocol for access to the switch. If you want to use S�MPv1 and S�MPv2c

you should use the S�MP menu.

• SNMP v3 Access Mode — Display only. Indicates the S�MPv3 access privileges for

the user account. The admin account always has 'Read/Write' access, and all other

accounts have 'Read Only' access.

• Authentication Protocol — Specifies the S�MPv3 Authentication Protocol setting

for the selected user account. The valid Authentication Protocols are None, MD5 or

SHA. If you select None, the user will be unable to access the S�MP data from an

S�MP browser. If you select MD5 or SHA, the user login password will be used as the

S�MPv3 authentication password, and you must therefore specify a password, and it

must be eight characters long.


authentication

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-30 365-372-406R7.0


• Encryption Protocol — Specifies the S�MPv3 Encryption Protocol setting for the

selected user account. The valid Encryption Protocols are None or DES. If you select

the DES Protocol you must enter a key in the Encryption Key field. If None is

specified for the Protocol, the Encryption Key is ignored.

• Encryption Key — If you selected DES in the Encryption Protocol field enter the

S�MPv3 Encryption Key here. Otherwise this field is ignored. Valid keys are 8 to 64

characters long. The Apply checkbox must be checked in order to change the

Encryption Protocol and Encryption Key.

Equivalent CLI commands See User account commands under Management

commands in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command

Line Interface Guide.

Equivalent CLI commands from the Global Config Mode:

• users name <username>

• users passwd <username>.

• users snmpv3 authentication <username> {none | md5 | sha}.

• users snmpv3 encryption <username> {none | des [key]}.

Authentication List Configuration

Used to configure login lists. A login list specifies the authentication method(s) you want

used to validate switch or port access for the users associated with the list. The

pre-configured users, admin and guest, are assigned to a pre-configured list named

defaultList, which you may not delete or change. All newly created users are also

assigned to the defaultList until you specifically assign them to a different list. Up to 10

Authentication lists can be configured in the system.


authentication login <listname> | method1 | method2 | method3.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


System → Configuration → Authentication List Configuration.

Result: The Authentication List Configuration window displays the current

configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Authentication List dropdown box, select Create to define a new login list

or select the authentication login list you want to configure or delete.


authentication

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-31

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If you are creating a new login list, enter the name you want to assign in the

Authentication List Name box, then click Submit. The name can be up to 15

alphanumeric characters long and is not case sensitive. When you create a new login list,

local is set as the initial authentication method.

If you are deleting a login list, click Delete. The delete will fail if the selected login list

is assigned to any user (including the default user) for system login or IEEE 802.1x port

access control. You can only use this button if you have Read/Write access. The change

will not be retained across a power cycle unless you perform a save.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To configure a new or existing login list, select the list from the Authentication List

dropdown box.

Result: Three authentication method boxes display.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 For each of the methods displayed, select the authentication methods as follows:

• Method 1 — Use the dropdown menu to select the method that should appear first in

the selected authentication login list. If you select a method that does not time out as

the first method, such as 'local', no other method will be tried, even if you have

specified more than one method. �ote that this parameter will not appear when you

first create a new login list.

The options are:

– Local- The user's locally stored ID and password will be used for authentication.

– Radius- The user's ID and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS

server instead of locally.

– Reject - The user is never authenticated.

– Undefined- The authentication method is unspecified (this may not be assigned

as the first method).

• Method 2 — Use the dropdown menu to select the method, if any, that should appear

second in the selected authentication login list. This is the method that will be used if

the first method times out. If you select a method that does not time out as the second

method, the third method will not be tried. �ote that this parameter will not appear

when you first create a new login list. Options are the same as for Method 1.

• Method 3 — Use the dropdown menu to select the method, if any, that should appear

third in the selected authentication login list. �ote that this parameter will not appear

when you first create a new login list. Options are the same as for Method 1.


authentication

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-32 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Login Session

This command displays current Telnet, HTTP, and serial port connections to the switch.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → Configuration → Login Session.

Equivalent CLI command: show loginsession.

Result: The Login Sessions window displays the current configuration.

• ID - The Login Session ID

• User Name - Shows the user name of the login session.

• Connection From - The IP address of the Telnet or HTTP client machine or

EIA-232 for the serial port connection.

• Idle Time - Time this session has been idle.

• Session Time - Total time this session has been connected.

• Session Type - Shows the type of session: telnet, serial, SSH, HTTP or HTTPS.

Authentication List Summary

Displays the ordered authentication methods for all authentication login lists.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


System → Configuration → Authentication List Summary.

Equivalent CLI command: show authentication.

Result: The Authentication List Summary window displays the current configuration.

• Authentication List - Identifies the authentication login list.

• Method 1, 2,3 - The ordered list of methods configured for this login list.

• Login Users - The users you assigned to this login list on the User Login

Configuration screen. This list is used to authenticate the users for system login

access.


authentication

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-33

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

User Login

This command assigns the specified user to the specified authentication login list for

system login. The user must be a configured user and the list must be a configured login

list. The login list associated with the admin user can not be changed to prevent accidental

lockout from the switch.

Each configured user is assigned to a login list that specifies how the user should be

authenticated when attempting to access the switch or a port on the switch. After creating

a new user account on the “User Accounts” (p. 5-29) screen, you should assign that user

to a login list for the switch using this screen and, if necessary, to a login list for the ports

using Security → Port Access Control → Login configuration screen. If you

need to create a new login list for the user, you would do so on the “Authentication List

Configuration” (p. 5-31) page.

The pre-configured users, admin and guest, are assigned to a pre-configured list named

defaultList, which you may not delete. All newly created users are also assigned to the

defaultList until you specifically assign them to a different list.

A user that does not have an account configured on the switch is termed the default or

Non-configured user. If you assign the Non-configured user to a login list that

specifies authentication via the RADIUS server, you will not need to create an account for

all users on each switch. However, by default the Non-configured user is assigned to

defaultList, which by default uses local authentication.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → Configuration → User Login.

Result: The User Login Configuration window displays the current configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the user from the User dropdown box.

�ote: You must always associate the admin user with the defaultList. This forces the

admin user to always be authenticated locally to prevent full lockout from switch

configuration.

If you assign a user to a login list that requires remote authentication, the user's access

to the switch from all CLI, web, and telnet sessions will be blocked until the

authentication is complete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the login list from the Authentication List dropdown box. Click Submit.


authentication

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-34 365-372-406R7.0


Equivalent CLI command: If the user selection is Non-configured user, then the CLI

command is users defaultlogin <listname>. Otherwise, use

users login <user> <listname>.

Authentication Login List Summary

This command displays information about the users assigned to the specified

authentication login list. If the login is assigned to non-configured users, the user default

will appear in the user column.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


System → Configuration → Authentication Login List Summary.

Equivalent CLI command: show users authentication.

Result: The Authentication Login List Summary window displays the current

configuration.

• User Name - Lists every user that has an authentication login list assigned.

• System Login - Displays the authentication login list assigned to the user for

system login.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


authentication

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-35

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 5-5: Log configuration and viewing

Overview

This section describes the commands used to configure system logging, and to view logs

and logging settings.

• Buffered Log Configuration — Enables logging to an in-memory log that keeps up to

128 logs.

• Command Logger Configuration — Enables the CLI command logging feature. This

enables the system to log all CLI commands issued on it.

• Console Log Configuration — Enables logging to the console.

See equivalent CLI commands in Logging commands under Utility commands in the

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Buffered Log Configuration

From the �avigation menu, select System → Log → Buffered Log Configuration.

Result: The Buffered Log Configuration window displays the current configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Parameters:

• Admin Status — Enabled enables logging. Disabled disables logging.

Equivalent CLI command: logging buffered to enable logging, or

no logging buffered to disable logging.

• Behavior — Indicates the behavior of the log when it is full. It can either Wrap

around or Stop on Full when the log space is filled.

Equivalent CLI command: logging buffered wrap to enable the wrapping of

in-memory logging when the log file reaches full capacity. Otherwise, logging stops

when the log file reaches full capacity.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Command Logger Configuration

From the �avigation menu, select System → Log → Command Logger

Configuration.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-5: Log configuration and viewing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-36 365-372-406R7.0


Result: The Command Logger Configuration window displays the current

configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Parameters:

• Admin Mode — Enabled enables the CLI command logging feature. This enables

the system to log all CLI commands issued on it. Disabled disables logging.

Equivalent CLI command: logging cli-command to enable logging, or

no logging cli-command to disable logging.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Console Log Configuration

From the �avigation menu, select System → Log → Console Log Configuration.

Result: The Console Log Configuration window displays the current configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Parameters:

• Admin Status — Enabled enables logging to the console. Disabled disables

logging.

Equivalent CLI command: logging console to enable logging, or

no logging console to disable logging.

• Severity Filter — Specifies the severity level of logging. Messages with an equal or

lower numerical severity are logged. Select the severity option in the pulldown box.

The severity levels have been enumerated below:

– Emergency (0) - system is unusable.

– Alert (1) - action must be taken immediately.

– Critical (2) - critical conditions.

– Error (3) - error conditions.

– Warning (4) - warning conditions.

– �otice(5) - normal but significant conditions.

– Informational(6) - informational messages.

– Debug(7) - debug-level messages.

logging console <severitylevel> to enable logging and specify the severity

level of logging. Messages with an equal or lower numerical severity are logged.

Default: critical (2).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Show Buffered Logs


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-37

From the �avigation menu, select System → Log → Buffered Log to display the

buffered logging of system startup and system operation logs.

Result: The Buffered Logs window displays the current log.

Equivalent CLI command: show logging buffered.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Show Event Log

From the �avigation menu, select System → Log → Event Log to display the event log

which contains system error messages. The event log is not cleared by a system reset.

Result: The Event Log window displays the current log.

Equivalent CLI command: show eventlog.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-38 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 5-6: SNMP community and trap receiver

configuration

Overview

Use this procedure to configure Simple �etwork Management Protocol (S�MP) on the

switch and enable trap receivers. You can configure the switch to act as an S�MP agent

so that it can communicate with S�MP managers on the network.

By default, two S�MP Communities exist:

• Private, with 'Read/Write' privileges and status set to enable.

• Public, with 'Read Only' privileges and status set to enable.

You can change the defaults or add other communities. Only the communities that you

define will have access to the switch using the S�MPv1 and S�MPv2c protocols. Only

those communities with read-write level access will have access to this menu via S�MP.

You should use this menu when you are using the S�MPv1 and S�MPv2c protocol. If

you want to use S�MPv3 you should use the “User Accounts” (p. 5-29) menu.

See equivalent CLI commands in S�MP commands under Management commands in the


Refer to the following in this procedure:

• “S�MP Community Configuration” (p. 5-39).

• “S�MP Trap Receiver Configuration” (p. 5-41).

To view S�MP Supported MIBs, from the �avigation menu, select System → SNMP →Supported MIBs.

Related information:

See Trap Manager.

Step

S�MP Community Configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the �avigation menu, select System → SNMP → Community Configuration.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-6: SNMP community and trap receiver

configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-39

Result: The S�MP Community Configuration window displays the current

configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter/select the following parameters as required:

• Community — Select existing Public/Private to change parameters or Create

to create a new community.

• SNMP Community Name — Enter a string of 1-16 case sensitive characters.

Community names in the S�MP Community table must be unique.

Equivalent CLI command: snmp-server community <name> where <name> is

the community name of the system.

• Client IP Address — Enter the client IP address for an S�MP community. The

address is the associated community S�MP packet sending address and is used along

with the client IP mask to denote a range of IP addresses from which S�MP clients

may use that community to access the device. A value of 0.0.0.0 allows access from

any IP address. Otherwise, this value is A�Ded with the mask to determine the range

of allowed client IP addresses.


snmp-server community ipaddr <name> <ipaddr>.

• Client IP Mask — Enter the client IP mask for an S�MP community. The address is

the associated community S�MP packet sending address. It is used along with the

client IP address value to denote a range of IP addresses from which S�MP clients

may use that community to access the device. A value of 255.255.255.255 will allow

access from only one station, and will use that machine’s IP address for the client IP

Address. A value of 0.0.0.0 will allow access from any IP address. The name is the

applicable community name.


snmp-server community ipmask <name> <ipmask>.

• Access Mode — Select the access mode to switch information. The access mode

may be Read-Only, also called public, or Read/Write, also called private.


– Read-Only: snmp-server community ro <name>

– Read/Write: snmp-server community rw <name>

• Status — Select Enable to allow an S�MP manager associated with this community

to manage the switch according to its access right. Select Disable to deactivate an

S�MP community. If the community is disabled, no S�MP requests using this

community are accepted.


configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-40 365-372-406R7.0



– Enable: snmp-server community mode <name>

– Disable: no snmp-server community mode <name>

• UDP Port — Select the UDP port over which the system allows S�MP access.

Default: 161, Range: 0-65535.

Equivalent CLI command: snmp-server udp-port {0-65535}.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Submit to update the switch with the values on this screen. Click Delete to delete

a selected community name.

Step

S�MP Trap Receiver Configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the �avigation menu, select System → SNMP → Trap Receiver Configuration.

Result: The S�MP Trap Receiver Configuration window displays the current

configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter/select the following parameters as required:

• Community — Select existing community to change parameters or Create to create

a new community.

• SNMP Community Name — Enter a string of 1-16 case sensitive characters.

Specifies the community name used when sending the trap to the receiver, but it is not

directly associated with the S�MP Community name configured in the S�MP

Community Configuration table. The name does not need to be unique, however; the

name and IP address pair must be unique. Multiple entries can exist with the same

name as long as they are associated with a different IP address. The reverse scenario is

also acceptable.


snmptrap <name> <ipaddr> [snmpversion <snmpversion>] where

<name> is the community name of the system.

• SNMP Version — Select the trap S�MP version (SNMP v1 or SNMP v2) to be used

by the receiver from the pull down menu:


configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-41

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


– snmptrap <name> <ipaddr> snmpversion <snmpversion>.

– snmptrap snmpversion <name> <ipaddr> <snmpversion> to modify

the S�MP version of a trap.

• IP Address — Enter the IP address to receive S�MP traps from this device.

Equivalent CLI command: snmptrap ipaddr.

• Status — Select Enable to send traps to the receiver. Select Disable to not send traps

to the receiver.

Equivalent CLI command: snmptrap mode.

• UDP Port — Select the UDP port to which the system sends S�MP traps. Default:

162, Range: 0-65535.

Equivalent CLI command: snmptrap udp-port {0-65535}.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Submit to update the switch with the values on this screen.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-42 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 5-7: System Utilities

Overview

This section contains various system utility commands used in various applications such

as software management, provisioning changes, and system configuration.

See equivalent CLI commands in Utility commands in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport

Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the following commands as required:

• Procedure 5-7.1: “Save All Applied Changes” (p. 5-44) (write memory)

• Procedure 5-7.2: “System Reset” (p. 5-45) (reload)

• Procedure 5-7.3: “Reset Configuration to Defaults” (p. 5-46) (clear config)

• Procedure 5-7.4: “Reset Passwords to Defaults” (p. 5-47) (clear pass)

• Procedure 5-7.5: “Download File” (p. 5-48) (copy)

• Procedure 5-7.6: “Upload File” (p. 5-50) (copy)

• Procedure 5-7.7: “Dual Image Configuration” (p. 5-52) (boot system {image1 |

image2}; update backupcode; update bootcode)

• Procedure 5-7.8: “Ping” (p. 5-54) (ping <ipaddr>

• Procedure 5-7.9: “Running Configuration” (p. 5-55) (show running-config)

• Procedure 5-7.10: “Copy Image” (p. 5-56) (copy)

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7: System Utilities

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-43

Procedure 5-7.1: Save All Applied Changes

Step

This command saves running configuration changes to non-volatile memory (�VRAM)

so that the changes will persist during a reboot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → System Utilities → Save All Applied

Changes.

Click Save to execute the command.

Equivalent CLI command: write memory. This command is the same as

copy system:running-config nvram:startup-config.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7.1: Save All Applied Changes

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-44 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 5-7.2: System Reset

Step

Use this command to reboot the switch. This command releases any active

linkoam-initiated loopbacks, and causes linkoam discovery to restart. Warm reload is not

allowed on packs with enabled ERPs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → System Utilities → System Reset.

Result: The System Reset window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Reset — If you click Reset, this command resets the switch without powering it off.

Reset means that all network connections are terminated and the boot code executes. The

switch uses the stored configuration to initialize the switch. You are prompted to confirm

that the reset should proceed if there are any unsaved changes. The LEDs on the switch

indicate a successful reset.

Equivalent CLI command: reload.

Warm Reset — If you click Warm Reset (VL�C4x only), this command re-initializes

the software, but leaves the hardware devices untouched. This means that all network

connections through the VL�C40-family packs stay up, even as the boot code executes.

However, management connections on the VL�C40-family packs will be disrupted. The

switch uses the stored configuration to initialize. You are prompted to confirm that the

reset should proceed if there are any unsaved changes. The LEDs on the switch indicate a

successful reset. The warm option is supported only on VL�C40-family packs.

Equivalent CLI command: reload warm.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7.2: System Reset

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-45

Procedure 5-7.3: Reset Configuration to Defaults

Step

This command resets the configuration to the factory defaults without powering off the

switch.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1NOTICE

Service-disruption hazard

This command will delete all configured data, and will terminate all telnet, ssh, and http

sessions. It may not be possible the access the system remotely after executing this

command.

Use caution when executing this command.

From the �avigation menu, select System → System Utilities → Reset

Configuration to Defaults.

When you issue this command, a prompt appears to confirm that the reset should proceed.

When you confirm the reset by entering y, the switch is reset.

Click Save to execute the command.

Equivalent CLI command: clear config.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7.3: Reset Configuration to Defaults

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-46 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 5-7.4: Reset Passwords to Defaults

Step

This command resets all system login passwords to their default values.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → System Utilities → Reset Passwords

to Defaults.

Result: The Reset Passwords to Defaults window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Reset to execute the command.

Equivalent CLI command: clear pass.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7.4: Reset Passwords to Defaults

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-47

Procedure 5-7.5: Download File

Step

Use this command to download a file to the switch.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → System Utilities → Download File.

Equivalent CLI command: copy <source> <destination>.

Result: The Download File to Switch window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the parameters as follows:

• File Transfer Protocol — Select TFTP or SFTP as the file transfer protocol.

• Username and Password — �o entry for TFTP. For SFTP, the Username parameter

is the username for logging into the remote server via SSH. When this command is

executed, the remote Password is prompted. Both Username and Password are up to

64 characters long.

• File Type —

Select one:

– CLI Banner - Specify CLI Banner when you want a banner to be displayed

before the login prompt.

– Code - Specify Code when you want to upgrade the operational flash.

– Configuration - Specify configuration when you want to update the switch's

stored configuration. If the file has errors the update will be stopped.

– Script - Downloads a configuration script file to the system.

– SSH-1 RSA Key File - SSH-1 Rivest-Shamir-Adleman (RSA) Key File.

– SSH-2 RSA Key PEM File - SSH-2 Rivest-Shamir-Adleman (RSA) Key File

(PEM Encoded).

– SSH-2 DSA Key PEM File - SSH-2 Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA) Key

File (PEM Encoded).

– SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File - SSL Trusted Root Certificate

File (PEM Encoded).

– SSL Server Certificate PEM File - SSL Server Certificate File (PEM

Encoded).

– SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File - SSL Diffie-Hellman

Weak Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).

– SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File - SSL Diffie-Hellman

Strong Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7.5: Download File

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-48 365-372-406R7.0


• Image Name — Specify the code image you want to download, either image1 or

image2. This field is only visible when Code is selected as the File Type. The factory

default is image1.

• Remote Server Address Type — Specify either IPv4 or IPv6 to indicate the

format of the TFTP Server Address field. The factory default is IPv4.

• Remote Server Address — Enter the IP address of the TFTP server in accordance

with the format indicated by the TFTP Server Address Type. The factory default is the

IPv4 address 0.0.0.0.

• Remote File Path — Enter the path on the TFTP server where the selected file is

located. You may enter up to 32 characters. The factory default is blank.

• Remote File Name — Enter the name of the file you want to download from the

TFTP server. You may enter up to 32 characters. The factory default is blank.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To initiate the download, check the Start File Transfer box, then click the Submit

button.

Result: The progress of the download is displayed on the screen.

A newly downloaded Code file is saved as either image1 or image2 based on the form

selection. The image needs to be activated to be used in subsequent re-boots. This is

done using the Procedure 5-7.7: “Dual Image Configuration” (p. 5-52) procedure and

clicking on the Boot System Image button after selecting the appropriate image.

After activating an image, you must perform a Procedure 5-7.2: “System Reset”

(p. 5-45) of the switch in order to run the new code.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7.5: Download File

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-49

Procedure 5-7.6: Upload File

Step

Use this command to upload a file from the switch.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → System Utilities → Upload File.

Equivalent CLI command: copy <source> <destination>.

Result: The Upload File from Switchwindow opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the parameters as follows:

• File Transfer Protocol — Select TFTP or SFTP as the file transfer protocol.

• Username and Password — �o entry for TFTP. For SFTP, the Username parameter

is the username for logging into the remote server via SSH. When this command is

executed, the remote Password is prompted. Both Username and Password are up to

64 characters long.

• File Type —

Select one:

– CLI Banner - Specify CLI Banner when you want a banner to be displayed

before the login prompt.

– Code - Specify Code when you want to upgrade the operational flash.

– Configuration - Specify configuration when you want to update the switch's

stored configuration. If the file has errors the update will be stopped.

– Script - Downloads a configuration script file to the system.

– Error Log - Specify error log to retrieve the system error (persistent) log,

sometimes referred to as the event log.

– Buffered Log - Specify buffered log to retrieve the system buffered

(in-memory) log.

– Trap Log - Specify trap log to retrieve the system trap records.

• Image Name — Specify the code image you want to upload, either image1 or

image2. This field is only visible when Code is selected as the File Type. The factory

default is image1.

• Remote Server Address Type — Specify either IPv4 or IPv6 to indicate the

format of the TFTP Server Address field. The factory default is IPv4.

• Remote Server Address — Enter the IP address of the TFTP server in accordance

with the format indicated by the TFTP Server Address Type. The factory default is the

IPv4 address 0.0.0.0.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7.6: Upload File

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-50 365-372-406R7.0


• Remote File Path — Enter the path on the TFTP server where the selected file is

being saved. You may enter up to 32 characters. The factory default is blank.

• Remote File Name — Enter the name of the file you want to upload to the TFTP

server. You may enter up to 32 characters. The factory default is blank.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To initiate the upload, check the Start File Transfer box, then click the Submit button.

Result: The progress of the upload is displayed on the screen.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7.6: Upload File

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-51

Procedure 5-7.7: Dual Image Configuration

Step

This command manages the dual images. The software on the VL�C4x/VL�C6x

supports a dual image feature that allows the pack to have two images in permanent

storage. You can specify which image is the active image to be loaded in subsequent

reboots. This feature allows reduced down-time when you upgrade or downgrade the

pack’s software.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → System Utilities → Dual Image

Configuration.

Result: The Dual Image Configuration window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the image (Image1/Image2) being managed from the Image Name box.

Current-Active - Displays the currently active image on this unit.

Next-Active - Displays the image to be used on the next restart of this unit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If required, enter an image description in the Image Description box.

This command associates a text description with an image. Any existing description will

be replaced.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Perform the functions below as required:

• Click Submit to update image description on the switch.


file descr {image1 | image2} <text-description>.

• Click Delete to delete he selected image from permanent storage on the switch.

The image to be deleted must be a backup image. If the image is active or activated,

an error is displayed.

Equivalent CLI command: delete {image1 | image2}.

• Click Boot System Image to activate the specified image. It will be loaded by the

boot loader and will be the active-image for subsequent reboots. The current

active-image is marked as the backup-image for subsequent reboots. If the specified

image doesn’t exist on the system, this command returns error.

Equivalent CLI command: boot system {image1 | image2}.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7.7: Dual Image Configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-52 365-372-406R7.0


• Click Update Bootcode to update the bootcode (boot loader) on the switch. The

bootcode is read from the active-image for subsequent reboots. You must use this

command only as part of an upgrade procedure for the pack.

Equivalent CLI command: update bootcode.

• Click Update Backup Code to updates the backup partition code on the system

with the active-image running on the system.

Equivalent CLI command: update backupcode.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7.7: Dual Image Configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-53

Procedure 5-7.8: Ping

Step

Use this command to tell the switch to send a Ping request to a specified IP address. You

can use this to check whether the switch can communicate with a particular IP station.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → System Utilities → Ping.

Result: The Ping window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address you want to ping. Click Submit.

Equivalent CLI command: ping <ipaddr>.

Result: the switch will send three pings and the results will be displayed in the

Response area. If a reply to the ping is not received, you will see

No Reply Received from IP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, otherwise you will see

Reply received from IP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx : (send count = 3,

receive count = n).

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7.8: Ping

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-54 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 5-7.9: Running Configuration

Step

This command displays or captures the current setting of different protocol packages

supported on the switch. This command displays or captures commands with settings and

configurations that differ from the default value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → System Utilities → Running

Configuration.

Result: The Running Configuration window opens and displays the current

configuration in script format.

Equivalent CLI command: show running-config or

show running-config all.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If you want to save the running configuration to a file, enter a file name with an extension

of “.scr” in the Script File Name box. Click Save.

The saved file can be used to configure another switch with the same configuration, if

required.

Equivalent CLI command: show running-config <scriptname> or

show running-config all <scriptname>.

This command displays or captures commands with settings and configurations that differ

from the default value. To display or capture the commands with settings and

configurations that are equal to the default value, include the all option.

Result: The output is redirected to the script file entered in the Script File Name

box.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7.9: Running Configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-55

Procedure 5-7.10: Copy Image

Step


Image2. Use this procedure to copy one software load from one image slot to the other

image slot. This is done so that the system has a backup in case one image slot becomes

corrupted.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → System Utilities → Copy Image.

Result: The Copy Image window opens.

Equivalent CLI command: copy image1 image2 or copy image2 image1. See

Procedure 4-2: “Copy VL�C4x/VL�C6x software image from one Image slot to the

other Image slot” (p. 4-3).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the image to be copied from in the Copy From Image Name dropdown box.

Select the image to be copied to in the Copy To Image Name box. Click Submit.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-7.10: Copy Image

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-56 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 5-8: Trap Manager configuration

Overview

Use this procedure to specify which traps you want to enable and to view the trap log.

When the condition identified by an active trap is encountered by the switch a trap

message is sent to any enabled S�MP Trap Receivers, and a message will be written to

the trap log.

The information in the trap log can be saved as a file by using Procedure 5-7.6: “Upload

File” (p. 5-50).

See equivalent CLI commands in S�MP commands under Management commands in the


Related information

Procedure 5-6: “S�MP community and trap receiver configuration” (p. 5-39):

• “S�MP Community Configuration” (p. 5-39).

• “S�MP Trap Receiver Configuration” (p. 5-41).

Step

Trap Flags Configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → Trap Manager → Trap Flags.

Result: The Trap Flags Configuration window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Enable or Disable in the dropdown boxes listed below to enable or disable the

associated traps:

• Authentication - Enable or disable activation of authentication failure traps. The

factory default is enabled.

Equivalent CLI command: snmp-server enable traps.

• Link Up/Down - Enable or disable activation of link status traps. The factory default

is enabled.

Equivalent CLI command: snmp-server enable traps linkmode.

• Multiple Users - Enable or disable activation of multiple user traps. The factory

default is enabled. This trap is triggered when the same user ID is logged into the

switch more than once at the same time (either via telnet or the serial port).

Equivalent CLI command: snmp-server enable traps multiusers.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-8: Trap Manager configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-57

• Spanning Tree - Enable or disable activation of spanning tree traps. The factory

default is enabled.

Equivalent CLI command: snmp-server enable traps stpmode.

• ACL Traps - Enable or disable activation of ACL traps. The factory default is

disabled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Submit.

Step

Trap Logs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → Trap Manager → Trap Logs.

Result: The Trap Log window opens. This screen lists the entries in the trap log.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Results displayed in the trap log:

• Number of Traps Since Last Reset - The number of traps generated since the trap

log entries were last cleared.

• Trap Log Capacity - The maximum number of traps stored in the log. If the number

of traps exceeds the capacity, the entries will overwrite the oldest entries.

• Number of Traps Since Log Last Viewed - The number of traps that have

occurred since the traps were last displayed. Displaying the traps by any method (for

example, terminal interface display, Web display, uploading file from switch) will

cause this counter to be cleared to zero (0).

• Log - The sequence number of this trap.

• System Up Time - The time at which this trap occurred, expressed in days, hours,

minutes and seconds since the last reboot of the switch.

• Trap - Information identifying the trap

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If required, click Clear Log to clear all entries in the log. Subsequent displays of the log

will only show new log entries.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-8: Trap Manager configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-58 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 5-9: Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)

configuration

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the VL�C4x/VL�C6x time and date using Simple

�etwork Time Protocol (S�TP):

• Used for synchronizing network resources

• Adaptation of �TP

• Provides synchronized network timestamp

• Can be used in broadcast or unicast mode

• S�TP client implemented over UDP which listens on port 123

See equivalent CLI command procedure: Procedure 5-9.4: “Configure S�TP for the

VL�C4x/VL�C6x using CLI commands” (p. 5-66).

See equivalent CLI commands in Simple �etwork Time Protocol Commands under Utility

commands in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line

Interface Guide.

Before you begin

Before you perform this procedure, you must have the following:

• You must have already configured your network with the necessary network IP

addresses.

• You must know the IP address for the S�TP server you are using.

• You must know the client mode (broadcast or unicast), client port (if other than 123),

broadcast poll-interval, client poll-interval, poll-retry, and poll-timeout values you

will use.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Perform one of the following procedures, as required:

• Procedure 5-9.1: “S�TP configuration using Web GUI” (p. 5-60)

• Procedure 5-9.2: “S�TP global status” (p. 5-62)

• Procedure 5-9.3: “S�TP server status” (p. 5-64)

• Procedure 5-9.4: “Configure S�TP for the VL�C4x/VL�C6x using CLI commands”

(p. 5-66)

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-9: Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)

configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-59

Procedure 5-9.1: SNTP configuration using Web GUI

When to use

Use this procedure from the Web GUI to configure the VL�C4x/VL�C6x time and date

using Simple �etwork Time Protocol (S�TP).

Step

SNTP Global Configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → SNTP → Global Configuration.

Result: The S�TP Global Configuration window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Provision the following parameters:

• Client Mode

Specify the mode of operation of the S�TP Client. An S�TP client may operate in

one of the following modes:

– Disable- S�TP is not operational. �o S�TP requests are sent from the client nor

are any received S�TP messages processed. Default value is Disable.

– Unicast- S�TP operates in a point-to-point fashion. A unicast client sends a

request to a designated server at its unicast address and expects a reply from

which it can determine the time and, optionally the round-trip delay and local

clock offset relative to the server.

– Broadcast - S�TP operates in the same manner as multicast mode but uses a

local broadcast address instead of a multicast address. The broadcast address has a

single subnet scope while a multicast address has Internet wide scope.

• Port - Specifies the local UDP port to listen for responses/broadcasts. Allowed range

is (1 to 65535). Default value is 123.

• Unicast Poll Interval - Specifies the number of seconds between unicast poll

requests expressed as a power of two when configured in unicast mode. For example,

2 to the power of 6 equals 64 seconds, 2 to the power of 10 equals 1024 seconds.

Allowed range is (6 to 10). Default value is 6.

• Broadcast Poll Interval - Specifies the number of seconds between broadcast poll

requests expressed as a power of two when configured in broadcast mode. Broadcasts

received prior to the expiration of this interval are discarded. Allowed range is (6 to

10). Default value is 6.

• Unicast Poll Retry - Specifies the number of times to retry a request to an S�TP

server after the first time-out before attempting to use the next configured server when

configured in unicast mode. Allowed range is (0 to 10). Default value is 1.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-9.1: SNTP configuration using Web GUI

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-60 365-372-406R7.0


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Submit to send the updated configuration to the switch.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 SNTP Server Configuration

From the �avigation menu, select System → SNTP → Server Configuration.

Result: The S�TP Server Configuration window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 A maximum of three servers may be chosen.

Provision the following parameters:

• Server - Select Create to provision a new server, or select an existing server. If

three servers already exist in the system, then "Create" is not valid.

• Address - Specifies the address of the S�TP server. This is a text string of up to 64

characters containing the encoded unicast IP address or host name of a S�TP server.

Unicast S�TP requests will be sent to this address. If this address is a D�S hostname,

then that hostname should be resolved into an IP address each time a S�TP request is

sent to it.

• Address Type - Display only. Specifies the address type of the configured S�TP

Server address. Allowed type is IPv4.

• Port - Specifies the port on the server to which S�TP requests are to be sent. Allowed

range is (1 to 65535). Default value is 123.

• Priority - Specifies the priority of this server entry in determining the sequence of

servers to which S�TP requests will be sent. The client continues sending requests to

different servers until a successful response is received or all servers are exhausted.

The priority indicates the order in which to query the servers. A server entry with a

priority of 1 will be queried before a server with a priority of 2, and so forth. If more

than one server has the same priority then the requesting order will follow the

lexicographical ordering of the entries in this table. Allowed range is (1 to 3). Default

value is 1.

• Version - Specifies the �TP Version running on the server. Allowed range is (1 to 4).

Default value is 4.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Click Delete to delete the S�TP server entry.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-9.1: SNTP configuration using Web GUI

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-61

Procedure 5-9.2: SNTP global status

When to use

Use this procedure to display S�TP settings and status, S�TP client settings, and S�TP

server settings and configured servers.

Equivalent CLI commands: show sntp, show sntp server, show sntp client.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → SNTP → Global Status.

Result: The S�TP Global Status window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 View the results as follows:

• Version - Specifies the S�TP Version the client supports.

• Supported Mode - Specifies the S�TP modes the client supports. Multiple modes

may be supported by a client.

• Last Update Time - Specifies the local date and time (UTC) the S�TP client last

updated the system clock.

• Last Attempt Time - Specifies the local date and time (UTC) of the last S�TP

request or receipt of an unsolicited message.

• Last Attempt Status - Specifies the status of the last S�TP request or unsolicited

message for both unicast and broadcast modes. If no message has been received from

a server, a status of Other is displayed.

These values are appropriate for all operational modes.

– Other

– Success - The S�TP operation was successful and the system time was updated.

– Request Timed Out - A directed S�TP request timed out without receiving a

response from the S�TP server.

– Bad Date Encoded - The time provided by the S�TP server is not valid.

– Version Not Supported - The S�TP version supported by the server is not

compatible with the version supported by the client.

– Server Unsychronized - The S�TP server is not synchronized with its peers.

This is indicated via the 'leap indicator' field on the S�TP message.

– Server Kiss Of Death - The S�TP server indicated that no further queries

were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in a

message received from a server.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-9.2: SNTP global status

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-62 365-372-406R7.0


• Server IP Address - Specifies the IP address of the server for the last received valid

packet. If no message has been received from any server, an empty string is shown.

• Address Type - Specifies the address type of the S�TP Server address for the last

received valid packet.

• Server Stratum - Specifies the claimed stratum of the server for the last received

valid packet.

• Reference Clock Id - Specifies the reference clock identifier of the server for the

last received valid packet.

• Server Mode - Specifies the mode of the server for the last received valid packet.

• Unicast Server Max Entries - Specifies the maximum number of unicast server

entries that can be configured on this client.

• Unicast Server Current Entries - Specifies the number of current valid unicast

server entries configured for this client.

• Broadcast Count - Specifies the number of unsolicited broadcast S�TP messages

that have been received and processed by the S�TP client since last reboot.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-9.2: SNTP global status

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-63

Procedure 5-9.3: SNTP server status

When to use

Use this procedure to display S�TP server settings and configured servers.

Equivalent CLI command: show sntp server.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → SNTP → Server Status.

Result: The S�TP Global Status window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 View the results as follows:

• Address - Specifies all the existing Server Addresses. If no Server configuration

exists, a message saying "�o S�TP server exists" flashes on the screen.

• Last Update Time - Specifies the local date and time (UTC) that the response from

this server was used to update the system clock.

• Last Attempt Time - Specifies the local date and time (UTC) that this S�TP server

was last queried.

• Last Attempt Status - Specifies the status of the last S�TP request to this server. If

no packet has been received from this server, a status of Other is displayed.

These values are appropriate for all operational modes.

– Other

– Success - The S�TP operation was successful and the system time was updated.

– Request Timed Out - A directed S�TP request timed out without receiving a

response from the S�TP server.

– Bad Date Encoded - The time provided by the S�TP server is not valid.

– Version Not Supported - The S�TP version supported by the server is not

compatible with the version supported by the client.

– Server Unsychronized - The S�TP server is not synchronized with its peers.

This is indicated via the 'leap indicator' field on the S�TP message.

– Server Kiss Of Death - The S�TP server indicated that no further queries

were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in a

message received from a server.

• Unicast Server Num Requests - Specifies the number of S�TP requests made to

this server since last agent reboot.

• Unicast Server Num Failed Requests - Specifies the number of failed S�TP

requests made to this server since last reboot.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-9.3: SNTP server status

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-64 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-9.3: SNTP server status

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-65

Procedure 5-9.4: Configure SNTP for the VLNC4x/VLNC6x

using CLI commands

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the VL�C4x/VL�C6x time and date using Simple

�etwork Time Protocol (S�TP).

Before you begin

Before you perform this procedure, you must have the following:

• You must have already configured your network with the necessary network IP

addresses.

• You must know the IP address for the S�TP server you are using.

• You must know the client mode (broadcast or unicast), client port (if other than 123),

broadcast poll-interval, client poll-interval, poll-retry, and poll-timeout values you

will use.

• You must be familiar with the Command Line Interface (CLI).

Important! The example commands in this procedure use an arbitrary prompt (ALU

Switching) in illustrating the commands. The actual default prompt may appear or the

prompt you chose when setting up the system using the set prompt command.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the User EXEC prompt, [(ALU Switching) >], enter enable to enter the user

privilege mode.

Result: The user privilege prompt [(ALU Switching) #] displays.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the user privilege prompt, enter configure to enter the Global Config mode.

Result: The Global Config prompt [(ALU Switching)(Config)#] displays.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Global Config Mode, enter

sntp server ipaddress [<priority> [<version> [<portid>]]], where

ipaddress is the IP address of the S�TP time server you are using; priority is a

value from 1 to 3 for each of servers; version is the IPv( ) version; and portid is a

value from 1-65535, default 123.

Generally, the priority, version, and portid are optional parameters.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-9.4: Configure SNTP for the VLNC4x/VLNC6x

using CLI commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-66 365-372-406R7.0


A maximum of three servers may be chosen.

S�TP servers operating in multicast/broadcast mode periodically send out messages

to designated local broadcast addresses or multicast group IP addresses and generally

do not expect requests from sntp clients.

S�TP servers in muticast mode may also accept unicast client requests as well as send

out periodic messages.

In unicast mode, the unicast client (VL�C4x/VL�C6x) sends a request to the S�TP

server and expects to receive a reply from the server.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Global Config Mode, enter

sntp client mode {broadcast | unicast}, where broadcast or unicast is

the mode you are going to use.

In unicast mode, the client (VL�C4x/VL�C6x) sends a request to the S�TP server

and expects to receive a reply from the server.

In broadcast mode, the client (VL�C4x/VL�C6x) sends no request but waits for a

broadcast message from one or more servers depending on the configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If required, from the Global Config Mode, enter sntp client port <portid>,

where portid is a value from 1-65535, default 123.

Important! Port 123 is the port assigned to �TP. It generally does not need to be

changed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Configure broadcast client poll-interval, if required in broadcast mode.

From the Global Config Mode, enter

sntp broadcast client poll-interval <poll-interval> where

poll-interval is a value in seconds as a power of two where poll-interval is a value

from 6 to 10. For example, 2 to the power of 6 equals 64 seconds, 2 to the power of 10

equals 1024 seconds, default is 6.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Configure unicast client parameters, if required in unicast mode.

From the Global Config Mode, enter

sntp unicast client poll-interval <poll-interval> where

poll-interval is a value in seconds as a power of two where poll-interval is a value

from 6 to 10. For example, 2 to the power of 6 equals 64 seconds, 2 to the power of 10

equals 1024 seconds, default is 6.

Enter sntp unicast client poll-retry <poll-retry> where poll-retry is

a value in seconds from 0 to 10, default is 1.


using CLI commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-67

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


using CLI commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-68 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 5-10: Radius authentication server configuration

Overview

An Authentication Server simplifies the authentication and management of users in a

large network. One such type of Authentication Server supports the Remote

Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) protocol as defined by RFC 2865.

Use this procedure to configure the VL�C4x/VL�C6x to use a RADIUS server on your

network for authentication.

To accomplish the authentication in a secure manner, the RADIUS client and RADIUS

server must both be configured with the same shared secret. This secret is used to

generate one-way encrypted authenticators that are present in all RADIUS packets. The

secret is never transmitted over the network.

To use RADIUS authentication, you need to create an authentication login list, which

uses RADIUS as the primary authentication method, and local authentication as a backup

method in the event that the RADIUS server cannot be contacted. The authentication list

is then associated with the default login. See Procedure 5-4.9: “User accounts, logins, and

authentication” (p. 5-29).

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → RADIUS → Configuration.

Result: The RADIUS Configuration window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Configure the following RADIUS parameters for the switch:

• Current Server IP Address - This is a display only. The configured server currently

in use for authentication.

Equivalent CLI command: show radius.

• Number of Configured Servers - This is a display only. �umber of servers

configured. Up to 3 servers may be configured per RADIUS client.

Equivalent CLI command: show radius.

• Max Number of Retransmits - Enter the maximum number of times a request

packet is re-transmitted when no response is received from the RADIUS server.

Range 1 to 15. Default is 2.

Equivalent CLI command: radius server retransmit <retries>.

• Timeout Duration (Secs) - Enter the timeout value (in seconds) after which a

request must be retransmitted to the RADIUS server if no response is received. Range

1 to 30. Default is 5.

Equivalent CLI command: radius server timeout <seconds>.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-10: Radius authentication server

configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-69

Consideration to maximum delay time should be given when configuring RADIUS

maxretransmit and RADIUS timeout. If multiple RADIUS servers are configured, the

max retransmit value on each will be exhausted before the next server is attempted. A

retransmit will not occur until the configured timeout value on that server has passed

without a response from the RADIUS server. Therefore, the maximum delay in

receiving a response from the RADIUS application equals the sum of (retransmit

times timeout) for all configured servers. If the RADIUS request was generated by a

user login attempt, all user interfaces will be blocked until the RADIUS application

returns a response.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the �avigation menu, select System → RADIUS → Server Configuration.

Result: The RADIUS Server Configuration window opens.

This window allows the user to add/remove the RADIUS servers to/from the switch.

It displays the system setting initially. Equivalent CLI command:

show radius servers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the RADIUS Server IP Address dropdown box, select Add to configure a new

server. Or select an existing server to view/change parameters.

Equivalent CLI command to add server IP address and port:

radius server host auth <ipaddr> | <port>.

You can configure up to three servers per RADIUS client. If the maximum number of

configured servers is reached, you cannot add a new server until you Remove one of

the existing servers. Equivalent CLI command to remove server:

no radius server host auth <ipaddr>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Configure the following RADIUS server parameters for the switch, as required:

• IP Address — The IP address of the server being added.

• Port — The UDP port used by this server. The valid range is 0 - 65535. Default is

1812.

• Secret — This is the shared secret key between the server and RADIUS client. It is

an alphanumeric string not exceeding 128 characters.

Equivalent CLI command: radius server key auth <ipaddr>.

• Apply — The Secret will only be applied if this box is checked. If the box is not

checked, anything entered in the Secret field will have no affect and will not be

retained. This field is only displayed if the user has READWRITE access.


configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-70 365-372-406R7.0


• Primary Server - Sets the selected server to the Primary or Secondary server.

The primary server handles RADIUS requests. The remaining configured servers are

only used if the primary server cannot be reached. You can configure up to three

servers on each client. Only one of these servers can be configured as the primary. If a

primary server is already configured prior to this command being executed, the server

specified in this command will become the new primary server

Equivalent CLI command: radius server primary <ipaddr>.

• Secret Configured — Indicates if the shared secret for this server has been

configured.

Equivalent CLI command: show radius servers.

• Current — Indicates if this server is currently in use as the authentication server.

Equivalent CLI command: show radius servers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Submit to send the updated screen to the switch, or click Remove to remove the

selected server from the configuration.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-71

Procedure 5-11: Secure shell configuration

Overview

This section describes the commands you use to configure secure shell (SSH) access to

the switch. Use SSH to access the switch from a remote management host. The system

allows a maximum of five SSH sessions.

Before you begin

You should have the following information available.

• The SSH version (SSH-1 or SSH-2) you want to enable.

• The type of key file you need to download, if required.

• The name and location of the key file you are downloading.

• The number of sessions allowed and timeout value.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select System → Secure Shell → Configuration.

Result: The Secure Shell Configuration window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Download the SSH key files.

SSH must be administratively disabled to download SSH key files, Admin Mode Disable

and there can be no active SSH sessions.

At the bottom of the Secure Shell Configuration window, click on

Download Host Keys. Download the required SSH key files using the procedure

presented.

Result: The Download File To Circuit Pack window opens.

Reference: Procedure 5-7.5: “Download File” (p. 5-48).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Configure the following parameters, as required.

System provisioning features Procedure 5-11: Secure shell configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-72 365-372-406R7.0


Parameters:

• Admin Mode - Select Enable or Disable to enable/disable the administrative

mode of SSH. The currently configured value is shown when the web page is

displayed. The default value is Disable.

Equivalent CLI command: ip ssh server enable enables the IP secure shell

server. ip ssh enables SSH access to the system.

• SSH Version 1 - Select Enable or Disable to enable/disable Protocol Level 1 for

SSH. The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed. The

default value is Enable.

Equivalent CLI command: ip ssh protocol [1] [2].

• SSH Version 2 - Select Enable or Disable to enable/disable Protocol Level 2 for

SSH. The currently configured value is shown when the web page is displayed. The

default value is Enable.

Equivalent CLI command: ip ssh protocol [1] [2].

• SSH Connections Currently in Use - Display only.

• Maximum number of SSH Sessions Allowed - Select the maximum number of

inbound SSH sessions allowed on the switch. The currently configured value is shown

when the web page is displayed. The range of acceptable values for this field is (0-5).

Default is 5.

Equivalent CLI command: sshcon maxsessions <value>.

• SSH Session Timeout (minutes) - Select the inactivity timeout value for incoming

SSH sessions to the switch. The acceptable range for this value is (1-160) minutes.

Default is 5.

Equivalent CLI command: sshcon timeout <value>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Submit to send the updated screen to the switch.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System provisioning features Procedure 5-11: Secure shell configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


5-73

6 6Port configuration

Overview

Purpose

Use the procedures in this chapter to provision port parameters on the VL�C40/42/42B,

VL�C60/VLC61/62, and VL�C64 circuit packs related to the following:

• Ethernet Port

– Ethernet Port Configuration and Summary

– Backplane Port Configuration and Summary

– Port Mirroring (VL�C4x circuit packs only)

– Detailed Statistics and Summary

• PDH/TDM Port (VL�C6x circuit packs only)

– DS1/E1/T1 Configuration and Summary

– OC3/STM1 Configuration and Summary

Any user shall have access to the Port options/screens. However, only a privileged user is

able to configure the Port parameters.

Contents


Procedure 6-1: Configure Ethernet port 6-3

Procedure 6-2: Enable/disable backplane Ethernet port 6-5

Procedure 6-3: Configure Ethernet port mirroring on VL�C4x circuit pack 6-6

Procedure 6-4: View statistics for Ethernet port 6-7

Procedure 6-5: Configure TDM/PDH port on VL�C6x circuit pack 6-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


6-1

Before you begin

Before you begin




The procedures in this chapter use the Web GUI with corresponding reference to the

equivalent CLI commands. When using CLI commands, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850


Required equipment

All procedures in this chapter require a Personal Computer (PC).



Port configuration Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-2 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 6-1: Configure Ethernet port

Overview

Use this procedure to configure an Ethernet port and/or to view provisioned Ethernet port

parameters.

Before you begin

Obtain the work instructions for this procedure.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Log in to the VL�C4x/VL�C6x circuit pack being provisioned.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select Port → Ethernet Port → Configuration.

Result: The Port Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the required parameters, then click Submit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If configuring an Ethernet port on a... Then...

VL�C4x circuit pack, From the Navigation menu, select Port →Ethernet Port → Status Summary and

verify that the required parameters were

provisioned correctly.

VL�C6x circuit pack, From the Navigation menu, select Port →Ethernet Port → Summary and verify that

the required parameters were provisioned

correctly.

Result: The Summary screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If required, enable the backplane Ethernet port.

Port configuration Procedure 6-1: Configure Ethernet port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


6-3

Reference: Procedure 6-2: “Enable/disable backplane Ethernet port” (p. 6-5)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If required on VL�C4x circuit pack, configure Ethernet port mirroring.

Reference: Procedure 6-3: “Configure Ethernet port mirroring on VL�C4x circuit

pack” (p. 6-6)

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Port configuration Procedure 6-1: Configure Ethernet port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-4 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 6-2: Enable/disable backplane Ethernet port

Overview

Use this procedure to enable/disable the backplane Ethernet port.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select Port → Ethernet Port → Backplane Port

Configuration.

Result: The Backplane Port Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enable/disable the backplane port as required, then click Submit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Navigation menu, select Port → Ethernet Port → Backplane Port

Summary and verify that the required parameters were provisioned correctly.

Result: The Backplane Port Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Port configuration Procedure 6-2: Enable/disable backplane Ethernet port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


6-5

Procedure 6-3: Configure Ethernet port mirroring on VLNC4x

circuit pack

Overview

Use this procedure to configure Ethernet port mirroring on a VL�C4x circuit pack.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Log in to the VL�C4x circuit pack being provisioned.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select Port → Ethernet Port → Multiple Port

Mirroring.

Result: The Multiple Port Mirroring screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Port configuration Procedure 6-3: Configure Ethernet port mirroring on

VLNC4x circuit pack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-6 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 6-4: View statistics for Ethernet port

Overview

Use this procedure to view Ethernet port statistics.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If ... Then...

Summary of statistics is desired,, From the Navigation menu, select Port →Ethernet Port → Statistics Summary.

Detailed statistics are desired, From the Navigation menu, select Port →Ethernet Port → Statistics Detailed.

Result: The Statistics screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Port configuration Procedure 6-4: View statistics for Ethernet port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


6-7

Procedure 6-5: Configure TDM/PDH port on VLNC6x circuit

pack

Overview

Use this procedure to configure a TDM/PDH port on a VL�C6x circuit pack.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If configuring a... Then...

DS1 port (VL�C64), From the Navigation menu, select Port →PDH/TDM Port → DS1 Configuration.

E1 port (VL�C6x), From the Navigation menu, select Port →PDH/TDM Port → E1 Configuration.

T1 port (VL�C60/61/62), From the Navigation menu, select Port →PDH/TDM Port → T1 Configuration.

OC3/STM1 port (VL�C64), From the Navigation menu, select Port →PDH/TDM Port → OC3/STM1

Configuration.

Result: The DS1/E1/T1/OC3/STM1 Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If configuring a... Then...

DS1 port (VL�C64), From the Navigation menu, select Port →PDH/TDM Port → DS1 Summary and verify

that the required parameters were provisioned

correctly.

Port configuration Procedure 6-5: Configure TDM/PDH port on VLNC6x

circuit pack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-8 365-372-406R7.0


If configuring a... Then...

E1 port (VL�C6x), From the Navigation menu, select Port →PDH/TDM Port → E1 Summary and verify


correctly.

T1 port (VL�C60/61/62), From the Navigation menu, select Port →PDH/TDM Port → T1 Summary and verify


correctly.

OC3/STM1 port (VL�C64), From the Navigation menu, select Port →PDH/TDM Port → OC3/STM1 Summary

and verify that the required parameters were


Result: The Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Port configuration Procedure 6-5: Configure TDM/PDH port on VLNC6x

circuit pack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


6-9

7 7PDH/TDM provisioning

Overview

Purpose

The PDH/TDM menu feature includes, but is not limited to:

• Pack Configuration

• Loopback

• Inband Loopback from DSX

• PM Report

• TCA Threshold

• Fault Management

This section covers requirements pertaining to the PDH/TDM menu feature.

Contents


Procedure 7-1: Configure interface mode for VL�C6x circuit pack 7-3

Procedure 7-2: Operate/release interface loopback 7-4

Procedure 7-3: Enable/disable inband loopbacks from DSX 7-5

Procedure 7-4: View performance monitoring (PM) reports 7-6

Procedure 7-5: Configure performance monitoring (PM) thresholds 7-7

Procedure 7-6: Enable/disable performance monitoring (PM) 7-8

Procedure 7-7: Enable/disable S�MP traps 7-9

Procedure 7-8: Configure alarm parameters 7-10

Procedure 7-9: View alarms 7-11

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


7-1

Before you begin

Before you begin







Required equipment




PDH/TDM provisioning Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-2 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 7-1: Configure interface mode for VLNC6x circuit

pack

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the T1 (SO�ET)/E1 (SDH) Ethernet interface mode for a

VL�C6x circuit pack.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select PDH/TDM → Pack Configuration.

Result: The Pack Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the required Interface Mode parameter, then click Submit.

Result: Changing the Interface Mode will cause the system to reset.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PDH/TDM provisioning Procedure 7-1: Configure interface mode for VLNC6x

circuit pack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


7-3

Procedure 7-2: Operate/release interface loopback

Overview

Use this procedure to operate/release loopbacks on the following VL�C6x circuit pack

interfaces:

• DS1/E1/T1

• OC3/STM1

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select PDH/TDM → Loopback.

Result: The Loopback screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the required interface and loopback type, then click Submit.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PDH/TDM provisioning Procedure 7-2: Operate/release interface loopback

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-4 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 7-3: Enable/disable inband loopbacks from DSX

Overview

Use this procedure to enable/disable inband loopbacks from the DSX on DS1/E1/T1

interfaces for VL�C6x circuit packs.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select PDH/TDM → Inband Loopback From DSX.

Result: The Inband Loopback From DSX screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enable/disable inband loopbacks on the required interface, then click Submit.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PDH/TDM provisioning Procedure 7-3: Enable/disable inband loopbacks from DSX

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


7-5

Procedure 7-4: View performance monitoring (PM) reports

Overview

Use this procedure to view performance monitoring (PM) reports for interfaces on a


Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select PDH/TDM → PM Report.

Result: The PM Report screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the required Interface/Path Type, the Interface/Path �umber, Location, Time

Period, and Interval for the PM report.

Result: The output section displays the PM parameters and values in the report for the

specified parameters.

Click Refresh to re-retrieve and re-display PM Report.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PDH/TDM provisioning Procedure 7-4: View performance monitoring (PM) reports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-6 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 7-5: Configure performance monitoring (PM)

thresholds

Overview

Use this procedure to provision performance monitoring (PM) thresholds for interfaces on

a VL�C6x circuit pack.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select PDH/TDM → TCA Threshold.

Result: The TCA Threshold Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the required interface/path type, interface/path number, interval, and PM parameter.

Enter the required Threshold Value, then click Submit.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PDH/TDM provisioning Procedure 7-5: Configure performance monitoring (PM)

thresholds

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


7-7

Procedure 7-6: Enable/disable performance monitoring (PM)

Overview

Use this procedure to enable/disable performance monitoring (PM) on an interface on a


Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select PDH/TDM → Fault Management → PMON

Admin.

Result: The PMO� Admin screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the required Interface �umber. Enable/disable the PMO� State as required, then

click Submit.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PDH/TDM provisioning Procedure 7-6: Enable/disable performance monitoring

(PM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-8 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 7-7: Enable/disable SNMP traps

Overview

Use this procedure to enable/disable S�MP Traps on interfaces on a VL�C6x circuit

pack.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select PDH/TDM → Fault Management → TRAPS

Admin.

Result: The TRAPS Admin screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the required Interface Type. Enable/disable the TRAPS State as required, then click

Submit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Navigation menu, select PDH/TDM → Fault Management → TRAPS

Configuration Summary and verify that the TRAPS State was provisioned correctly.

Result: The TRAPS Configuration Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PDH/TDM provisioning Procedure 7-7: Enable/disable SNMP traps

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


7-9

Procedure 7-8: Configure alarm parameters

Overview

Use this procedure to configure alarm parameter for interfaces on a VL�C6x circuit pack.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select PDH/TDM → Fault Management → Alarm

Configuration.

Result: The Alarm Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the required Interface �umber. Provision the alarm parameters as required, then

click Submit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Navigation menu, select PDH/TDM → Fault Management → Alarm

Configuration Summary .

Result: The Alarm Configuration Summary screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the required Interface �umber and verify that the TRAPS State was provisioned

correctly.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PDH/TDM provisioning Procedure 7-8: Configure alarm parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-10 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 7-9: View alarms

Overview

Use this procedure to view active system and interface alarms for a VL�C6x circuit pack.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If... Then...

System Alarms, From the Navigation menu, select PDH/TDM

→ Fault Management → System Alarm

Summary.

Interface Alarms, From the Navigation menu, select PDH/TDM

→ Fault Management → Interface Alarm

Summary. Select the required Interface.

Result: The Alarm Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PDH/TDM provisioning Procedure 7-9: View alarms

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


7-11

8 8Timing

Overview

Purpose

The timing menu feature includes, but is not limited to:

• System Timing

• Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE) Timing

• Interface Timing

• 1588 precision timing protocol (ptp-1588) Timing

• Time of Day (ToD) distribution

This section covers requirements pertaining to the timing menu feature.

Contents


Procedure 8-1: Configure system timing for circuit pack 8-3

Procedure 8-2: Configure ptp-1588 timing (master mode) 8-13

Procedure 8-3: Configure interface timing for DS1/E1 ports 8-15

Procedure 8-4: Configure Time of Day (ToD) distribution 8-16

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


8-1

Before you begin

Before you begin







Required equipment




Timing Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-2 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 8-1: Configure system timing for circuit pack

Overview

Use this procedure to provision system timing parameters for circuit packs.

System timing

The following system timing modes are supported.

• External Timing (VL�C6x circuit packs only): The BITS (Building Integrated Timing

Supply) option specifies that the System clock is derived from an external reference

signal traceable to a common Primary Reference Clock in the network. The shelf has

a DS1/E1 input interface associated with each main slot for receiving the external

timing reference signal.

When BITS is selected for VL�C64 circuit packs, an optional alternate source of

timing, Line, can be specified. In Line timing, the VL�C64 circuit pack derives

timing from the incoming OC3/STM1 interface.

• 1588ver2 Precision Timing Protocol Timing (VL�C6x circuit packs only): The

ptp-1588 option specifies that IEEE 1588 version 2 protocol is used to drive the

system timing. This is useful for remote locations where no high-quality reference

clock signal is available (ptp-1588 slave mode).

• Free Running Timing: The free-running option specifies that the System clock is

derived from a local oscillator.

This option is recommended for use when all DS1/E1 interfaces on VL�C60/61

circuit packs offer MLPPP service.

The free-running option is also supported on VL�C42/42B circuit packs.

• SO�ET/SDH Line Timing (VL�C64 circuit pack only): The line option specifies that

the System clock is derived from an OC-3/STM-1 line on the VL�C64 circuit pack.

• SyncE Line Timing: The ge option specifies that the System clock is derived from an

SFP-based Gigabit Ethernet interface.

When ge is selected on the VL�C42/42B circuit packs, the GE interface derived

signal is sent to the adjacent VL�C6x/VL�C52 circuit pack via the backplane. The

VL�C42/42B circuit pack System clock is derived from the incoming 25 Mhz clock

from the adjacent VL�C6x/VL�C52 circuit pack.

• Backplane Timing: The backplane option specifies that the System clock is derived

from the backplane 25 MHz reference. Timing is derived from the adjacent circuit

pack.

Differential timestamp frequency

The differential timestamp frequency of VL�C6x circuit packs may be provisioned as 25

MHz or 77.76 MHz (default).

The system at the other endpoint of the Circuit Emulation Service must be provisioned

with the same differential timestamp frequency value.

Timing Procedure 8-1: Configure system timing for circuit pack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


8-3

This command causes the system to reset. The differential timestamp frequency cannot be

cleared using the clear config command. This procedure must be performed to

modify the provisioned value.

The Series 1:2 or later VL�C64 circuit pack is required to support 25 MHz frequency.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If system timing... Then proceed to...

External timing (VL�C6x circuit packs only), Procedure 8-1.1: “Configure external timing”

(p. 8-5)

1588ver2 Precision Timing Protocol timing

(VL�C6x circuit packs only),

Procedure 8-1.2: “Configure ptp-1588 timing

(slave mode)” (p. 8-6)

Free Running timing, Procedure 8-1.3: “Configure free running

timing” (p. 8-8)

SO�ET/SDH Line timing (VL�C64 circuit

pack),

Procedure 8-1.4: “Configure SO�ET/SDH

line timing” (p. 8-9)

SyncE Line Timing, Procedure 8-1.5: “Configure SyncE line

timing” (p. 8-10)

Backplane timing, Procedure 8-1.6: “Configure backplane

timing” (p. 8-12)

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing Procedure 8-1: Configure system timing for circuit pack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-4 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 8-1.1: Configure external timing

Overview

Use this procedure to provision external timing for a VL�C6x circuit pack.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Navigation menu, select Port → PDH/TDM Port → T1/E1.

Result: The T1/E1 Interface Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the required parameters to configure the external timing references, then click

Submit

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Navigation menu, select Port → PDH/TDM Port → T1/E1 Summary and

verify that the external reference parameters were provisioned correctly.

Result: The T1/E1 Interface Summary screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Navigation menu, select Timing → System Timing → Configuration.

Result: The System Timing Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Important! The System Timing Source parameter must be provisioned to BITS for

external timing.

Enter the required System Timing Source and Differential Timestamp Frequency

(VL�C6x circuit packs only) parameters, then click Submit.

Important! On VL�C64 circuit packs, when the System Timing Source parameter is

provisioned to BITS, the OC-3/STM-1 interface may be provisioned as an alternate

source of timing (Line). Provisioning an alternate source for System Timing is

optional.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 From the Navigation menu, select Timing → System Timing → Summary and verify

that the system timing parameters were provisioned correctly.

Result: The System Timing Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing Procedure 8-1.1: Configure external timing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


8-5

Procedure 8-1.2: Configure ptp-1588 timing (slave mode)

Overview

Use this procedure to provision ptp-1588 timing (slave mode) for a VL�C6x circuit pack.

To provision ptp-1588 timing in the master mode, refer to Procedure 8-2: “Configure

ptp-1588 timing (master mode)” (p. 8-13)

The IEEE 1588 protocol distributes time and frequency via Ethernet with expected

endpoint time-alignment time precision measured in nanoseconds. The protocol is

designed to synchronize real-time clocks on the nodes of a distributed system that

communicate using a network.

The protocol uses a master/slave relationship to distribute timestamps from one device to

the others. The protocol traffic is an Ethernet frame with a special Ethertype field to

indicate 1588.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Important! The System Timing Source parameter must be provisioned to ptp-1588

for 1588ver2 Precision Timing Protocol timing.


parameters, then click Submit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Navigation menu, select Timing → ptp-1588 Timing → ptp-1588

Protocol Configuration.

Result: The ptp-1588 Protocol Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Important! The Mode parameter must be provisioned to slave.

Enter the required parameters, then click Submit.

Timing Procedure 8-1.2: Configure ptp-1588 timing (slave mode)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-6 365-372-406R7.0


Parameters include:

• State: Enables or disables the IEEE 1588 Precision Timing Protocol on the system.

• Mode: Enables/disables the master or slave mode on the VL�C6x circuit pack.

• VLAN ID: Specifies the VLA� id over which the 1588 protocols are transmitted.

• Primary Port: Specifies the primary port over which the 1588 protocols are

transmitted and received.

• Backup Port: Specifies the backup port over which the 1588 protocols are


• Priority1: Specifies the priority1 of the 1588 protocol. It is used only in the Master

mode while sending the 1588 protocol message.



• Domain: Specifies the PTP domain value of the 1588 protocol.

• Log Min Mean Delay Interval: Specifies the Log Minimum Mean Delay Interval of

the 1588 protocol.

• Log Mean Announce Interval: Specifies the Log Mean Announce Interval of the

1588 protocol.

• Announce Receipt Timeout: Specifies the Announce Receipt Timeout Interval of

the 1588 protocol.

• Time Switch Mode: Specifies the switch over of master clock selection is controlled

by 1588 protocol’s master clock selection algorithm or by the system.

• Multicast MAC Address: Specifies the Multicast MAC address on which to

send/receive the 1588 protocol messages.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Protocol Summary and verify that the required parameters were provisioned correctly.

Result: The ptp-1588 Protocol Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing Procedure 8-1.2: Configure ptp-1588 timing (slave mode)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


8-7

Procedure 8-1.3: Configure free running timing

Overview

Use this procedure to provision free running timing for a VL�C4x/VL�C6x circuit pack.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Important! The System Timing Source parameter must be provisioned to

free-running for free running timing.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing Procedure 8-1.3: Configure free running timing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-8 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 8-1.4: Configure SONET/SDH line timing

Overview

Use this procedure to provision OC-3/STM-1 Line timing for a VL�C64 circuit pack.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Important! The System Timing Source parameter must be provisioned to Line for

OC-3/STM-1 Line timing.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing Procedure 8-1.4: Configure SONET/SDH line timing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


8-9

Procedure 8-1.5: Configure SyncE line timing

Overview

Use this procedure to provision syncE line timing for a VL�C4x/VL�C6x circuit pack.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Important! The System Timing Source parameter must be provisioned to GE for

SyncE Line timing.


(VL�C6x circuit packs only) parameters, then click Submit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Navigation menu, select Timing → SynchE Timing → Configuration.

Result: The SyncE Timing Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter the required parameters to configure Synchronous Ethernet for Ethernet interfaces,

then click Submit.

Parameters include:

• SynchE Mode: Specifies the Synchronous Ethernet ITU-T G.8262 EEC-Option 1

(SDH) or EEC-Option 2 (SO�ET) Standards mode for VL�C42 circuit packs only.

• SyncE TX Mode: Enables/Disables SyncE timing in the transmit direction on

VL�C6x circuit packs only. SyncE timing out is supported on the backplane for

adjacent circuit packs and on enabled Ethernet interface

Timing Procedure 8-1.5: Configure SyncE line timing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-10 365-372-406R7.0


• Auto Reconfigure: Enables/disables the SyncE automatic synchronization reference

switching between the Primary and Secondary SyncE GE selected interface. The

System Timing Source must be configured to GE.

• Revertive: Enables/Disables revertive SyncE references switching mode. SyncE

synchronization reference switching is performed between the Primary and Secondary

SyncE GE selected interface. The System Timing Source must be configured to GE

and Auto Reconfigure must be Enabled.

When enabled, revertive SyncE reference switching is performed. When disabled,

nonrevertive SyncE reference switching is performed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 From the Navigation menu, select Timing → SynchE Timing → Interface SyncE.

Result: The Interface SyncE screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Enter the required parameters to enables SyncE support on the specified Ethernet

interface, then click Submit.

Parameters include:

• Interface Number: Specifies the SyncE Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interface

to be provisioned.

• SyncE Support Type: Specifies the type of SyncE support for the SyncE interface.

�one removes the SyncE support from the interface

SyncE Out applies to the SFP-based GE, backplane GE, and FE ports.

Primary, Secondary, and Primary-Lock apply to SFP-based GE ports when the

System Timing Source is configured as GE.

Tunnel-SSMapplies to GE interfaces. For VL�C42/42B circuit packs, the System

Timing Source must be configured GE. For VL�C6x circuit packs, the System

Timing Source must be configured Backplane.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 From the Navigation menu, select Timing → SyncE Timing → Summary and verify

that the required parameters are provisioned correctly.

Result: The SyncE Timing Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing Procedure 8-1.5: Configure SyncE line timing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


8-11

Procedure 8-1.6: Configure backplane timing

Overview

Use this procedure to provision backplane timing for a VL�C4x/VL�C6x circuit pack.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Important! The System Timing Source parameter must be provisioned to

backplane for backplane timing.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing Procedure 8-1.6: Configure backplane timing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-12 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 8-2: Configure ptp-1588 timing (master mode)

Overview

Use this procedure to provision ptp-1588 timing (master mode) for a VL�C6x circuit

pack.

To provision ptp-1588 timing in the slave mode, refer to Procedure 8-1: “Configure

system timing for circuit pack” (p. 8-3).


endpoint time-alignment time precision measured in nanoseconds. The protocol is


communicate using a network.

The protocol uses a master/slave relationship to distribute timestamps from one device to

the others. The protocol traffic is an Ethernet frame with a special Ethertype field to

indicate 1588.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


that the system timing parameters are provisioned correctly.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If required, select Timing → System Timing → Configuration. Enter the required

System Timing Source and Differential Timestamp Frequency parameters, then

click Submit.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Protocol Configuration.

Result: The ptp-1588 Protocol Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Important! The Mode parameter must be provisioned to master.

Timing Procedure 8-2: Configure ptp-1588 timing (master mode)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


8-13

Enter the required parameters, then click Submit.

Parameters include:

• State: Enables or disables the IEEE 1588 Precision Timing Protocol on the system.

• Mode: Enables/disables the master or slave mode on the VL�C6x circuit pack.

• VLAN ID: Specifies the VLA� id over which the 1588 protocols are transmitted.

• Primary Port: Specifies the primary port over which the 1588 protocols are


• Backup Port: Specifies the backup port over which the 1588 protocols are






• Domain: Specifies the PTP domain value of the 1588 protocol.

• Log Min Mean Delay Interval: Specifies the Log Minimum Mean Delay Interval of

the 1588 protocol.

• Log Mean Announce Interval: Specifies the Log Mean Announce Interval of the

1588 protocol.

• Announce Receipt Timeout: Specifies the Announce Receipt Timeout Interval of

the 1588 protocol.

• Time Switch Mode: Specifies the switch over of master clock selection is controlled

by 1588 protocol’s master clock selection algorithm or by the system.

• Multicast MAC Address: Specifies the Multicast MAC address on which to

send/receive the 1588 protocol messages.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Protocol Summary and verify that the required parameters were provisioned correctly.

Result: The ptp-1588 Protocol Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing Procedure 8-2: Configure ptp-1588 timing (master mode)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-14 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 8-3: Configure interface timing for DS1/E1 ports

Overview

Use this procedure to provision interface timing for DS1/E1 ports on a VL�C6x circuit

pack.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select Timing → Interface Timing → Configuration.

Result: The Interface Timing Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Parameters include:

• Port: Specifies the DS1/E1 interface to be provisioned.

• Timing Source: Specifies the timing source for the DS1/E1 interface.

System- The source of timing is derived from the configured System Timing Source.

Loop - The timing is derived from the received DS1/E1 signal and is used to

synchronize the transmitted DS1/E1 signal.

Differential - The timing is recovered from the RTP differential timestamps on the

incoming Pseudowire packet for the DS1/E1. The reference timing for recovery of

this clock is the configured System Timing Source.

• Differential Timing Domain: Specifies the differential timing domain being used to

generate and recover the differential timestamps on VL�C64 circuit packs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If provisioning a VL�C64 circuit pack, select Timing → Interface → Differential

Timing Domain Summary and verify that the required parameters are provisioned

correctly.

Result: The Differential Timing Domain Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing Procedure 8-3: Configure interface timing for DS1/E1

ports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


8-15

Procedure 8-4: Configure Time of Day (ToD) distribution

Overview

Use this procedure to provision Time of Day (ToD) distribution for a VL�C62 circuit

pack.

Accurate ToD distribution is a critical requirement in mobile backhaul networks. These

networks require stringent timing synchronization between base station and remote sites

and among various remote sites.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Log in to the VL�C62 circuit pack being provisioned.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select Timing → Time of Day → ToD Configuration.

Result: The ToD Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Parameters include:

• Delay Compensation: Specifies the delay compensation value (in nanoseconds) on

the VL�C62 circuit pack. This is required to offset delays caused due to cabling from

the GPS receiver to the ToD input port. It may also be required to offset delays among

different ToD receiving ports driven by the same GPS source.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Navigation menu, select Timing → Time of Day → ToD Summary and

verify that the required parameters are provisioned correctly.

Result: The ToD Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing Procedure 8-4: Configure Time of Day (ToD) distribution

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-16 365-372-406R7.0


9 9Vlan

Overview

Purpose

The VLA� menu feature includes, but is not limited to:

• Configuration

• Status

• Port Configuration

• Port Summary

• Reset Configuration

This section covers requirements pertaining to the VLA� menu feature.

Contents


Procedure 9-1: Configure VLA� 9-3

Procedure 9-2: Provision VLA� port configuration 9-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


9-1

Before you begin

Before you begin







Required equipment




Vlan Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-2 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 9-1: Configure VLAN

Overview

Use this procedure to configure a VLA� on a VL�C40, VL�C42, or VL�C6x circuit

pack.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Log in to the VL�C40, VL�C42, or VL�C6x circuit pack being provisioned.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select VLAN → Configuration.

Result: The VLA� Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Navigation menu, select VLAN → Status and verify that the required

parameters were provisioned correctly.

Result: The VLA� Status screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Vlan Procedure 9-1: Configure VLAN

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


9-3

Procedure 9-2: Provision VLAN port configuration

Overview


• Specify the VLA� ID assigned to untagged or priority tagged frames received on this

port.

• Specify how the port handles untagged and priority tagged frames.

• Specify how the port handles tagged frames.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Log in to the VL�C40, VL�C42, or VL�C6x circuit pack being provisioned.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select VLAN → Port Configuration.

Result: The VLA� Port Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Navigation menu, select VLAN → Port Summary and verify that the required

parameters were provisioned correctly.

Result: The VLA� Status screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Vlan Procedure 9-2: Provision VLAN port configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-4 365-372-406R7.0


10 10Routing

Overview

Purpose

Use the procedures in this section to provision routing parameters on the

VL�C60/VL�C61/VL�C62/VL�C64 related to the following:

• ARP

• IP routing

• Router

• DHCP.

Any user has access to the Routing feature options/screens. However, only a privilege

user is able to configure the Routing parameters.

Contents


Procedure 10-1: Address resolution protocol (ARP) routing 10-3

Procedure 10-2: IP routing 10-6

Procedure 10-3: DHCP 10-8

Procedure 10-4: Router 10-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


10-1

Before you begin

Important! Command Line Interface (CLI) messages or the Web GUI is required to

interface with the VL�C60/61/62 Circuit Emulator, and VL�C64 Circuit Emulation

Mini-Hub circuit packs.


equivalent CLI commands. When using CLI commands, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent

1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide.

Perform the following:

• Obtain a copy of the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command

Line Interface Guide.

• If required, become familiar with the Web GUI interface.

• Obtain the IP address for the VL�C6x being provisioned.

• Obtain the work instructions for the procedures.

Required equipment




Routing Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-2 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 10-1: Address resolution protocol (ARP) routing

Overview

This section allows the user to configure ARP and to view ARP information on the

switch.

Before you begin


Step

Perform the following to configure ARP and/or to view ARP information on the switch.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Login to the VL�C6x being provisioned.

Reference:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select Routing → ARP → ARP Create. Enter the required


Equivalent CLI command: From the Global Config mode, enter

arp <ipaddress> <macaddress>.

Parameters:

• IP Address: The IP address of a device on a subnet attached to an existing routing

interface. It is an IPv4 address.

• MAC Address: The unicast MAC address for the device. It contains six two-digit

hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Navigation menu, select Routing → ARP → ARP Table Configuration to

configure and display the ARP information. Enter the required parameters, then click

Submit.

A list of all ARP entries in the ARP cache are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

For the equivalent CLI commands and descriptions, see “ARP table parameters” (p. 10-4)

, “ARP table entries” (p. 10-5), and Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) commands under

Routing commands in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5)

Command Line Interface Guide.

Routing Procedure 10-1: Address resolution protocol (ARP) routing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


10-3

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ARP table parameters


Age Time (secs) The ARP entry ageout time in

seconds. Valid values: an

integer value in the range of

15 to 21600 seconds. The

default is 1200.

arp timeout <seconds>

Response Time (secs) This is the ARP request

response timeout time in

seconds. Valid values: an

integer value in the range of

1-10 seconds. The default

value is 1.

arp resptime <seconds>

Retries The maximum number of

retries. Valid values: an

integer value in the range of 0

-100. The default value is 4.

The value "100" means the

retry will be sent forever until

the request is resolved.

arp retries <count>

Cache Size The number of entries in the

cache. Valid values: an integer

value in the range of 256 -

1920. The default value is

1920.

arp cachesize <cache-

size>

Dynamic Renew Enables/disables the ARP

component to automatically

renew dynamic ARP entries

when they age out. Valid

values: Enable (default) or

Disable.

arp dynamicrenew

Total Entry Count This is a display-only field.

Total number of ARP entries.

show arp

Peak Total Entries This is a display-only field. show arp

Active Static Entries This is a display-only field. show arp

Configured Static Entries This is a display-only field. show arp

Maximum Static Entries This is a display-only field. show arp


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-4 365-372-406R7.0



Remove From Table Entry This is a drop-down list

containing:

• All Dynamic Entries

• All Dynamic and

Gateway Entries

• Specific

Dynamic/Gateway Entry

• Specific Static Entry

• �one

clear arp-cache - Use to

remove all dynamic entries

from the ARP cache.

clear arp-cache

gateway - Use to remove all

dynamic/gateway entries from

the ARP cache.

Remove IP Address This is the IP address for a

specific Dynamic/ Gateway,

or Static entry. It is an IPv4

address format. If the

"Remove From Table Entry"

field is "Specific

dynamic/Gateway Entry" or

"Specific Static Entry" (see

above), then this is a required

field. Otherwise, this field

does not display.

arp purge <ipaddr> -

Use to remove the specified

IP address from the ARP

cache. Only entries of type

dynamic or gateway are

affected by this command.

ARP table entries


IP Address The IP address of the ARP

entry in IPv4 format.

show arp

MAC Address The MAC address of the ARP

entry. It contains six 2- digit

hexadecimal numbers

separated by colons ":".

show arp

Interface The interface of the ARP

entry.

show arp

Type Type of the ARP entry. Valid

values: Local or Static.

show arp

Age Whether the ARP entry is

aged out or not.

show arp


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


10-5

Procedure 10-2: IP routing

Overview

This section allows the user to configure IP routing and to view IP routing information on

the switch.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Navigation menu, select Routing → IP → Configuration to enable and

configure IP Routing on the switch. Enter the required parameters, then click Submit.

For the equivalent CLI commands and descriptions, see IP Routing commands under



Parameters:

• Default Time to Live - The computed TTL (Time to Live) of forwarding a packet

from the local router to final destination. This is a display only field.

• Routing Mode - This is the IP Routing Admin mode. Valid values are Enable or

Disable.

• IP Forwarding Mode - This enables or disables the forwarding of IP frames.

• Maximum �ext Hops - This is a display-only field.

• Distance - The default distance for static routes. Valid values: an integer in the range

of 1-255 or null. The default value is 1. A null entry deletes the default distance for

static routes. In this case, each static route has its own distance.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select Routing → IP → Interface Configuration to

enable and configure IP Routing on an individual interface. Enter the required parameters,

then click Submit.




Parameters:

• Slot/Port - Select the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.

• IP Address - Enter the IP address for the interface.

Routing Procedure 10-2: IP routing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-6 365-372-406R7.0


• Subnet Mask - Enter the subnet mask for the interface. This is also referred to as the

subnet/network mask, and defines the portion of the interface's IP address that is used

to identify the attached network.

• Routing Mode - Setting this enables or disables routing for an interface. The default

value is enable.

• Administrative Mode - The Administrative Mode of the interface. The default value is

enable.

• Link Speed Data Rate - Physical link data rate of the interface. The unit is Mbps

(Megabits per second). This is a display-only field.

• Active State - Indicates whether the interface is active or inactive. This is a

display-only field.

• MAC Address - The burned in physical address of the specified interface. This is a

display-only field.

• IP MTU - The size of the largest IP packet that can be transmitted on the interface

without fragmentation. Valid values: an integer in the range of 68 - 1500. The default

value is 1500.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Navigation menu, select Routing → IP → Interface Brief Summary to

display summary information about IP configuration settings for all ports in the system.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Routing Procedure 10-2: IP routing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


10-7

Procedure 10-3: DHCP

Overview

This section allows the user to configure DHCP settings on the system.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Navigation menu, select Routing → DHCP Server → Pool Configuration

to configure the DHCP server and client information. Enter the required parameters, then

click Submit.

For the equivalent CLI commands and descriptions, see DHCP commands under



Parameters:

• Pool Name: The DHCP address pool name on a DHCP server. An alphanumeric

text string of 1-31 characters.

• DNS Server Addresses: The IP Address list of the D�S servers (up to 8 unique

entries) available to the DHCP client. Use the IPv4 address format with 4

dot-separated decimal values ranging from 0 to 255. IP address 0.0.0.0 is not a

valid value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select Routing → DHCP Server → Pool Summary to

display the summary information for all DHCP configured pools including the Pool �ame

and D�S Server Addresses.

For the equivalent CLI commands and descriptions, see DHCP commands under



E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Routing Procedure 10-3: DHCP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-8 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 10-4: Router

Overview

This section allows the user to configure and/or display router information on the switch.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Navigation menu, select Routing → Router → Route Table to display

Total �umber of Routes followed by a list of Route Entries including the �etwork

Address, Subnet Mask, Protocol, �ext Hop Slot/Port, and �ext Hop IP Address.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select Routing → Router → Best Routes Table to

display Total �umber of Best Routes followed by a list of Best Route Entries including

the �etwork Address, Subnet Mask, Protocol, �ext Hop Slot/Port, and �ext Hop IP

Address.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Navigation menu, select Routing → Router → Route Entry

Configuration to configure the Static or Default Route. For a Default Route, the user is

able to add more next hop IP Address and its Preference. For Static Routes, the user is

able to add a Static Route with IP Address and Subnet Mask, and add/delete a �ext Hop

to/from a specific Static Route.

Routing Procedure 10-4: Router

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


10-9




Parameters:

• Network Address: IP Address of the Static Route. A 4-digit dotted-decimal

number.

• Subnet Mask: The Subnet Mask of the IP Address for the static route. A 4-digit

dotted-decimal number.

• Protocol: Protocol that created the specified route.

• Next Hop Slot/Port: The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding

traffic to the destination.

• Next Hop IP Address: The IP Address of the next hop router for the

Static/Default route.

• Metric: Administrative cost of the path to the destination.

• Preference: The preference of the statics/default route to the next hop.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Navigation menu, select Routing → Router → Configured Routes to

create or delete a Route. The screen displays all existing Route Entries. Click Add Route

to create a Static/Default Route. To delete an existing Route Entry click Delete.




Parameters:

• Network Address: IP Address of the Static Route. A 4-digit dotted-decimal

number.

• Subnet Mask: The Subnet Mask of the IP Address for the static route. A 4-digit

dotted-decimal number.

• Next Hop IP Address: The IP Address of the next hop router for the

Static/Default route.

• Preference: The preference of the statics/default route to the next hop.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Navigation menu, select Routing → Router → Route Preferences

Configuration to modify the Preference parameter for Static Routes.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-10 365-372-406R7.0





Parameters:

• Local: The local route preference. (Display only.)

• Static: The preference of static routes. An integer value in the range of 1 - 255.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 From the Navigation menu, select Routing → Router → Route Table Summary to

display Total �umber of All Routes (best and non-best) or Best Routes only followed by a

list of Connected Routes, Static Routes, RIP Routes, BGF Routes, OSPF Routes, Intra

Area Routes, Inter Area Routes, External Type-1 Routes, External Type-2 Routes, and

Total Routes.




E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


10-11

11 11Switching

Overview

Purpose

The switching menu feature includes, but is not limited to:

• Protected Port

• Port Channel

• Spanning Tree

• Class of Service

• Statistics

• Port Security

• Double VLA�

• Ethernet Ring Protection

• L2CP Tunneling Configuration

• MAC Learning Table

This section covers requirements pertaining to the switching menu feature.

Contents


Procedure 11-1: Enable/Disable L2CP tunneling 11-3

Procedure 11-2: Configure service-multiplexing on VL�C40/42 11-5

Procedure 11-3: Provision Ethernet ring protection (ERP) 11-21

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-1

Before you begin

Before you begin







Required equipment




Switching Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-2 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 11-1: Enable/Disable L2CP tunneling

Overview

Use this procedure to enable/disable L2CP tunneling on the VL�C4x.

Layer 2 control protocol tunneling is denied if Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP), spanning

tree, flow control or link OAM are enabled for the port. These must all be disabled before

enabling layer 2 control protocol tunneling.

L2CP tunneling is enabled/disabled on a per-port basis. By default, no L2CP frames, for

any protocol will be forwarded (disabled). When L2CP frame tunneling is enabled for an

interface, all L2CP frames (that meet other user classification criteria) will be forwarded

as user traffic.

This command must be operated on customer LA�/host ports where the tunnel

originates/terminates, as well as on network ports that will carry the tunneled traffic. It

also must be run on the network ports of intermediate nodes that carry the tunnel.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 For each node being provisioned, login to the VL�C4x.

Result: The User EXEC prompt [(ALU switching)>] displays.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the Global Config mode:

1. From the User EXEC prompt, enter enable to enter the Privileged EXEC mode.

2. From the Privileged EXEC prompt, enter configure to enter the Global Config

mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Global Config mode, enter interface <interface-number>, to enter the

Interface Config Mode where “interface-number” is the address for the port you are

provisioning.

See Addressable Entities in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5)

Command Line Interface Guide for addresses.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config)# interface d2-1.

Switching Procedure 11-1: Enable/Disable L2CP tunneling

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Interface Config Mode, enter l2cp-tunnel to enable L2CP tunneling on the

interface.

Enter no l2cp-tunnel to disable L2CP tunneling on the interface.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Repeat this procedure for each node/port in the network that will carry the tunneled

traffic.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Switching Procedure 11-1: Enable/Disable L2CP tunneling

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-4 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 11-2: Configure service-multiplexing on VLNC40/42

Overview

Use this procedure to configure Ethernet service-multiplexing and bundling capabilities

of Ethernet Virtual Connections (EVCs) on the VL�C4x. See Figure 11-1,

“Service-multiplexing concept” (p. 11-6).

Ethernet service-multiplexing involves mapping incoming single-tagged Customer VLA�

(CVLA�) packets into double-tagged service provider VLA� (SVLA�) packets,

preserving all the customer VLA� information. Untagged packets may also be mapped to

an SVLA� using 0 (zero) as a special CVLA� for mapping untagged or priority-tagged

packets. Every incoming packet receives a per-port provisionable default VLA�

(DVLA�, provisioned using the vlan pvid <vlanid> command), unless it already

had a tag with the DVLA�.

Important! Each ��I can only communicate with service-multiplexing U�Is, or

with non-service-multiplexing U�Is, but not with both. As soon as an ��I is

configured to communicate with a service-multiplexing U�I (due to mappings and

vlan participation), it ceases to be able to communicate with a non-service-

multiplexing U�I. There are no command denials or warnings when this occurs. ��Is

may communicate with all other ��Is, and U�Is may communicate to all other U�Is

(whether service-multiplexed or not).



Before you begin

You must know the following:

• The VL�C4x ports participating in service-multiplexing, and which ports are the U�I

or ��I ports.

• The VLA� IDs for all CVLA�s, SVLA�s, and DVLA�s (if required).

• The mapping required between the CVLA�s and SVLA�s.

Reference the following rules, definitions, and commands:

• ��I — �etwork-�etwork Interface. When using service-multiplexing, the ��Is must

be provisioned on d-group Ethernet ports. A port becomes an ��I when double

VLA� tagging is enabled on the interface port.

• U�I — User �etwork Interface. When double VLA� tagging is enabled on any

d-group interface port, a-group and d-group ports that do not have double VLA�

tagging enabled become U�I ports. In this procedure, a U�I generally corresponds to

an a-group Ethernet port.

• mode dvlan-tunnel — This command enables double VLA� tagging on an

interface port.

Switching Procedure 11-2: Configure service-multiplexing on

VLNC40/42

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-5

• service-multiplexing — Enables a specified customer port interface (U�I) to

support the service-multiplexing attribute. Service-multiplexing may only be enabled

on U�I ports (ports where double VLA� tagging is not enabled.)

Service-multiplexing may not be enabled on a port unless there is at least one port on

the shelf where double VLA� tagging is enabled.

When service-multiplexing is enabled, the port vlan ID (pvid), (default VLA� ID

[DVLA�]), is overwritten by a customer specified service provider VLA� ID

(SVLA�) based on the customer VLA� ID (CVLA�) of the ingress packet using the

map <cvlan> <svlan> command.

• map <cvlan> <svlan> — Specifies the outer service provider VLA� (svlan) tag to

use, based on an ingress packet’s customer VLA� (cvlan) tag. All mapped cvlan and

svlan tags are automatically added to the interface’s VLA� participation include list.

All unmapped tags are filtered in both directions.

Mapping is only allowed on U�I interfaces where “service-multiplexing” is enabled.

A CVLA� may only be mapped to a single SVLA�. Multiple CVLA�s may be

mapped to one SVLA�. Both the CVLA� and SVLA� must first have been created

using the vlan <vlanid> command in the VLA� database, except for special cases

where CVLA� 0 is used for mapping untagged or priority tagged packets.

Figure 11-1 Service-multiplexing concept

frame withCVLAN 10 tag

frame withCVLAN 20 tag

untaggedframe

unmappedCVLAN

VLNC40 in double-tagged mode

frame double-tagged withSVLAN 901, CVLAN 10

frame double-tagged withSVLAN 902, CVLAN 20

frame single-tagged withSVLAN 903

dropped

UNI (port 41) NNI

UNI port 41 provisioned mapping table using “map cvlan svlan”cvlan 10 svlan 901cvlan 20 svlan 902cvlan 0 svlan 903 (cvlan 0 is used formapping untagged/priority-tagged packets)


VLNC40/42

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-6 365-372-406R7.0


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Login to the VL�C4x at the node you are provisioning.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform the following as required:

• Procedure 11-2.1: “Configure an ��I on the VL�C40/42” (p. 11-8).

• Procedure 11-2.2: “Configure a service-multiplexed U�I on the VL�C40/42”

(p. 11-9).

• Procedure 11-2.3: “Configure service-multiplexed U�I to ��I mapping” (p. 11-10).

• Procedure 11-2.4: “Configure service-multiplexed U�I to U�I mapping” (p. 11-14).

• Procedure 11-2.5: “Configure a new ��I to participate with existing

service-multiplexed mappings” (p. 11-17).

• Procedure 11-2.6: “Delete service-multiplexed mappings/service-multiplexed U�Is

on VL�C40/42” (p. 11-19).

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


VLNC40/42

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-7

Procedure 11-2.1: Configure an NNI on the VLNC40/42

Overview

Use this procedure to configure an ��I port on the VL�C4x. There must be at least one

port on the circuit pack with double VLA� tagging enabled before service-multiplexing

can be enabled on a port.

When double VLA� tagging is enabled on an interface it becomes a service provider ��I

port. Ports without double VLA� tagging enabled become customer U�I ports. Double

VLA� Tunneling may not be enabled on a port where service-multiplexing is enabled.

When service-multiplexing is enabled on any port on the circuit pack, then only d-group

ports may have double VLA� tagging enabled.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From your work instructions, determine which ports are ��I ports.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Global Config mode, enter interface <interface-number> to enter the

Interface Config Mode, where “interface-number” is the address for the port (��I) on

which you will enable double VLA� tagging.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Interface Config mode, enter mode dvlan-tunnel on the selected ��I port.

Example: (ALU Switching)(interface d2-3) # mode dvlan-tunnel.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Switching Procedure 11-2.1: Configure an NNI on the VLNC40/42

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-8 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 11-2.2: Configure a service-multiplexed UNI on the

VLNC40/42

Overview

Use this procedure to configure a service-multiplexed U�I port on the VL�C4x.

Service-multiplexing may only be enabled on U�I ports (ports where double VLA�

tagging is not enabled.) Service multiplexing may not be enabled on a port unless there is

at least one port on the circuit pack where double VLA� tagging is enabled.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From your work instructions, determine which ports are U�I ports.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Interface Config Mode, where “interface-number” is the address for the port (U�I) on

which you will enable service-multiplexing.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config)# interface a-41.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enable the required customer U�I port to support service-multiplexing.

From the Interface Config mode of the port you are provisioning, enter

service-multiplexing. Example: (ALU Switching)(interface a-41) #

service-multiplexing.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Switching Procedure 11-2.2: Configure a service-multiplexed UNI on

the VLNC40/42

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-9

Procedure 11-2.3: Configure service-multiplexed UNI to NNI

mapping

Overview

Use this procedure to configure Ethernet service-multiplexed mapping between a U�I

and ��I port. See Figure 11-2, “Service-multiplexing U�I-��I” (p. 11-12) and Figure

11-3, “Service-multiplexing ��I-U�I” (p. 11-13).

The required U�I and ��I ports must have been previously configured using the

procedures in this section.

For correct egress behavior of the ��I, vlan tagging of the U�I PVID and SVLA�(s)

is required at the ��I. In addition to vlan tagging,

vlan participation include of the U�I PVID and SVLA�(s) is required at the

��I.

In order for ingress filtering at the ��I to occur properly, the ��I’s

vlan participation include list must include all SVLA�s that can ingress into

the ��I.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Privileged EXEC mode, enter vlan database to enter the VLA� Config

mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From your work instructions, determine the CVLA�s and SVLA�s required for this

service.

For this example, CVLA�s 10, 20, and 30; SVLA�s 100, 200, and 300.

From the VLA� Config mode, use the vlan <vlanid> command to create any new

CVLA�s and SVLA�s and assign an ID (Range: 2-3965). Example: (ALU Switching)

(Vlan) # vlan 20.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter exit, then enter configure to enter the Global Config mode.

Switching Procedure 11-2.3: Configure service-multiplexed UNI to

NNI mapping

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-10 365-372-406R7.0


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 On VL�C4x access ports (U�Is), the port’s provisioned default VLA� ID (pvid

[DVLA�]) tag is added to all untagged or single-tagged packets on ingress, and the

outermost vlan tag is stripped on egress. VLA� ID 1 is the port default VLA� ID and

cannot be deleted, but can be changed using the vlan pvid <vlanid> command.

If you need to change the default port VLA� ID (pvid [DVLA�]) of a port, perform the

following:

1. Enter interface <port>, where <port> is the AID of the port having the pvid

changed. Example: (ALU switching) (Config) # interface a-41.

2. From the Interface Config mode, enter vlan pvid <vlanid>, where <vlanid> is

the new default VLA� ID (DVLA�) for the interface port. Range: 1-3965, default is

1.

Example: (ALU switching) (interface a-41) # vlan pvid 2.

3. From the Interface Config mode for the port having the pvid changed, enter

vlan participation exclude <vlanid>, where <vlanid> is the old pvid

(DVLA�) (default 1).

Example: (ALU switching) (interface a-41) # vlan participation exclude 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If not already performed, for each service-multiplexed U�I port, use the

map <cvlan> <svlan> command to specify the outer SVLA� tag to use, based on an

ingress packet’s CVLA� tag.

From the Interface Config mode, enter map <cvlan> <svlan> to specify the outer

(SVLA�) tag to use, based on an ingress packet’s CVLA� tag.

Example: (ALU switching) (interface a-41) # map 10 100.

�ote: All mapped cvlan and svlan tags are automatically added to the interface’s vlan

participation include list. All unmapped tags are filtered in both directions.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 For correct egress behavior of the ��I, vlan tagging of the U�I PVID and SVLA�(s)



��I.



the ��I.


NNI mapping

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-11


• Configure vlan tagging to enabled for each ��I interface in the default pvid

(DVLA�) and SVLA�s.

From the Interface Config mode for the ��I port, enter vlan tagging <vlanid>,

where <vlanid> is the specified DVLA� or SVLA�. Repeat for each <vlanid> being

included.

Example: (ALU switching) (interface d2-3) # vlan tagging 100.

• Configure each ��I interface for vlan participation in the specified DVLA� and

SVLA�.

From the Interface Config mode for the ��I port, enter

vlan participation include <vlanid>, where <vlanid> is the specified

DVLA� or SVLA�. Repeat for each <vlanid> being included.

Example: (ALU switching) (interface d2-3) #

vlan participation include 100.

Figure 11-2 Service-multiplexing UNI-NNI

NNIUNI

DVLAN 10, 20SVLAN 100, 200

port 42

port 3

CVLAN 10, 20

DVLAN 1

map <cvlan> <svlan>port 41 cvlan 10 svlan 100port 41 cvlan 20 svlan 200port 42 cvlan 10 svlan 100port 42 cvlan 30 svlan 300

port 41

DVLAN 2

untagged orsingle-taggedpacket

DVLANadded beforeL2 switching

vlan participationinclude:

port 4

DVLAN 2SVLAN 100, 300

vlan participationinclude:

changes DVLANtag to SVLANtag based onmapping tableand NNI vlaninclude list.Drop packetsif unmappedor SVLAN noton vlan includelist.

L2 switching

single-taggedordouble-taggedpacket

VLNC40

single-tagged ordouble-taggedpacket

SVLAN 300 dropped

No packets from Port 41(not on include list).No CVLAN 20 packets(not mapped on Port 42).

CVLAN 10, 20, 30


NNI mapping

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-12 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-3 Service-multiplexing NNI-UNI

NNI UNI

SVLAN 100, 200

port 41

CVLAN 10, 20

map <cvlan> <svlan>port 41 cvlan 10 svlan 100port 41 cvlan 20 svlan 200

port 3

vlanparticipationinclude:SVLAN 100, 200

Drop packetsif untagged orCVLAN notmapped foregress UNI

L2 switching

VLNC40

single-taggedordouble-taggedpacket untagged or

single-tagged packet

outer tagstripped


NNI mapping

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-13

Procedure 11-2.4: Configure service-multiplexed UNI to UNI

mapping

Overview

Use this procedure to configure communication between a service-multiplexed U�I and

another U�I. See Figure 11-4, “Service-multiplexing U�I-U�I” (p. 11-16).

The required U�I and ��I ports must have been previously configured using the

procedures in this section.

Frames with CVLA�s, or untagged frames, from all ingress U�Is, whether

service-multiplexed or not, must be properly mapped at the service-multiplexed U�I port

in order to egress the port. Users must use the map <cvlan> <svlan> command at the

egress port to include the mapped CVLA�s.

In order for L2 switching to occur properly in the U�I-to-U�I case, the

service-multiplexed egress U�I’s VLA� include list must also include the port default

VLA� (pvid [DVLA�]) of the ingress port. Users must use the

vlan participation include <vlanid> command at the egress port to include

the DVLA�.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From your work instructions, determine the CVLA�s and SVLA�s required for this

service.

For this example, CVLA�s 10, 20, and 30; SVLA�s 100, 200.

From the VLA� Config mode, use the vlan <vlanid> command to create any new

CVLA�s and SVLA�s and assign an ID (Range: 2-3965). Example: (ALU Switching)

(Vlan) # vlan 20.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter exit, then enter configure to enter the Global Config mode.


UNI mapping

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-14 365-372-406R7.0


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 VLA� ID 1 is the port default VLA� ID (pvid [DVLA�]) and cannot be deleted, but can

be changed using the vlan pvid <vlanid> command.

If you need to change the default port VLA� ID (pvid [DVLA�]) of a port, perform the

following:

1. Enter interface <port>, where <port> is the AID of the port having the pvid

changed. Example: (ALU switching) (Config) # interface a-42.

2. From the Interface Config mode, enter vlan pvid <vlanid>, where <vlanid> is

the new default VLA� ID (DVLA�) for the interface port. Range: 1-3965, default is

1.

Example: (ALU switching) (interface a-42) # vlan pvid 2.

3. From the Interface Config mode for the port having the pvid changed, enter

vlan participation exclude <vlanid>, where <vlanid> is the old pvid

(DVLA�) (default 1).

Example: (ALU switching) (interface a-41) # vlan participation exclude 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If not already performed, for each service-multiplexed U�I port, use the

map <cvlan> <svlan> command to specify the outer SVLA� tag to use, based on an

ingress packet’s CVLA� tag.

From the Interface Config mode, enter map <cvlan> <svlan> to specify the outer

(SVLA�) tag to use, based on an ingress packet’s CVLA� tag.

Example: (ALU switching) (interface a-41) # map 10 100.

�ote: All mapped cvlan and svlan tags are automatically added to the interface’s vlan

participation include list. All unmapped tags are filtered in both directions. Both the

cvlan and the svlan must first have been created using the vlan <vlanid>

command, except for the special case for cvlan=0 for mapping untagged or

pritority-tagged packets.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 When a port has service-multiplexing turned on, level 2 switching will occur based on the

port's pvid (DVLA�), so a packet will only egress the destination port if that port's

VLA� participation include list contains the ingress port's pvid (DVLA�).

As required, configure each egress U�I interface for participation in the specified

DVLA�.

From the Interface Config mode for the U�I port, enter


DVLA�.


UNI mapping

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-15

Example: (ALU switching) (interface a-41) # vlan participation include 1.

Figure 11-4 Service-multiplexing UNI-UNI

UNI UNI

port 41

port 42

L2 switching

VLNC40

single-taggedoruntaggedpacket

Drop packetsif untagged orCVLAN notmapped foregress UNIDVLAN 1

single-taggedoruntaggedpacket

CVLAN 10, 20 forwarded

CVLAN 30 filtered

map <cvlan> <svlan>cvlan 10 svlan 100cvlan 20 svlan 200

CVLAN 10, 20, 30

outer tagadded

outer tagstripped

vlan participationinclude: DVLAN 1

service-multiplexedMay or may not beservice-multiplexed


UNI mapping

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-16 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 11-2.5: Configure a new NNI to participate with

existing service-multiplexed mappings

Overview

Use this procedure to configure a new ��I port on the VL�C4x for participation with

existing service-multiplexed mappings. If no mappings currently exist and you just want

to create an ��I, refer to Procedure 11-2.1: “Configure an ��I on the VL�C40/42”

(p. 11-8).

When double VLA� tagging is enabled on an interface it becomes a service provider ��I

port. Ports without double VLA� tagging enabled become customer U�I ports. Double

VLA� Tunneling may not be enabled on a port where service-multiplexing is enabled.

When service-multiplexing is enabled on any port on the circuit pack, then only d-group

ports may have double VLA� tagging enabled.

This procedure assumes that the existing mappings will be used for the newly created

��I.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From your work instructions, determine which ports are ��I ports.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Interface Config Mode, where “interface-number” is the address for the port (��I) on

which you will enable double VLA� tagging.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Interface Config mode, enter mode dvlan-tunnel on the selected ��I port.

Example: (ALU Switching)(interface d2-4) # mode dvlan-tunnel.

Switching Procedure 11-2.5: Configure a new NNI to participate

with existing service-multiplexed mappings

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-17

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 For correct egress behavior of the ��I, vlan tagging of the U�I PVID and SVLA�(s)



��I.



the ��I.


• Configure vlan tagging to enabled for each ��I interface in the default pvid

(DVLA�) and SVLA�s.

From the Interface Config mode for the ��I port, enter vlan tagging <vlanid>,

where <vlanid> is the specified DVLA� or SVLA�. Repeat for each <vlanid> being

included.

Example: (ALU switching) (interface d2-3) # vlan tagging 100.

• Configure each ��I interface for vlan participation in the specified DVLA� and

SVLA�.

From the Interface Config mode for the ��I port, enter


DVLA� or SVLA�. Repeat for each <vlanid> being included.

Example: (ALU switching) (interface d2-3) #

vlan participation include 100.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Switching Procedure 11-2.5: Configure a new NNI to participate

with existing service-multiplexed mappings

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-18 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 11-2.6: Delete service-multiplexed

mappings/service-multiplexed UNIs on VLNC40/42

Overview

Use this procedure to delete service-multiplexed mappings, or delete mappings and

disable service-multiplexed U�Is on the VL�C4x.

Service multiplexed U�Is may not be disabled on a port if there are any mappings for that

port.



Step

NOTICE

Service-disruption hazard

Deleting service-multiplexed mappings will cause service disruption. All packets using

those VLA�s will be filtered.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Interface Config Mode, where “interface-number” is the address for the port (U�I) on

which you will delete mappings.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Interface Config mode, enter no map <cvlan> <svlan> on the selected U�I

port to delete the mappings for the specified vlans.

Example: (ALU Switching)(interface a-42) # no map 10 100.

Repeat this command for all mappings to be deleted.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Removing a mapping does not remove the cvlan or svlan from the interface’s vlan

participation include list.

Switching Procedure 11-2.6: Delete service-multiplexed


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-19

If required, from the Interface Config mode, enter

vlan participation exclude <vlanid> to remove the interface's participation in

the selected vlans.

Example: (ALU Switching)(interface a-42) # vlan participation exclude 100.

Repeat this step as required.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If all service-multiplexed mappings have been deleted on this port and you want to

disable service-multiplexing on this port, continue to the next step. Otherwise, Stop! You

have completed this procedure.

Service multiplexing may not be disabled on a port if there are any mappings for that

port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 From the Interface Config mode, enter no service-multiplexing on the selected

U�I port to disable service-multiplexing on this port.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Switching Procedure 11-2.6: Delete service-multiplexed


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-20 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 11-3: Provision Ethernet ring protection (ERP)

Overview

Use this procedure to configure Ethernet ring protection (ERP).

The procedures in this section cover the following:

• Configuring a new ring.

• Adding a node to an existing ring.

• Deleting a node from an existing ring.

• Moving the ring protection link (RPL) or RPL owner.

Ethernet ring protection provides switching for Ethernet links connected in a ring

configuration.

Figure 11-5, “Ethernet ring protection” (p. 11-22) shows a four-node ring. One of the

links on �ode 4 has been provisioned to be the Ring Protection Link (RPL). This is the

link that by default is blocked for normal traffic. �ode 4 is therefore the RPL Owner and

blocks traffic bidirectionally. Switching is revertive – when a failure clears in the ring, the

RPL is blocked (after a wait-to-restore delay).

The ring has a VLA� dedicated to APS signaling, called the R-APS channel. Messages

are R-APS PDUs. When a change occurs in the ring, 3 R-APS PDUs are sent quickly;

otherwise R-APS PDUs are sent every 5 seconds. Under most conditions, only a single

node in the ring is sending R-APS messages. The link that is blocked in the ring is

blocked bidirectionally by the RPL Owner, or by the node(s) detecting a failure. The

R-APS channel within a blocked link is also partially blocked: it does not forward any

messages it receives, but the node can initiate or receive messages.

Only optical SFP ports (d2-{1-4}) may be configured to be part of an ERP ring. Layer 2

control protocol tunneling must not be enabled on ports that are part of a protected

Ethernet ring.

It is assumed the VL�C4x circuit packs have been installed and the physical optical links

have been connected.

Important! The example commands in these procedures use an arbitrary prompt

(ALU Switching) in illustrating the commands. The actual default prompt,

(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx), for the circuit pack you are logged into may appear, or the


Switching Procedure 11-3: Provision Ethernet ring protection (ERP)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-21

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Perform the following as required:

• Procedure 11-3.1: “Configure new Ethernet ring protection (ERP) ring” (p. 11-23).

• Procedure 11-3.2: “Add node to Ethernet ring protection (ERP) ring” (p. 11-28).

• Procedure 11-3.3: “Move RPL/RPL Owner node” (p. 11-32).

• Procedure 11-3.4: “Delete node from Ethernet ring protection (ERP) ring” (p. 11-35).

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 11-5 Ethernet ring protection

RPL owner

Ring protection link (RPL)(default is blocked)

Dedicated VLAN for continuousAPS messaging

Node 4Node 4

Node 3

Node 1

Node 2

d2-1

d2-1

d2-1

d2-1d2-2

d2-2

d2-2

d2-2

Switching Procedure 11-3: Provision Ethernet ring protection (ERP)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-22 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 11-3.1: Configure new Ethernet ring protection

(ERP) ring

Overview

Use this procedure to configure a new Ethernet protection ring (ERP). See Figure 11-5,

“Ethernet ring protection” (p. 11-22).



Before you begin


• Determine the node that will be the RPL Owner.

• Determine the port associated with the RPL link at the RPL Owner node.

• Determine the ports at each node associated with the ERP.

• Determine a VLA� to be used by the ERP for signaling switching requests (using

R-APS PDUs). The VLA� must be a VLA� that is presently unused at every node in

the ring. The same VLA� must then be used for the ERP at each node in the ring.

• If required, determine the ERP Maintenance Domain Level (0-7). This command is

optional. The ERP Maintenance Level must be the same at every node in the ERP.

This value is independent of any Service OAM MD Level provisioned for the ports’

VLA�s.

Important! ERP may not be configured on ports with Layer 2 control protocol

(L2CP) tunneling enabled. Use the show port command from Privileged EXEC

Mode to determine if L2CP Tunnel is enabled or disabled. Use local procedures to

resolve this conflict.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 At the node that will be the RPL Owner, login to the VL�C4x.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................




mode.

Switching Procedure 11-3.1: Configure new Ethernet ring protection

(ERP) ring

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 At the node which will be the RPL Owner, create an ERP instance identified by name and

enter the Erp Config mode.

From the Global Config prompt, enter erp <name>, where <name> is a 1 to 31

alphanumeric character string.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config)# erp ring1.

Result: The command creates an ERP instance and changes to the Erp Config mode

[(ALU Switching) (Config erp ring1)#].

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Associate two optical faceplate ports with the newly created ERP.

Layer 2 control protocol tunneling must not be enabled on ports that are part of a

protected Ethernet ring.

From the Erp Config prompt, enter associate <port1> <port2>.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config erp ring1)# associate d2-1 d2-2.

• Only equipped faceplate ports may be associated with an ERP.

• If the socket contains an electrical SFP, it is alarmed.

• The order of the two port parameters is not significant.

• A faceplate port may only be associated with one ERP. Ports to be associated with an

ERP cannot be part of a LAG or a spanning tree.

• If port d2-4 is specified, it cannot be set to use the backplane interface.

• Ports must be associated with an ERP before the ERP can be enabled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Interface Config mode, disable the port associated with the chosen ring

protection link (RPL).

For example, exit down to the Global Config mode. Enter interface <port>, where

<port> is the AID of the port associated with the RPL. Then enter shutdown.

Example:

1. (ALU Switching) (Config)# interface d2-1.

2. (ALU Switching) (interface d2-1)# shutdown.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Exit Interface Config mode. Enter erp <name>, where name is the name of the ERP

instance you are configuring. For example: (ALU Switching) (Config)# erp ring1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Designate the port for the Ring Protection Link (RPL) for the ring. This command also

makes this node the RPL Owner.


(ERP) ring

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-24 365-372-406R7.0


From the Erp Config mode, enter ring-protection-link <port> where <port> is

the AID of the port associated with the chosen ring protection link.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config erp ring1)# ring-protection-link d2-1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 If required, configure the Wait-to-Restore (WTR) time for the ERP. This command is

optional.

From the Erp Config mode, enter wait-to-restore <time>, where <time> is in the

range of 1-12 minutes, default 5.

The WTR time is the length of time after a failure recovers before the ERP reverts to the

default configuration (with the RPL blocked). WTR may only be provisioned at the RPL

Owner node. The ITU-T G.8032 standard requires the WTR time to be from 5 to 12

minutes.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config erp ring1)# wait-to-restore 7.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 If required, configure the ERP guard timer. This command is optional.

From the Erp Config mode, enter guard <time>, where <time> is in the range 10-2000

msec, in 10 msec steps. The default is 500.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config erp ring1)# guard 200.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 If required, configure the ERP Maintenance Domain Level. This command is optional.

The ERP Maintenance Level must be the same at every node in the ERP.

From the Erp Config mode, enter md-level <level>, where <level> is in the range

0-7. The default is 1.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config erp ring1)# md-level 2.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Designate the VLA� to be used by the ERP for signaling switching requests (using

R-APS PDUs).

From the Erp Config mode, enter vlan <vlanid>, where <vlanid> is in the range of

1-3965.

For example: (ALU Switching) (Config erp ring1)# vlan 2000.


(ERP) ring

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-25

The ERP signaling VLA� is not used for regular traffic, therefore it does not need to

be previously created in the vlan database (vlan database, vlan <vlanid>.)

The same vlanid must be used at each node in the ERP ring and should not be used on

the same ports for other purposes. The vlanid can be used on other ports for other

reasons (including the R-APS VLA� channel of another instance of ERP on this

pack).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 From the Erp Config mode, enter no shutdown to enable the ERP at the RPL Owner

node. For example: (ALU Switching) (Config erp ring1)# no shutdown.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Login to the next node in the ring and perform the following:

1. From the Global Config prompt, enter erp <name>, where name is the name of the

ERP instance you are configuring.


2. Associate two optical faceplate ports with the newly created ERP.

Layer 2 control protocol tunneling must not be enabled on ports that are part of a

protected Ethernet ring.

From the Erp Config mode, enter associate <port1> <port2>.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config erp ring1)# associate d2-1 d2-2.

3. If required, configure the ERP guard timer. This command is optional.

From the Erp Config mode, enter guard <time>, where <time> is in the range

10-2000 msec, in 10 msec steps. The default is 500.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config erp ring1)# guard 200.

4. If required, configure the ERP Maintenance Level. This command is optional. The

ERP Maintenance Level must be the same at every node in the ERP.

From the Erp Config mode, enter md-level <level>, where <level> is in the

range 0-7. The default is 1.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config erp ring1)# md-level 2.

5. Designate the VLA� to be used by the ERP.

From the Erp Config mode, enter vlan <vlanid>, where <vlanid> is in the range

of 1-3965.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config erp ring1)# vlan 2000.

The same vlanid must be used at each node in the ring.

6. When the links are working, enable the ERP

From the Erp Config mode, enter no shutdown to enable the ERP at this node.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config erp ring1)# no shutdown.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Repeat Step 13 at each node around the ring until all nodes are configured.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Login to the RPL Owner node.


(ERP) ring

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-26 365-372-406R7.0


From the Interface Config mode, enable the port associated with the ring protection link

(RPL).

For example, exit down to the Global Config mode. Enter interface <port>, where

<port> is the AID of the port associated with the RPL. Then enter no shutdown.

Example: (ALU Switching) (interface d2-1)# no shutdown.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


(ERP) ring

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-27

Procedure 11-3.2: Add node to Ethernet ring protection (ERP)

ring

Overview

Use this procedure to add a new node to an Ethernet protection ring (ERP). See Figure

11-6, “Add node to existing Ethernet ring protection (ERP)” (p. 11-31).



Before you begin

Obtain the following information using the show erp command on the existing ERP:

• The links associated with the ERP.

• Vlan identifier associated with the existing ERP.

• Guard timer and Maintenance Level values, if required.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Login to the VL�C4x at one of the nodes in the ERP.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Make sure that the ring is in the idle state.

From the Privileged EXEC mode, enter show erp <name>, where <name> is the name

of the ERP instance associated with the links having the new node added..

Example: (ALU Switching) # show erp ring1.

Verify that Current State is “No Request (RPL blocked).”

�ote the VLA� ID and Maintenance Level.

Result: The command displays ERP settings and status.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Login to the new node being added.

From the User EXEC prompt, enter enable to enter the Privileged EXEC mode.

Switching Procedure 11-3.2: Add node to Ethernet ring protection

(ERP) ring

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-28 365-372-406R7.0


From the Privileged EXEC mode, enter configure to enter the Global Config mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Global Config prompt, enter erp <name>, where name is the name of the ERP

instance at this node.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config) # erp ring1.

Do not enable (do not run “no shutdown”) the ERP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 On the new node, associate two optical faceplate ports with the newly created ERP.

From the Erp Config prompt, enter associate <port1> <port2>.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config erp ring1) # associate d2-1 d2-2.

• Only equipped optical faceplate ports may be associated with an ERP.

• If the socket contains an electrical SFP, it is alarmed.

• The order of the two port parameters is not significant.

• A faceplate port may only be associated with one ERP. Ports to be associated with an

ERP cannot be part of a LAG or a spanning tree.

• If port d2-4 is specified, it cannot be set to use the backplane interface.

• Ports must be associated with an ERP before the ERP can be enabled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 If required, configure the ERP guard timer. This command is optional.

From the Erp Config mode, enter guard <time>, where <time> is in the range 10-2000

msec, in 10 msec steps. The default is 500.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config erp ring1) # guard 200.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 If required, configure the ERP Maintenance Level. This command is optional. The ERP

Maintenance Level must be the same at every node in the ERP.

From the Erp Config mode, enter md-level <level>, where <level> is in the range

0-7. The default is 1.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config erp ring1) # md-level 2.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Designate the VLA� to be used by the ERP for signaling switching requests (using

R-APS PDUs).

From the Erp Config mode, enter vlan <vlanid>, where <vlanid> is in the range of

1-3965.

For example: (ALU Switching) (Config erp ring1)# vlan 2000.


(ERP) ring

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-29

The ERP signaling VLA� is not used for regular traffic, therefore it does not need to

be previously created in the vlan database (vlan database, vlan <vlanid>.)

The same vlanid must be used at each node in the ERP ring and should not be used on

the same ports for other purposes. The vlanid can be used on other ports for other

reasons (including the R-APS VLA� channel of another instance of ERP on this

pack).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 At one of the two nodes adjacent to the link which will be replaced with the addition of

the new node, shut down the link.

Login to one of the adjacent nodes.



Enter interface <port>, where <port> is the AID of the port associated with the link

to be shut down.

From the Interface Config mode, enter shutdown.

Example: (ALU Switching) (interface d2-1)# shutdown.

Result: The node signals SF and unblocks the ring protection link (RPL).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Wire the new node into the ring (the other adjacent link should also signal SF until the

new link is working). Check that the link that is not shut down is working.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Login to the new node being added.



From the Global Config prompt, enter erp <name>, where name is the name of the ERP.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config) # erp ring1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Enable the ERP at the new node.

From the Erp Config mode, enter no shutdown to enable the ERP. For example: (ALU

Switching) (Config erp ring1) # no shutdown.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Login to the adjacent node where you disabled the link in Step 10.



(ERP) ring

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-30 365-372-406R7.0




that was shut down.

From the Interface Config mode, enter no shutdown.

Example: (ALU Switching) (interface d2-1) # no shutdown.

Figure 11-6 Add node to existing Ethernet ring protection (ERP)

RPL owner

Ring protection link (RPL)(unblocked)

Dedicated VLAN for continuousAPS messaging

Node 4Node 4

Node 3

Node 1

New Node

Node 2

d2-1

d2-1 d2-1

d2-1

d2-1d2-2

d2-2 d2-2

d2-2

d2-2

Link shutdown


(ERP) ring

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-31

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 11-3.3: Move RPL/RPL Owner node

Overview

Use this procedure to move a RPL/RPL Owner to another node.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



of the ERP you are provisioning.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Shut down the link that will be the new RPL.

Login to the node connected to the new RPL.




to be shut down.



Switching Procedure 11-3.3: Move RPL/RPL Owner node

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-32 365-372-406R7.0


Result: The node signals SF and unblocks the ring protection link (RPL).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Login to the existing RPL Owner node.





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Make the existing RPL port not be the RPL.

From the Erp Config mode, enter no ring-protection-link <port> to remove the

RPL. For example: (ALU Switching) (Config erp ring1)#

no ring-protection-link d2-1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Login to the node that is the new RPL Owner.





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Designate the port for the new Ring Protection Link (RPL) for the ring. This command

also makes this node the RPL Owner.

From the Erp Config mode, enter ring-protection-link <port> where <port> is

the AID of the port associated with the chosen ring protection link.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config erp ring1)# ring-protection-link d2-1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 If required, configure the Wait-to-Restore (WTR) time for the ERP.

From the Erp Config mode, enter wait-to-restore <time>, where <time> is in the

range of 1-12 minutes, default 5.

The WTR time is the length of time after a failure recovers before the ERP reverts to the

default configuration (with the RPL blocked). WTR may only be provisioned at the RPL

Owner node. The ITU-T G.8032 standard requires the WTR time to be from 5 to 12

minutes.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config erp ring1)# wait-to-restore 7.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-33

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Exit down to the Global Config mode.

Enter interface <port>, where <port> is the AID of the port associated with the

RPL.



E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-34 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 11-3.4: Delete node from Ethernet ring protection

(ERP) ring

Overview

Use this procedure to delete a node from an Ethernet protection ring (ERP).

If the node being deleted is the RPL Owner node, you must first move the RPL Owner

using the procedures of Procedure 11-3.3: “Move RPL/RPL Owner node” (p. 11-32).



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



of the ERP you are provisioning.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 At one of the nodes adjacent to the node being removed, shut down one of the links

connected to the node being removed.

Login to one of the adjacent nodes.




to be shut down.

Switching Procedure 11-3.4: Delete node from Ethernet ring

protection (ERP) ring

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


11-35



Result: This node signals SF and unblocks the ring protection link (RPL).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Remove the node and reconnect the ring without that node. The other adjacent node

should also signal SF until the new link is working.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Login to the node where you disabled the link in Step 4.




that was shut down.



E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Switching Procedure 11-3.4: Delete node from Ethernet ring

protection (ERP) ring

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11-36 365-372-406R7.0


12 12Quality of service (QoS)

Overview

Purpose

The quality of service (QoS) menu feature includes, but is not limited to:

• Access Control List

• Differentiated Services

• Class of Service

This section covers requirements pertaining to the quality of service (QoS) menu feature.

Contents


Procedure 12-1: Provision access control lists 12-3

Procedure 12-2: Provision access control list rules 12-5

Procedure 12-3: Assign access control list to Ethernet interface 12-6

Procedure 12-4: Enable/Disable QoS differentiated services operational mode 12-7

Procedure 12-5: Provision QoS differentiated services 12-8

Procedure 12-6: View QoS differentiated services statistics 12-13

Procedure 12-7: Provision class of service 12-14

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


12-1

Before you begin

Before you begin







Required equipment




Quality of service (QoS) Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

12-2 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 12-1: Provision access control lists

Overview

Use this procedure to specify IP and/or MAC addresses authorized to access the network

resources.

Access control lists ensure that only authorized users have access to specific resources

and block any unwarranted attempts to reach network resources.

IP access control list guidelines

The following guidelines and rules apply to IP access control lists (ACLs).

• IP ACL configuration for IP packet fragments is not supported.

• A maximum of 100 ACLs can be created, regardless of type.

• The maximum number of rules per IP ACL is hardware dependent.

• Wildcard masking for ACLs operates differently from subnet masking. A wildcard

mask is the inverse of a subnet mask. With a subnet mask, the mask has ones (1's) in

the bit positions that are used for the network address, and zeros (0's) for bit positions

that are not used. In a wildcard mask zeros (0’s) are in bit positions that must be

checked, and ones (1’s) are in bit positions of the ACL mask that can be ignored.

MAC access control list guidelines

The following guidelines and rules apply to MAC access control lists (ACLs).

• The maximum number of ACLs that can be created is 100, regardless of type.

• The system supports only Ethernet II frame types.

• The maximum number of rules per MAC ACL is hardware dependent.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Quality of service (QoS) Procedure 12-1: Provision access control lists

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


12-3



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If configuring... Then...

IP access control list, From the Navigation menu, select QoS → IP

Access Control Lists → Configuration.

MAC access control list, From the Navigation menu, select QoS →MAC Access Control Lists →Configuration.

Result: The ACL Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If required, provision the rules that are to be associated with the access control list.

Result: Procedure 12-2: “Provision access control list rules” (p. 12-5)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If required, assign the address control list to an Ethernet interface.

Result: Procedure 12-3: “Assign access control list to Ethernet interface” (p. 12-6)

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quality of service (QoS) Procedure 12-1: Provision access control lists

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

12-4 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 12-2: Provision access control list rules

Overview

Use this procedure to provision the rules associated with a MAC and/or IP access control

list (ACL).

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If provisioning rules for... Then...

IP access control list, From the Navigation menu, select QoS → IP

Access Control Lists → Rule

Configuration.

MAC access control list, From the Navigation menu, select QoS →MAC Access Control Lists → Rule

Configuration.

Result: The ACL Rule Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quality of service (QoS) Procedure 12-2: Provision access control list rules

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


12-5

Procedure 12-3: Assign access control list to Ethernet

interface

Overview

Use this procedure to assign a provisioned IP or MAC access control list to an Ethernet

interface.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Access Control Lists → Interface

Configuration.

Result: The ACL Interface Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If assigning... Then...

an IP access control list to an Ethernet

interface,

From the Navigation menu, select QoS → IP

Access Control Lists → Summary and

verify that the required parameters were


an MAC access control list to an Ethernet

interface,

From the Navigation menu, select QoS →MAC Access Control Lists → Summary

and verify that the required parameters were


Result: The ACL Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quality of service (QoS) Procedure 12-3: Assign access control list to Ethernet

interface

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

12-6 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 12-4: Enable/Disable QoS differentiated services

operational mode

Overview

Use this procedure to Enable/Disable the Differentiated Services operational mode.

While disabled, the Differentiated Services configuration is retained and can be changed,

but it is not activated. When enabled, Differentiated Services are activated.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Differentiated Services → DiffServ

Configuration.

Result: The DiffServ Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enable/Disable the DiffServ Admin Mode, then click Submit.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quality of service (QoS) Procedure 12-4: Enable/Disable QoS differentiated

services operational mode

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


12-7

Procedure 12-5: Provision QoS differentiated services

Overview

Use this procedure to provision QoS differentiated services.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Create a new or modify an existing DiffServ class map and define the match criteria for

the class.

Reference: Procedure 12-5.1: “Provision differentiated services class” (p. 12-9)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Create a new or modify an existing DiffServ policy.

Reference: Procedure 12-5.2: “Provision differentiated services policy” (p. 12-10)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Assign the required provisioned DiffServ class to the required provisioned DiffServ

policy.

Reference: Procedure 12-5.3: “Assign class to policy” (p. 12-11)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Assign the required class/policy association to the required Ethernet interface to form a

service.

Reference: Procedure 12-5.4: “Assign class/policy to incoming Ethernet interface”

(p. 12-12)

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quality of service (QoS) Procedure 12-5: Provision QoS differentiated services

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

12-8 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 12-5.1: Provision differentiated services class

Overview

Use this procedure to create a new or modify an existing differentiated service (DiffServ)

class.

The DiffServ class defines the packet filtering criteria and is used to define traffic

classification.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Differentiated Services → Class

Configuration.

Result: The DiffServ Class Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Differentiated Services → Class


Result: The DiffServ Class Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quality of service (QoS) Procedure 12-5.1: Provision differentiated services class

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


12-9

Procedure 12-5.2: Provision differentiated services policy

Overview

Use this procedure to create a new or modify an existing differentiated service (DiffServ)

policy.

The DiffServ policy is used to specify traffic conditioning actions, such as policing and

marking, to apply to traffic classes.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Differentiated Services → Policy

Configuration.

Result: The DiffServ Policy Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



Result: The DiffServ Policy Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quality of service (QoS) Procedure 12-5.2: Provision differentiated services policy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

12-10 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 12-5.3: Assign class to policy

Overview

Use this procedure to associate a provisioned DiffServ class with one or more DiffServ

policies.

The class/policy association is assigned to an Ethernet interface to form a service.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Differentiated Services → Policy Class

Definition.

Result: The DiffServ Policy Class Definition screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Attribute Summary and verify that the required parameters were provisioned correctly.

Result: The DiffServ Policy Attribute Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quality of service (QoS) Procedure 12-5.3: Assign class to policy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


12-11

Procedure 12-5.4: Assign class/policy to incoming Ethernet

interface

Overview

Use this procedure to associate a provisioned DiffServ class/policy association to an

Ethernet interface in the incoming direction.

DiffServ is not used in the outgoing direction.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Differentiated Services → Service

Configuration.

Result: The DiffServ Service Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Differentiated Services → Service


Result: The DiffServ Service Summary screen appears.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quality of service (QoS) Procedure 12-5.4: Assign class/policy to incoming

Ethernet interface

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

12-12 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 12-6: View QoS differentiated services statistics

Overview

Use this procedure to obtain QoS differentiated services statistics for a single Ethernet

interface or all Ethernet interfaces.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If viewing statistics for,,, Then

a single Ethernet interface, From the Navigation menu, select QoS →Differentiated Services → Service

Detailed Statistics.

all Ethernet interfaces, From the Navigation menu, select QoS →Differentiated Services → Service

Statistics.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quality of service (QoS) Procedure 12-6: View QoS differentiated services

statistics

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


12-13

Procedure 12-7: Provision class of service

Overview

Use this procedure to provision class of service.

Class of service provisioning controls the priority and transmission rate of traffic.

Before you begin


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Class of Service → Trust Mode

Configuration to provision the class of service trust mode.

Result: The Trust Mode Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Class of Service → IP Precedence

Mapping Configuration to map an IP precedence to a traffic class.

Result: The IP Precedence Mapping Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Class of Service → IP DSCP Mapping

Configuration to map an IP DSCP to a traffic class.

Result: The IP DSCP Mapping Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Quality of service (QoS) Procedure 12-7: Provision class of service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

12-14 365-372-406R7.0


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Class of Service → Interface

Configuration to specify the maximum transmission bandwidth limit for an interface.

Result: The CoS Interface Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Class of Service → Interface Queue

Configuration to specify the minimum percentage of transmission bandwidth

guaranteed and activate the strict priority scheduler mode for an interface queue.

Result: The CoS Interface Queue Configuration screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Class of Service → Interface Queue

Status to view CoS interface queue information.

Result: The CoS Interface Queue Status screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 From the Navigation menu, select QoS → Class of Service → 802.1p Priority

Mapping to map an 802.1p priority to an internal traffic class.

Result: The 802.1p Priority Mapping screen appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quality of service (QoS) Procedure 12-7: Provision class of service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


12-15

13 13Link OA&M

Overview

Purpose

The link OA&M menu feature includes, but is not limited to:

• Configuration

• Summary

• Remote Loopback Status

• Port Discovery Status

• Event

• Linkmon Statistics

This section covers requirements pertaining to the link OA&M menu feature.

Contents


Procedure 13-1: Place holder 13-3

Procedure 13-2: Configure VL�C40/42 LinkOAM (802.3ah Clause 57) 13-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


13-1

Before you begin

Before you begin







Required equipment




Link OA&M Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

13-2 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 13-1: Place holder

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 This is a place holder for link OA&M related Web GUI procedures to be supplied at a

later date.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Link OA&M Procedure 13-1: Place holder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


13-3

Procedure 13-2: Configure VLNC40/42 LinkOAM (802.3ah

Clause 57)

Overview


• Enable/disable l2cpaware mode during loopbacks.

• Enable/disable linkoam (active or passive mode).

• Enable/disable loopback capability.

• Enable/disable loopbacks.

• Enable/disable link events monitoring.

The remote loopback capability allows the VL�C4x to respond to remote loopback

requests with compatible link partners.

See Figure 13-1, “VL�C40/42 link loopback — Example 1” (p. 13-7) and Figure 13-2,

“VL�C40/42 link loopback — Example 2” (p. 13-8) for reference. In the figures, the

dashed lines depict traffic flows without loopback. The VLA� membership indicates the

service provisioning and is unaffected by the loopback. The solid lines show the data

loopback behavior, in which only the traffic ingressing the looped port egresses, after

undergoing bridge processing including adding and removing another VLA� tag, and

DiffServ policy actions. Control traffic other than Link OAM may be looped, as shown by

the black dotted line, or may all be trapped to the CPU, depending on the L2CP-aware

configuration.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................




mode.

Link OA&M Procedure 13-2: Configure VLNC40/42 LinkOAM (802.3ah

Clause 57)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

13-4 365-372-406R7.0


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Interface Config Mode where “interface-number” is the address for the port you are

provisioning.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Interface Config Mode, enter

linkoam config [{l2cpaware | not-l2cpaware}], as required.

This command configures whether L2CP protocol packets are peered (l2cpaware) when a

link loopback is active, or if the protocol packets are looped (not-l2cpaware). The default

is “not-l2cpaware.”

Changing the awareness mode is not allowed if linkoam loopback-capability is enabled or

the port currently has a local or remote loopback active.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-9)# linkoam config l2cpaware.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Interface Config Mode, enter linkoam enable [{active | passive}] to

enable Link OAM and set activity mode (default is active). Enter no linkoam enable

to disable Link OAM and/or drop any existing loopback.

This command applies to physical external ports only. It is not allowed on SFP port d2-4

if it is configured for backplane connectivity. Link OAM is not allowed if Layer 2 Control

Protocol Tunneling (L2CP) is enabled. You cannot change the activity mode if Link OAM

loopback is in progress.

A port may be provisioned to be in either Active or Passive mode. In Active mode a port

can send a loopback command or respond to a loopback request from the remote end. In

the Passive mode it will only respond to a loopback request from the remote end. The

mode may only be changed if no local loopback command is active. If both link partners

are in Passive mode then no Link OAM functions are operable.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-9)# linkoam enable passive.


Clause 57)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


13-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 From the Interface Config Mode, if required, enter one of the following commands:

• linkoam loopback-capability enable — enables the local node to respond to

OAM loopback requests received from the remote node, and advertise this capability

to the remote node. This command is denied if linkoam is not enabled. By default, this

capability is disabled on a port which has link OAM enabled.

• no linkoam loopback-capability enable — disables responding to an OAM

loopback request. If there is an existing local link OAM loopback active, it is

dropped.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface

a-9)#no linkoam loopback-capability enable

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 If the interface has Link OAM enabled, and the remote node supports responding to a

remote loopback, the following command causes loopback activation request messages to

be sent to the remote node.

From the Interface Config Mode, enter linkoam remote-loopback to send a set of

loopback-enable control PDUs to the remote node.

The command is denied if:

• Linkoam is not enabled.

• Linkoam is enabled but discovery is not complete.

• A local physical loopback already exists on a port.

• The local linkoam mode is passive.

• The remote end does not support loopback.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-9)# linkoam remote-loopback.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Use the following commands to provision link events monitoring. Refer to the

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide,

for command details and parameters.

• linkoam event frame

This command configures enabling or disabling sending of Errored Frame event

PDUs, and configures the interval and threshold for sending the event.

• linkoam event frame-period

This command configures enabling or disabling sending of Errored Frame-Period

event PDUs, and configures the interval and threshold for sending the event.


Clause 57)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

13-6 365-372-406R7.0


• linkoam event frame-seconds

This command configures enabling or disabling sending of Errored Frame-Second


• linkoam event symbol-period

This command configures enabling or disabling sending of Errored Symbol Period


Figure 13-1 VLNC40/42 link loopback — Example 1

Faceplate portsBackplane ports

VLAN X

VLAN Y VLAN ,X Y

Looped porta{9-28}

CPULink OAM controlto/from CPU

Add/removedefault tag

Traffic and L2CPframes looped


Clause 57)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


13-7

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 13-2 VLNC40/42 link loopback — Example 2

Faceplate ports Backplane ports

VLAN X

VLAN Y

VLAN ,X Y

Looped portd2-{1-4}

CPU

Add/removedefault tag

Link OAM controlto/from CPU

Traffic and L2CPframes looped


Clause 57)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

13-8 365-372-406R7.0


14 14Service OA&M

Overview

Purpose

The service OA&M menu feature includes, but is not limited to:

• Connectivity Fault Management

• Maintenance Domain

• Maintenance Association

• Maintenance Association End Point

• Linktrace

• Loopback Request

• PM Administration

• Loss Measurement

• Delay Measurement

This section covers requirements pertaining to the service OA&M menu feature.

Contents


Procedure 14-1: Service OAM Place holder 14-3

Procedure 14-2: Configure Ethernet service OAM using CLI commands 14-4

Procedure 14-3: Y.1731 Service OAM for VL�C42 14-14

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-1

Before you begin

Before you begin




Most of the procedures in this chapter use the Web GUI with corresponding reference to

the equivalent CLI commands. When using CLI commands, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent

1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide.

Required equipment




Service OA&M Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-2 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 14-1: Service OAM Place holder

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 This is a place holder for service OA&M related Web GUI procedures to be supplied at a

later date.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Service OA&M Procedure 14-1: Service OAM Place holder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-3

Procedure 14-2: Configure Ethernet service OAM using CLI

commands

Overview

Use this procedure to configure Ethernet service OAM on VL�C40/42 networks.

Refer to “Service OAM in VL�C40/42” (p. 14-10), and Figure 14-1, “Service OAM

reference model” (p. 14-10) for an example.


Interface Guide, for help on using the Ethernet OAM CLI commands.

Service OAM provisioning consists of the following general order of steps:

1. Determine the VLA� tagging mode (VLA� ID) being used for this service.

2. Enabling Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) on each node in the network using

the ethoam cfm command.

3. Provision the Maintenance Domains (MDs) using the ethoam md command.

4. Provision the Maintenance Associations (MAs) using the ethoam ma command.

5. Provision the Maintenance association End Points (MEPs) to be used using the

ethoam mep and ethoam remote-mep commands.

This procedure uses Figure 14-1, “Service OAM reference model” (p. 14-10) as an

example for provisioning. Many other configurations are possible and must be

provisioned using local practices and procedures.

The steps in the following procedure are given in the logical order of configuring MDs

from the lowest level to the highest. Other ordering is possible, for instance configuring

successive ports, with all OAM entities on a port configured at once.

Although Figure 14-1, “Service OAM reference model” (p. 14-10) shows a Customer

level ME, this procedure is only used to provision the Provider network. Similar

provisioning may be performed between the customer and provider using these

procedures and coordination of the information that must be passed between the customer

and provider.


Interface Guide, for the proper command syntax, parameters, and values for each of the

commands used in this procedure.

Before you begin

You must be familiar with the concepts of IEEE Std 802.1ag™ -2007 Connectivity Fault

Management and/or have detailed work instructions.

Service OA&M Procedure 14-2: Configure Ethernet service OAM using CLI

commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-4 365-372-406R7.0


In addition, you should:

• Make a sketch of the network with the �odes and ports being used for this service.

• Know the number of players (owners), domains, and maintenance associations of the

OAM functions being provisioned at each of the nodes in the network.

• Determine the tagging mode of the service and the VLA� ID to be used for the

maintenance associations (MAs) being provisioned.

• Determine the location of all Maintenance association End Points (MEPs and

remote-MEPs) and Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs).

• Disable CFM traps for the switch during setup using the

no snmp-server enable traps cfm command, if required. When a remote-mep

is configured, a dot1agCfmFaultAlarm trap (DefRemoteCCM) will exist until the

remote has been configured mep-cc enable if traps are not disabled.

Step

For each of the required steps, login to the VL�C40/42 being provisioned using the

procedures of Procedure 2-1: “Connect personal computer (PC) and establish Command

Line Interface (CLI) session to VL�C4x/VL�C6x” (p. 2-3).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 On every node in the network being provisioned for OAM, you must first enable

Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) using the ethoam cfm command if not already

performed. The show ethoam cfm command may be used to check the status (enabled

or disabled) of CFM.

For example, from the Global Config mode at each node: (ALU 1850TSS-5) (Config)#

ethoam cfm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If link level provisioning is required, at all �odes 2-7, configure link level zero (0)

maintenance domains, maintenance associations, and Down-MEPs on every network port

interface using no VLA� (vid=0) Down-MEPs to monitor the physical links.

For example, for the link between �odes 2 and 3, perform the following at each node:

1. Use the ethoam md command to provision the link domain and domain level.

For example, from the Global Config mode: (ALU 1850TSS-5) (Config)#

ethoam md link level 0.

2. Use the ethoam ma command to provision the maintenance association (MA)

associated with no service instance (vid=0) within the link domain.


ethoam ma link1 md link vid 0 ccminterval 1sec.


commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-5

3. Use the ethoam mep command to configure each node interface at each end of the

link as a Maintenance association End Point (MEP) of the specific MA. At these

interfaces, configure the MEP as a Down-MEP. All MEPIDs in an MA must be

unique.

For example, from the Interface Config mode: (ALU 1850TSS-5) (Interface d2-1)#

ethoam mep 1 md link ma link1 direction down mep-cc enable

priority 7.

4. Use the ethoam remote-mep command to add remote Maintenance association End

Point (MEP) identifiers to the list of MEPIDs for this Maintenance Association (MA).

When the remote-mep is configured, a dot1agCfmFaultAlarm trap (DefRemoteCCM)

will exist until the remote has been configured mep-cc enable unless all CFM traps

are disabled during setup using the no snmp-server enable traps cfm

command.


ethoam remote-mepid 2 md link ma link1.

Repeat this step for each of the links (between nodes 3 and 4, nodes 4 and 5, nodes 5 and

6, and nodes 6 and 7.

�ote that this step may also be used to provision link level zero (0) maintenance domains,

maintenance associations, and Down-MEPs at �odes 2 and 7 ports facing the customer

equipment (links between �odes 1 and 2 and �odes 7 and 8.)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 At �odes 2 and 4, perform the following to provision OperatorA domains:

• Use the ethoam md command to provision the operator domain and domain level for

OperatorA.


ethoam md operatorA level 2.

• Use the ethoam ma command to provision the maintenance association (MA)

associated with a single service instance within the operator domain.


ethoam ma operator1 md operatorA vid 10 ccminterval 1sec ma-

mip enable.

�ote that the VLA� ID (vid) may not be the same in all cases depending on the

tagging mode.


commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-6 365-372-406R7.0


• Use the ethoam mep command to configure the U�I-� and E-��I node interfaces

with a Maintenance Association End Point. At these interfaces, configure the MEP as

an Up-MEP. All MEPIDs in an MA must be unique.

For example, from the Interface Config mode at �ode 2: (ALU 1850TSS-5) (Interface

a-42)#

ethoam mep 1 md operatorA ma operator1 direction up mep-cc

enable priority 7.

• Use the ethoam remote-mep command to add remote Maintenance association End





command.


ethoam remote-mepid 2 md operatorA ma operator1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 At �ode 3, if required and the tagging mode allows, use the ethoam md and ethoam ma

commands to enable operatorA MIPs at this node.


ethoam md operatorA level 2.


ethoam ma operator1 md operatorA vid 10 ccminterval 1sec ma-mip

enable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 At �odes 5 and 7, perform the following to provision OperatorB domains:

• Use the ethoam md command to provision the operator domain and domain level for

OperatorB.


ethoam md operatorB level 2.


associated with a single service instance within the operator domain.


ethoam ma operator2 md operatorB vid 10 ccminterval 1sec ma-

mip enable.


tagging mode.


commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-7

• Use the ethoam mep command to configure each node interface as a Maintenance

association End Point (MEP) of a specific MA. At these interfaces, configure the MEP

as an Up-MEP. All MEPIDs in an MA must be unique.


ethoam mep 1 md operatorB ma operator2 direction up mep-cc

enable priority 7.






command.


ethoam remote-mepid 2 md operatorB ma operator2.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 At �ode 6, if required and the tagging mode allows, use the ethoam md and ethoam ma

commands to enable operatorB MIPs at this node.


ethoam md operatorB level 2.


ethoam ma operator2 md operatorB vid 10 ccminterval 1sec ma-mip

enable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 At �odes 2 and 7, perform the following to provision the provider domain:

• Use the ethoam md command to provision the provider domain and domain level.


ethoam md provider level 4.


associated with a single service instance within the provider domain.


ethoam ma providerXYZ md provider vid 10 ccminterval 1sec ma-

mip enable.


tagging mode.


commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-8 365-372-406R7.0


• Use the ethoam mep command to configure each node U�I-� interface as a

Maintenance association End Point (MEP) of a specific MA. At these interfaces,

configure the MEP as an Up-MEP. All MEPIDs in an MA must be unique.


ethoam mep 11 md provider ma providerXYZ direction up mep-cc

enable priority 7.






command.


ethoam remote-mepid 12 md provider ma providerXYZ.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 At �odes 4 and 5, if required and the tagging mode allows, use the ethoam md and

ethoam ma commands to enable the provider MIPs at these nodes.


ethoam md provider level 4.


ethoam ma providerXYZ md provider vid 10 ccminterval 1sec ma-mip

enable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 At �odes 2 and 7, if required and the tagging mode allows (see Table 14-1, “�o double

tagging” (p. 14-12), Table 14-2, “Double tagging – All to one bundling” (p. 14-13), and

Table 14-3, “Double tagging – Service-multiplexed” (p. 14-13)), use the ethoam md and

ethoam ma commands to enable the customer MIPs at these nodes.


ethoam md customer level 7.


ethoam ma customer1 md customer vid 10 ma-mip enable.


commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-9

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Service OAM in VLNC40/42

Ethernet service OAM (Operations, Administration, and Maintenance) provides

maintenance features for detecting, isolating, and reporting connectivity faults for

Ethernet services. This release implements IEEE Std 802.1ag™ -2007 Connectivity Fault

Management for the VL�C40/42 circuit packs. Three basic features are currently

specified: Continuity Check, Link Trace, and Loopback.

For each service, generally three types of players are involved: the customer, the service

provider, and operators. Each needs its own independent OAM functions, in its own

Maintenance Domain (MD). For this reason Service OAM is defined at multiple levels, as

shown in Figure 14-1, “Service OAM reference model” (p. 14-10).

Figure 14-1 Service OAM reference model

1 82 3 4 5 6 7

Service Provider

Operator A NEs Operator B NEs

Operator A ME(UNI-N to E-NNI)

Operator B ME(UNI-N to E-NNI)

Customerequipment

Customerequipment

Up MEP

Down MEP

MIP

Port

ETH

ME - Maintenance EntityETH - Ethernet framesTran/ETH - Physical transport layerE-NNI - External Network-to-Network InterfaceUNI - User-to-Network InterfaceUNI-C - User Network Interface, port on customer side of UNIUNI-N - User Network Interface, port on network side of UNI

Tran/EthPhysical

E-NNI

EVC (Provider) ME(UNI-N to UNI-N)

Customer ME(UNI-C to UNI-C)

Link Link Link Link Link

OAMservice

Link Link


commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-10 365-372-406R7.0


CFM supports the following concepts to support multiple independent operators, services,

and customers:

• Maintenance Domains (MD) — A MD is a part of the network controlled by a single

player (owner) to support connectivity between maintenance end points (MEPs) that

bound the maintenance domain.

• Maintenance Domain Levels — Maintenance domain levels allow customers, service

providers, and operators to run independent OAMs on their own level. Up to eight

OAM levels are defined (0-7), with seven (7) being the highest. By convention,

customers are allocated up to three levels (5, 6, 7), service providers two levels (3, 4) ,

and operators three levels (0, 1, 2).

• Maintenance Associations (MA) — Maintenance Associations (MA) are associated

with a single service instance (identified by the service VLA� identifier) within a

maintenance domain (identified by the maintenance domain name). The combination

of the maintenance domain name (if MD name format is not null) and the

maintenance association name is called Maintenance Association Identifier (MAID).

• Maintenance End Points (MEPs) — Maintenance End Points (MEP) are established

on interfaces at each end of a maintenance domain. MEPs are configured for a

specific MA within a maintenance domain to generate and receive Connectivity Fault

Management (CFM) PDUs. Each individual MEP is configured with a MEPID that is

unique within its MA. MEPs may be configured as Up MEPs or Down MEPs. MEPs

may be addressed by the MEPID or by their port’s MAC address for Down-MEPs or

by the shared bridge CPU MAC address for Up-MEPs.

• Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs) — MIPs may also be created at intermediate

bridge ports between MEPs. When enabled, MIPs are automatically created on a port

at the MD level above the highest level MEP or in the lowest configured MD level if

there is no MEP on the port. In other words, MIPs can be created for the VID

(monitored by this MA) on any bridge port through which the VID can pass where

there are no lower MD levels, or where there is a MEP at the next lower MD level on

the port.

A MIP consists of two MIP Half Functions (MHFs) on a single bridge port, an Up

MHF and a Down MHF. MIPs may be addressed by their port’s MAC address for

Down-MHFs or by the shared bridge CPU MAC address for Up-MHFs.

Each player can establish their own Maintenance Associations (MA), consisting of

Maintenance Endpoints (MEP’s, shown as triangles), which allows them to exchange

OAM messages over their domain of the service. MEP’s can perform fault detection using

keep-alive messages called Continuity Check Messages (CCM). Maintenance

Intermediate Points (MIP’s, shown as circles) may be created to facilitate fault isolation.

They can respond to, but do not initiate, certain OAM functions. For example, loopbacks

may be initiated from a MEP which has detected a CC fault and targeted successively to

each MIP at its level. A provider can isolate a fault to one operator, and an operator can

isolate to a single �E.


commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-11

Service OAM Configurations

An example application is a VL�C40/42 provider-owned demarcation point between

customers and the provider’s network. This is �ode 2 or �ode 7 in Figure 14-1, “Service

OAM reference model” (p. 14-10). Each customer port may be provisioned to support a

customer MIP and at least a provider Up-MEP, and if applicable an operator Up-MEP, for

each Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC). A link-level Down-MEP may be configured on

both customer and network ports, with no VID, to monitor the entire link.

Provider bridging (double tagging) is typically used. In that case, a customer MIP can

only function if the customer supplies untagged Ethernet OAM frames (see “MIP

support” (p. 14-12)), which get tagged with the S-VLA�, otherwise the customer’s OAM

traffic is tunneled. See Table 14-2, “Double tagging – All to one bundling” (p. 14-13) and

Table 14-3, “Double tagging – Service-multiplexed” (p. 14-13). OAM for multiple EVC’s

(service-multiplexing) is supported. Similarly, in that case only one of the EVC’s on a

port can support a customer MIP, the one which includes untagged traffic (see Table 14-3,

“Double tagging – Service-multiplexed” (p. 14-13)).

If double tagging is not used, then a customer MIP may be supported in the default

VLA� if the customer supplies untagged Ethernet OAM frames, or by agreement with

the customer on a specific VLA� for OAM. See Table 14-1, “�o double tagging”

(p. 14-12). The provider’s OAM also uses that same VLA�, representing the “service.”

Service OAM also applies to more complex networks than is represented in this

procedure, including multipoint and ring networks.

MIP support

Whether and how a customer MIP can be supported depends on the tagging mode, and

whether the customer OAM frames (only levels 5, 6 and 7 are designated for customer

use) are tagged. Table 14-1, “�o double tagging” (p. 14-12) through Table 14-3, “Double

tagging – Service-multiplexed” (p. 14-13) show, for the provider edge, the relation

between customer OAM tagging and the Service VLA� to be used for configuring the

MA. For example, �ode 2 in Figure 14-1, “Service OAM reference model” (p. 14-10). A

customer MIP can only be supported (be accessible) in the provider’s equipment when the

customer’s OAM frames have a single tag when forwarded to the CPU. When double

tagged, they are tunneled.

Table 14-1 No double tagging

Customer OAM VLAN Customer MIP supported? Service VLAN ID

Untagged (untagged not

accepted)

�o �/A

Untagged (untagged

accepted)

Yes, in pvid pvid


commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-12 365-372-406R7.0


Table 14-1 No double tagging (continued)


VLA�=X Yes X

�o OAM �o Any

Table 14-2 Double tagging – All to one bundling


Untagged Yes, in default VLA� (pvid) pvid

VID=X �o, tunneled pvid

Table 14-3 Double tagging – Service-multiplexed


Untagged Yes, in only one EVC As mapped with SVLA�

VID=X �o, tunneled As mapped with SVLA�


commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-13

Procedure 14-3: Y.1731 Service OAM for VLNC42

Overview

Y.1731 service OAM in this release supports:

• Service OAM PM

Loss Measurement (LM)

– Dual-Ended (CCM-based Proactive)

– Single-Ended (LMM/LMR-based; On-Demand)

Delay Measurement (DM)

– Two-way (round trip) Delay Measurement

– One-way Delay Variation Measurement (no TOD clock needed)

• Ethernet AIS

• Y.1731/G.8021 CCM alarms

Before you begin

The OAM PM features, LM and DM, can be enabled when CFM is enabled. Parts of the

system configuration must be in place on the port(s) or LAG before OAM-PM is enabled,

and cannot be changed while OAM-PM is active. Disabling OAM-PM clears all

provisioning directly associated with it. The system configuration which must be

configured first includes “mode dvlan-tunnel”, spanning tree or ERP participation, LAG

membership on the OAM-PM ports, and mtu-size on all ports.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Perform the following procedures, as required:

• Procedure 14-3.1: “Enable Ethernet OAM Performance Monitoring (PM)” (p. 14-16)

• Procedure 14-3.2: “OAM PM proactive loss measurement (LM)” (p. 14-18)

• Procedure 14-3.3: “Proactive LM Threshold Configuration” (p. 14-20)

• Procedure 14-3.4: “OAM PM on-demand loss measurement (LM)” (p. 14-23)

• Procedure 14-3.5: “OAM PM on-demand loss measurement (LM) responder”

(p. 14-26)

• Procedure 14-3.6: “OAM PM proactive delay measurement (DM)” (p. 14-28)

• Procedure 14-3.7: “Proactive DM Threshold Configuration” (p. 14-31)

• Procedure 14-3.8: “OAM PM on-demand delay measurement” (p. 14-33)

• Procedure 14-3.9: “OAM PM on-demand delay measurement (DM) responder”

(p. 14-36)

• Procedure 14-3.10: “Enable AIS generation on a MEP” (p. 14-38)

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3: Y.1731 Service OAM for VLNC42

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-14 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3: Y.1731 Service OAM for VLNC42

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-15

Procedure 14-3.1: Enable Ethernet OAM Performance

Monitoring (PM)

Overview

Use this procedure to enable PM on d-group interface(s) or a LAG logical port containing

two d-group interfaces. The PM functions include Loss Measurement and Delay

Measurement, both proactive (continuous with 15-minute and 24-hour binning of results),

and on-demand. Up-MEPs which are configured for the PM measurements may exist on

any port, but the OAM PM traffic passes through the d-group interface(s). Down-MEPs

may be configured for PM measurements only on the interface(s) enabled for Ethernet

OAM PM. By default OAM PM is disabled.

You can only enable OAM PM on one or two d-group ports, or a LAG containing them,

and when ethoam cfm is enabled. Specified individual ports cannot be members of a

LAG. Once OAM PM is enabled, you cannot modify the port participation, nor can you

change the configuration of mode dvlan-tunnel, spanning tree or ERP participation, nor

LAG membership, on those ports, nor mtu-size on any port, without first disabling OAM

PM. You cannot change VLA� participation on a port enabled for OAM PM if a Loss or

Delay Measurement session is configured in that VLA�.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select Service OA&M → PM Admin.

Equivalent CLI command: ethoam pm <port1> [<port2>].

Result: The PM Admin window displays current settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enable or Disable PM as required. See “PM Admin” (p. 14-17).

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3.1: Enable Ethernet OAM Performance

Monitoring (PM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-16 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PM Admin


PM State This parameter enables Ethernet OA&M

Performance Monitoring (PM) on d-group

interface(s) or a LAG containing two d-group

interfaces. Valid values: Enable or Disable. The

default value is Disable. Use show ethoam pm

to get the system settings. If there is no output, it

means PM State is Disable. no ethoam pm

disables the PM State.

show ethoam pm,

ethoam pm,

no ethoam pm

Port 1 A d-group interface or LAG. A LAG must have

two d-group interfaces as members.

ethoam pm d2-1 d2-2

Port 2 A d-group interface. ethoam pm d2-1 d2-2

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3.1: Enable Ethernet OAM Performance

Monitoring (PM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-17

Procedure 14-3.2: OAM PM proactive loss measurement (LM)

Overview

Use this procedure to request the MEP to begin a proactive Loss Measurement session for

a particular Class of Service, using CCM frames (ethoam mep mep-cc). The results are

minimum, maximum, and average, near end and far end, Frame Loss Ratio (FLR) per

15-minute and 24-hour intervals, reported via S�MP. In addition, SES and UAS PM are

augmented by per-second FLR calculations.

Loss Measurement provides an accurate accounting of frames received versus frames sent

for a service. A typical use is by a Service Provider who conducts the measurement

proactively (continuously) end-to-end for Service Level Agreement (SLA) verification.

Up-MEP’s at the service endpoints exchange frame count information to make the

calculation. The customer can do the same in their equipment for the same reason, using

Down-MEPs on their U�I ports. If the service crosses administrative boundaries, then the

responsible entities may measure performance on each leg, bounded by their MEPs.

Proactive LM is also used to monitor Severely Errored Second (SES) and UnAvailable

Second (UAS), also for SLA verification. An FLR is calculated each second, and if it

exceeds 75%, (or if the MEP detects a local fault) then the SES counter is incremented.

UAS is calculated in the same manner as in TDM. Both are implemented according to

ITU-T G.7710.

Proactive results are only available by S�MP. A TCA notification is provided for LM and

DM current maximum and average FLR bins, and for SES and UAS. The thresholds are

user configurable. See “Proactive LM Threshold parameters” (p. 14-21).

Before you begin

Refer to the following restrictions:

• Ethernet OAM pm (ethoam pm) must be enabled. See Procedure 14-3.1: “Enable

Ethernet OAM Performance Monitoring (PM)” (p. 14-16).

• Proactive LM can be configured on only one Up-MEP for a particular VID and

priority, and on only one Down-MEP for a particular VID, priority and port.

• You cannot enable a proactive LM session on both an Up and Down MEP having the

same VID and priority.

• You can enable proactive LM simultaneously with on-demand LM and an on-demand

LM responder, for the same VID and priority, but they must all be on the same MEP.

• The MEP must belong to a VLA� and have CCM enabled.

• The remote peer MEP should also have proactive LM enabled.

Step

Proactive Loss Measurement

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3.2: OAM PM proactive loss measurement

(LM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-18 365-372-406R7.0


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu at each end of the service, select Service OA&M → Loss

Measurement → Proactive Configuration to configure proactive loss measurement.

Equivalent CLI command: ethoam proactive-lm.

Result: The Proactive LM Configuration window displays current settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the parameters as required. See “Proactive loss measurement parameters” (p. 14-19)

. Click Submit to request the MEP to begin a proactive Loss Measurement session. Click

Delete to delete a proactive Loss Measurement session.

Proactive loss measurement parameters


MD �ame Select the MD name from the drop-down list containing

all MDs on the bridge.

ethoam proactive-lm md

<MDname>

MA �ame Select the MA name from the drop-down list containing

all MAs on the bridge.

ethoam proactive-lm ma

<MAname>

SourceMEPID /

Create

MEPID of the MEP transmitting proactive LM. The

drop-down list contains "Create" plus all local MEPs,

which have the Proactive LM configured, in the

selected MA above.

ethoam proactive-lm

mep <sourceMEPID>

Proactive LM This is the MEP ID field. For "Create", the drop-down

list contains all local MEPs, which do not have

Proactive LM configured, in the selected MA above.

Otherwise, it is a display-only field containing the

above selected MEP ID.

ethoam proactive-lm

mep <sourceMEPID>

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3.2: OAM PM proactive loss measurement

(LM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-19

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 14-3.3: Proactive LM Threshold Configuration

Overview

Use this procedure to provision the LM/SES/AUS threshold values for a Proactive LM

session on a selected MEP or to delete the LM/SES/UAS Threshold values for the

Proactive LM session on a selected MEP.

LM/SES/UAS thresholds can be configured only when the associated proactive LM

session is enabled.

This procedure:

• Sets alarm thresholds for a proactive Loss Measurement session, for maximum or

average Frame Loss Ratio measurement, �ear-end or Far-end, 15-minute or 24-hour

intervals. Thresholds for average measurements are not crossed until the end of an

interval.

The alarm is raised when a measurement equals or exceeds the cross threshold, which

for maximum can occur anytime during a bin, and for average only at the end of a bin.

The alarm is cleared when the measurement at the end of a bin is equal or less than

the clear threshold.

• Sets alarm thresholds for Severely Errored Second monitoring, for Unidirectional

�ear-end or Far-end, Bidirectional �ear-end or Far-end, 15-minute or 24-hour

intervals.

The alarm is raised when a counter equals or exceeds the cross threshold, which can

occur anytime during a bin. The alarm is cleared when the counter at the end of a bin

is equal or less than the clear threshold.

• Sets alarm thresholds for Unavailable Seconds, for Unidirectional �ear-end or

Far-end, Bidirectional, 15-minute or 24-hour intervals.

The alarm is raised when a counter equals or exceeds the cross threshold, which can

occur anytime during a bin. The alarm is cleared when the counter at the end of a bin

is equal or less than the clear threshold.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select Service OA&M → Loss Measurement →Threshold Configuration to configure thresholds for the proactive loss measurement.


• ethoam lm-threshold

• ethoam ses-threshold

• ethoam uas-threshold

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3.3: Proactive LM Threshold Configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-20 365-372-406R7.0


Result: The Proactive LM Threshold Configuration window displays current settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the parameters as required. See “Proactive LM Threshold parameters” (p. 14-21).

Click Submit to execute the commands. Click Delete to delete both Cross and Clear

Threshold values for the selected Monitoring Data in the selected Proactive LM session.

Proactive LM Threshold parameters


Monitoring Data This is a drop-down list for the monitoring data type.

Valid values: LM, SES, UAS. The default value is

"LM".

ethoam lm-threshold

ethoam ses-threshold

ethoam uas-threshold

Measurement

Type

The type of measurement for the selected threshold

presented in a drop-down list:

• LM Range — a�15, x�15, aF15, xF15, a�24,

x�24, aF24, xF24 where: a = average, x =

maximum, � = near-end, F = far-end, 15 =

15-minute counter, 24 = 24-hour counter. For

example: a�15 is the Average �ear-end FLR for the

15-minute counter.

• SES Range — u�15, b�15, uF15, bF15, u�24,

b�24, uF24, bF24 where: u = unidirectional, b =

bidirectional, � = near-end, F = far-end, 15 =

15-minute counter, 24 = 24-hour counter. For

example: u�15 is the Unidirectional �ear-end SES

15-minute counter.

• UAS Range — u�15, uF15, b15, u�24, uF24, b24

where: u = unidirectional, b = bidirectional, � =

near-end, F = far-end, 15 = 15-minute counter, 24 =

24-hour counter. For example: u�15 is the

Unidirectional �ear-end UAS 15-minute counter.

For each Measurement Type, one set of threshold values

can be created per Proactive LM session. If the

Proactive LM does not have any threshold value set yet,

the default is the first one in the list. Otherwise, the

default value is the first measurement type set in the

system.

ethoam lm-threshold

<type>


<type>


<type>


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-21

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Cross Threshold The threshold for generating a crossing alert.

• For LM: valid values: an integer in the range of 1 to

100000. The default value 30000.

• For SES and u�15, b�15, uF15, bF15, the valid

value is an integer in the range of 1-810. The





• For UAS and u�15, uF15, b15, the valid value is an

integer in the range of 1-900. The default value is

15.



20.

ethoam lm-threshold

cross <value>


cross <value>


cross <value>

Clear Threshold The threshold for clearing a crossing alert. The Clear

Threshold must be lower than the Cross Threshold.

• For LM: valid values: an integer in the range of 1 to

100000. The default value is 25000.



default value is 0.



default value is 0.


integer in the range of 0-899. The default value is 0.



0.

ethoam lm-threshold

clear <value>


clear <value>


clear <value>

Proactive LM

(MD/MA/

MEPID)

This is a selectable field. The entry contains the comma

separated fields of MD name, MA name, and MEPID

for a Proactive LM. The drop-down list contains all

MEPs which have the Proactive LM configured and

enabled. The default display is for the first enabled

Proactive LM in the system. When the Proactive LM

selection is changed, the display data is updated

automatically.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-22 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 14-3.4: OAM PM on-demand loss measurement (LM)

Overview

Use this procedure to request a MEP to begin a local on-demand Loss Measurement

session for a particular Class of Service (CoS). A single measurement is made, which can

be deferred using a start time. The results are retrievable via

show on-demand-lm-stats. When remote mc is configured, the class 1 multicast

address for the MEP’s level is used.

The on-demand loss measurement provides a troubleshooting tool by CLI. It consists of

frame loss ratio (FLR) measured over a specified interval at a specified time. On-demand

results per direction are reported at the end of the configured measurement interval.

On-Demand LM may be conducted on a MEP running Proactive LM, even for the same

CoS.

On-Demand LM may be enabled on a MEP regardless if CCM is enabled.

A single measurement is made for an On-Demand session, which can be deferred using a

start time. The measurement consists of a pair of Loss Measurement Messages (LMM)

and the received Loss Measurement Replies (LMR) from which the count differences

gives the number of frames sent and received during the period between them. That

period is configurable from 1 second up to 10 minutes.

Before you begin


• On-demand LM is available only when ethoam pm is enabled.

• On-demand LM can be configured on only one Up-MEP for a particular VID and

priority, and on only one Down-MEP for a particular VID and priority and port (and

only on a port which has ethoam pm enabled). You cannot enable an on-demand LM

session on both an Up and Down MEP having the same VID and priority.

• You can enable on-demand LM simultaneously with an on-demand LM responder and

proactive LM, for the same VID and priority, but they must all be on the same MEP.

• The command is rejected if remoteMEPID is specified, but the remote MEP MAC

address is not known (CCM are not received from the remote MEP).

• You should not use the multicast address when there is a possibility of more than one

reply.

• The remote peer MEP should also have either an overlapping on-demand LM session

or an LM responder enabled.

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3.4: OAM PM on-demand loss measurement

(LM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-23

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select Service OA&M → Loss Measurement →On-Demand Configuration to configure on-demand loss measurement.

Equivalent CLI command: ethoam on-demand-lm. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850

Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide for a complete

description of this command and related parameters.

When using CLI commands, use the show on-demand-lm-stats CLI command to

retrieve the results of an on-demand loss measurement.

Result: The On-Demand LM Configuration window displays current settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the parameters as required. See “On-demand loss measurement parameters”

(p. 14-24). Click Submit to request the MEP to begin an on-demand Loss Measurement

session. Click Delete to delete an on-demand Loss Measurement session.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Both ends need to be configured for on-demand LM or an on-demand LM responder at

the other end (or a proactive LM session for the same class of service).

Reference: Procedure 14-3.5: “OAM PM on-demand loss measurement (LM)

responder” (p. 14-26)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the �avigation menu, select ServiceOA&M → Loss Measurement →On-Demand Status command to retrieve the results of the measurement.

Equivalent CLI command: show ethoam on-demand-dm-stats.

On-demand loss measurement parameters




ethoam on-demand-lm md

<MDname>



ethoam on-demand-lm ma

<MAname>


(LM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-24 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


SourceMEPID /

Create

MEPID of the MEP transmitting on-demand LM. The

drop-down list contains "Create" plus all local MEPs,

which have the on-demand LM configured, in the

selected MA above.

ethoam on-demand-lm

mep <sourceMEPID>

On-Demand LM This is the MEP ID field. For "Create", the drop-down

list contains all local MEPs, which do not have

On-demand LM configured, in the selected MA above.

Otherwise, it is a display-only field containing the

above selected MEP ID.

ethoam on-demand-lm

mep <sourceMEPID>

Priority The priority of the LMM frames carrying the LM

information, and the Class of Service being measured.

Valid values: an integer in the range of 0 to 7.

ethoam on-demand-lm

priority <priority-

value>

Remote MEP Valid values:

• The MAC Address of the Remote MEP

• The MEPID of the Remote MEP

• MC — When MC is selected for the Remote MEP,

the class 1 multicast address for the MEP’s level is

used.

ethoam on-demand-lm

remote {<remoteMAC> |

<remoteMEPID> | mc}

LMM Frame

�umber

The number of LMM frames sent during the

measurement. The valid value is 1 in this release.

ethoam on-demand-lm

nbr <meas-nbr>

Start Time The time to start a measurement. Valid values: an

integer in the format of YYYYMMDDHHMMSS. The

Start Time must be later than the current time.

ethoam on-demand-lm

start-time <s-time>

Period The period between LMM frames during the

measurement. Valid values: 1 Sec, 10 Sec (default), 1

Min, 10 Min

ethoam on-demand-lm

period {1sec | 10sec |

1min | 10min}


(LM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-25

Procedure 14-3.5: OAM PM on-demand loss measurement (LM)

responder

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the local MEP to respond to a remote on-demand Loss

Measurement session for a particular Class of Service with measurement counts needed

by the remote MEP.

Generally a responder is needed for an on-demand LM session initiated by a remote MEP.

Configuring a responder allocates LM counter resources to this function. The same

resources are used by a local on-demand LM session so they only count once towards the

resource limit.

Before you begin


• On-demand LM is available only when ethoam pm is enabled.

• On-demand LM can be configured on only one Up-MEP for a particular VID and

priority, and on only one Down-MEP for a particular VID and priority and port (and

only on a port which has ethoam pm enabled). You cannot enable an on-demand LM

responder on both an Up and Down MEP having the same VID and priority.

• You can enable an on-demand LM responder simultaneously with on-demand LM and

proactive LM, for the same VID and priority, but they must all be on the same MEP.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select Service OA&M → Loss Measurement →On-Demand LM Responder Configuration to configure on-demand loss

measurement responder.

Equivalent CLI command: ethoam on-demand-lm-responder. Refer to the

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide for

a complete description of this command and related parameters.

Result: The On-Demand LM Responder Configuration window displays current

settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the parameters as required. See “On-demand loss measurement responder

parameters” (p. 14-27). Click Submit to execute the command. Click Delete to delete

the responder.


(LM) responder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-26 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

On-demand loss measurement responder parameters


MD �ame The MD name of the Responder for a remote

On-Demand LM session.

ethoam on-demand-lm-

responder md <MDname>

MA �ame The MA name of the Responder for a remote

On-Demand LM session. This is a drop-down list

containing all MAs in the above selected MD.


responder ma <MAname>

SourceMEPID /

Create

The MEP ID of the Responder for a remote On-Demand

LM session. This is a drop-down list containing all

MEPs in the above selected MD/MA.


responder mep

<sourceMEPID>

Priority The priority of the LMM frames carrying the LM




responder priority

<priority-value>


(LM) responder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-27

Procedure 14-3.6: OAM PM proactive delay measurement (DM)

Overview

Use this procedure to request the local MEP to begin a proactive Delay Measurement

session for a particular Class of Service. When remote “mc” is configured, the class 1

multicast address for the MEP’s level is used. The results are minimum, maximum, and

average, near end and far end, Delay and Delay Variation per 15 minute and 24 hour

intervals, reported via S�MP.

Round-trip (RT) delay is measured by sending timestamped DMM frames to the other

end which returns the frames to the originating node in DMR frames where they are again

timestamped. The difference between the timestamps is the RT delay, including the time it

takes the responder to reflect the message.

One-way Delay Variation is calculated by differences between subsequent “one-way

delay” measurements to minimize the error due to frequency offset between clocks used

by peers.

Proactive results are only available by S�MP. The minimum, average, and maximum

round-trip, and one-way delay variation per direction, are retrievable. A TCA is

configurable for Average and Maximum Round-trip Delay and One-way Delay Variation.

The thresholds are user configurable. See “Proactive DM Threshold parameters”

(p. 14-31).

When ethoam pm is enabled on a LAG, a DM session by default measures delay on the

lowest numbered member port. If that member port fails, the session switches to the good

member port, and back again when recovered.

Before you begin




• Proactive DM can be configured on only one Up-MEP for a particular VID, MD level,

and priority, and on only one Down-MEP for a particular VID, MD level, priority and

port (and only on a port which has ethoam pm enabled).

• Proactive DM is not availabe for MEPs with no VLA� (VID = 0).

• You cannot configure a proactive or on-demand DM session on both an Up and Down

MEP having the same VID, MD level, and priority.

• A DM responder may be configured simultaneously with either proactive or

on-demand DM, but it must be on the same MEP.

• The “fs-value” can be no greater than the mtu size configured for the port where the

MEP is configured (see show interface ethernet Max Frame Size).

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3.6: OAM PM proactive delay measurement

(DM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-28 365-372-406R7.0


• The command is rejected if remoteMEPID is specified but the remote MEP MAC


• A configured responder is necessary to support a remote DM session (Proactive or

On-Demand) when there is not a DM session for the same VLA�, CoS and MD level

(and port, for a Down-MEP) enabled on the MEP.

Step

Proactive Delay Measurement

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select Service OA&M → Delay Measurement →Proactive Configuration to configure proactive delay measurement.

Equivalent CLI command: ethoam proactive-dm.

Result: The Proactive DM Configuration window displays current settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the parameters as required. See “Proactive delay measurement parameters”

(p. 14-29). Click Submit to request the MEP to begin a proactive delay measurement

session. Click Delete to delete a proactive delay measurement session.

Proactive delay measurement parameters




ethoam proactive-dm md

<MDname>



ethoam proactive-dm ma

<MAname>

Source MEPID MEPID of the MEP transmitting proactive DM. ethoam proactive-dm

mep <sourceMEPID>

Priority The priority of the DMM frames carrying the DM



ethoam proactive-dm

priority <priority-

value>

Remote MEP MAC Address or MEPID of the remote MEP.

Valid values:

• MAC Address of the Remote MEP

• MEPID of the Remote MEP

• MC

ethoam proactive-dm


<remoteMEPID> | mc}


(DM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-29

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Period The period between DMM frames during the

measurement. This is an optional field.

Valid values:

• 1 Sec (default) and recommended.

• 10 Sec

• 1 Min

ethoam proactive-dm

period {1sec | 10sec |

1min}

Frame Size The size of the proactive DM frame. Valid values: 0 or

an integer in the range of 64 to 9216. This is an optional

field. 0 means a random frame size distributed between

64 and the port’s configured mtu size.

ethoam proactive-dm frame_

size <fs-value>


(DM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-30 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 14-3.7: Proactive DM Threshold Configuration

Overview

Use this procedure to provision the threshold values for a proactive DM session on a

selected MEP. DM thresholds can be configured only when the associated proactive DM

session is enabled.

Alarm thresholds are set for a proactive Delay Measurement session, for maximum or

average measurement, Bidirectional (Round Trip) Delay or �ear-end or Far-end Delay

Variation, 15 minute or 24 hour intervals.

The clear threshold must be lower than the cross threshold. The alarm is raised when a

measurement equals or exceeds the cross threshold, which for maximum can occur

anytime during a bin, and for average only at the end of a bin. The alarm is cleared when

the measurement at the end of a bin is equal or less than the clear threshold. Because

delay typically is above zero, take care when setting the clear threshold so that the TCA

can clear under normal circumstances.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select Service OA&M → Delay Measurement →Threshold Configuration to configure thresholds for the proactive delay measurement.

Equivalent CLI command: ethoam dm-threshold

Result: The Proactive DM Threshold Configuration window displays current

settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the parameters as required. See “Proactive DM Threshold parameters” (p. 14-31).

Click Submit to execute the command. Click Delete to delete the threshold values from

the selected Proactive DM session.

Proactive DM Threshold parameters


Priority The Priority of the selected Proactive DM. It is the

priority of the DMM frames carrying the DM



ethoam dm-threshold

priority <priority-

value>

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3.7: Proactive DM Threshold Configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-31

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Measurement

Type

The type of measurement for the threshold.

Range: aB_FD15, xB_FD15, a�_FDV15, x�_FDV15,

aF_FDV15, xF_FDV15, aB_FD24, xB_FD24,

a�_FDV24, x�_FDV24, aF_FDV24, xF_FDV24,

where:

• a - average, x - maximum

• � - near end, F - far end

• B - bidirectional (round trip)

• FD - frame delay, FDV - frame delay variation

• 15 - 15-minute counter, 24 - 24-hour counter

For example: aB_FD15 - Average Round trip frame

delay, 15-minute counter.

ethoam dm-threshold

type <meas-type>

Cross Threshold The threshold for generating a crossing alert. Valid

values: an integer in the range of 1 to 100000 in units of

0.1 millisecond. Default: 10000.

ethoam dm-threshold

cross <cross-value>

Clear Threshold The threshold for clearing a crossing alert. Valid values:

an integer in the range of 0 to 99999 in units of 0.1

millisecond. The Clear Threshold must be lower than

the Cross Threshold. Default: 9000.

ethoam dm-threshold

clear <clear-value>

Proactive DM

(MD/MA/

MEPID)

A drop-down list containing all Proactive DM in the

system. It contains the comma separated fields of MD

name, MA name, and MEPID for a Proactive DM.

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3.7: Proactive DM Threshold Configuration

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-32 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 14-3.8: OAM PM on-demand delay measurement

Overview

Use this procedure to perform an on-demand round-trip delay measurement for a selected

MEP.

On-Demand DM has the same restrictions on instances as Proactive DM including not

sharing an instance with a Proactive session. See Procedure 14-3.6: “OAM PM proactive

delay measurement (DM)” (p. 14-28).

In release 6.0, only a single measurement is conducted for an On-Demand session,

consisting of a DMM and the received DMR from which the round-trip delay is

calculated.

The following results are retrievable using the show on-demand-dm-stats CLI

command or the Web GUI ServiceOAM → Delay Measurement → On-Demand

Status command:

• List of RT delays calculated at each period

• �umber of successful DMM/DMR transactions

• �umber of unsuccessful DMM/DMR transactions

Before you begin




• On-demand DM can be configured on only one Up-MEP for a particular VID, MD

level, and priority, and on only one Down-MEP for a particular VID, MD level,

priority and port (and only on a port which has ethoam pm enabled).

• You cannot configure a proactive or on-demand DM session on both an Up and Down

MEP having the same VID, MD level, and priority.

• On-demand DM is not available for MEPs with no VLA� (VID = 0).



• The command is rejected if remoteMEPID is specified, but the remote MEP MAC


• A configured responder is necessary to support a remote DM session (Proactive or

On-Demand) when there is not a DM session for the same VLA�, CoS and MD level

(and port, for a Down-MEP) enabled on the MEP.

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3.8: OAM PM on-demand delay

measurement

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-33

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select Service OA&M → Delay Measurement →On-Demand Configuration to configure an on-demand delay measurement.

Equivalent CLI command: ethoam on-demand-dm

Result: The On-Demand DM Configuration window displays current settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the parameters as required. See “On-demand delay measurement parameters”

(p. 14-34). Click Submit to execute the command. Click Delete to delete the selected

on-demand DM session.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the �avigation menu, select ServiceOA&M → Delay Measurement →On-Demand Status command to retrieve the results of the measurement.

Equivalent CLI command: show ethoam on-demand-dm-stats.

On-demand delay measurement parameters




ethoam on-demand-dm md

<MDname>



ethoam on-demand-dm ma

<MAname>

Source MEPID MEPID of the MEP transmitting proactive DM. ethoam on-demand-dm

mep <sourceMEPID>

Priority The priority of the DMM frames carrying the DM

information,, and the Class of Service being measured.


ethoam on-demand-dm

priority <priority-

value>

Remote MEP MAC Address or MEPID of the remote MEP.

Valid values:

• MAC Address of the Remote MEP

• MEPID of the Remote MEP

• MC

ethoam on-demand-dm


<remoteMEPID> | mc}

DMM Frame

�umber

The number of DMM frames (delay measurements)

sent. The valid value in this release is 1.

ethoam on-demand-dm

nbr <meas-nbr>


measurement

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-34 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Start Time The time to start a measurement. The valid values: an

integer in the format of YYYYMMDDHHMMSS. The

Start Time must be later than the current time.

ethoam on-demand-dm

start-time <s-time>

Frame Size The size of the on-demand DM frame. Valid values: 0

or an integer in the range of 64 to 9216. This is an

optional field. 0 means a random frame size distributed

between 64 and the port’s configured mtu size.

ethoam on-demand-dm frame_

size <fs-value>


measurement

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-35

Procedure 14-3.9: OAM PM on-demand delay measurement

(DM) responder

Overview

Use this procedure to request the local MEP to respond to a remote Delay Measurement

session for a particular Class of Service with timestamps needed by the remote MEP. This

is independent of a local DM session for the same MEP and Class of Service.

Generally a responder is needed for a DM session initiated by a remote MEP when there

is not a local proactive DM session for the same MEP and priority. In that case,

configuring a responder allocates DM resources to this function.

Before you begin


• On-demand DM is available only when ethoam pm is enabled.

• On-demand DM can be configured on only one Up-MEP for a particular VID, MD

level, and priority, and on only one Down-MEP for a particular VID, MD level, and

priority and port (and only on a port which has ethoam pm enabled). You cannot

enable a DM responder on both an Up and Down MEP having the same VID, MD

level, and priority.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select Service OA&M → Loss Measurement →On-Demand DM Responder Configuration to configure on-demand delay

measurement responder.

Equivalent CLI command: ethoam on-demand-dm-responder. Refer to the

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide for

a complete description of this command and related parameters.

Result: The On-Demand DM Responder Configuration window displays current

settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the parameters as required. See “On-demand delay measurement responder

parameters” (p. 14-37). Click Submit to execute the command. Click Delete to delete

the responder.


measurement (DM) responder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-36 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

On-demand delay measurement responder parameters


MD �ame The MD name of the Responder for a remote

On-Demand DM session.

ethoam on-demand-dm-

responder md <MDname>

MA �ame The MA name of the Responder for a remote

On-Demand DM session. This is a drop-down list

containing all MAs in the above selected MD.


responder ma <MAname>

SourceMEPID /

Create

The MEP ID of the Responder for a remote On-Demand

DM session. This is a drop-down list containing all

MEPs in the above selected MD/MA.


responder mep

<sourceMEPID>

Priority The priority of the DMM frames carrying the LM




responder priority

<priority-value>


measurement (DM) responder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-37

Procedure 14-3.10: Enable AIS generation on a MEP

Overview

Use this procedure to activate AIS generation on a MEP.

When an impairment is detected, the MEP sends AIS frames (immediately and then at 1

minute intervals) at the client MD level in the forward direction so that downstream

MEPs that would also detect the fault can suppress their alarms.

AIS insertion may be enabled on any MEP except, in R6.0, on a port which has spanning

tree or ERP enabled. The insertion takes place into a configured client MD level, in the

direction opposite of other MEP OAM transmission.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the �avigation menu, select Service OA&M → Maintenance association End

Point → AIS Generation.

Equivalent CLI command: ethoam ais. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport

Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide for a complete description of this

command and related parameters.

Result: The AIS Generation Configuration window displays current settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the parameters as required. See “AIS generation parameters” (p. 14-38). Click

Submit to execute the command. Click Delete to remove the AIS Generation from the

selected MEP ID.

AIS generation parameters


MD �ame The MD name of the selected MEP ethoam ais md <MDname>

MA �ame The MA name of the selected MEP. This is a drop-down

list containing all MAs in the above selected MD.

ethoam ais ma <MAname>

SourceMEPID /

Create

The selected MEP ID. This is a drop-down list

containing all MEPs in the above selected MD/MA.

ethoam ais mep

<sourceMEPID>

Priority The priority of the AIS frames. Valid values: an integer

in the range of 0 to 7.

ethoam ais priority

<priority-value>

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3.10: Enable AIS generation on a MEP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14-38 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Client Level MD level for the generated AIS frames. Typically this is

the next highest configured MD level, except for a

Down-MEP on a customer port where it is typically a

configured Customer MD level. Valid values: an integer

in the range of 0 to 7.

ethoam ais level

<clientMDlevel>

Maint CVLA� The VLA� ID of a maintenance CVLA�. The valid

values: an integer in the range of 0 to 4094. The default

value is 0 which means the AIS frames are untagged.

This is an optional field.

ethoam ais mnt-vlan

<vid>

Service OA&M Procedure 14-3.10: Enable AIS generation on a MEP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


14-39

15 15Circuit emulation service

(CES)

Overview

Purpose

The circuit emulation service (CES) menu feature includes, but is not limited to:

• CES Mode Configuration

• PS� Tunnel

• BFD (Bidirectional Forwarding Detection)

• Pseudowire

• Protection Mode Configuration

This section covers requirements pertaining to the circuit emulation service feature.

Contents



Procedure 15-2: Configure circuit emulation service on VL�C60/61/62/64 15-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-1

Before you begin

Before you begin







Required equipment




Circuit emulation service (CES) Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-2 365-372-406R7.0



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 This is a place holder for circuit emulation service (CES) related Web GUI procedures to

be supplied at a later date.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-1: Place holder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-3

Procedure 15-2: Configure circuit emulation service on

VLNC60/61/62/64

Overview

Use the procedures in this section to provision circuit emulation service (CES) on the

VL�C60/VL�C61/VL�C62/VL�C64 (VL�C6x).

The VL�C6x supports the following modes for Circuit Emulation Service, (CES):

• ethernet — In ethernet mode, the circuit pack supports Circuit Emulation

Service based on Metro Ethernet Forum - 8 (MEF-8) specification.

• mpls-php-enable — In mpls-php-enable mode, the circuit pack supports

Circuit Emulation Service based on RFC 4553 where the Penultimate Hop Popping

mode (PHP) is enabled. In this mode, the RFC 4553 encapsulated packets carry only

the Pseudowire header at the MPLS layer.

• mpls-php-disable — In mpls-php-disable mode, the circuit pack supports

Circuit Emulation Service based on RFC 4553 where the Penultimate Hop Popping

mode is disabled. In this mode, the RFC 4553 encapsulated packets carry both the

PS� Tunnel header and the Pseudowire header at the MPLS layer.

The procedures in this section cover the following configurations:

• Remote VL�C60/61/62 to Hub VL�C60/61/62.

• Remote VL�C60/61/62 to Hub VL�C64.

• Remote VL�C60/61/62 to two Hub VL�C64s.

A Remote site VL�C60/61/62 can be configured completely independent of a Hub site

VL�C6x.

Refer to Figure 15-1, “Circuit emulation service sample network (VL�C60s)” (p. 15-8)

and Figure 15-2, “Circuit emulation service sample network (VL�C60/61/62/64)”

(p. 15-8).

It is assumed the circuit packs have been installed and the interface mode has been set.

The interface-mode {t1 | e1} command configures the pack’s T1/E1 mode, and

SO�ET/SDH mode on the VL�C64. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service

Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide, for help on using CLI commands.



(ALU 1850TSS-5-xx), for the circuit pack you are logged into may appear or the


Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-2: Configure circuit emulation service on

VLNC60/61/62/64

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-4 365-372-406R7.0


Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Login to the VL�C6x being provisioned.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................




mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Configure VL�C6x circuit emulation mode. From the Global Config mode, enter

ces-mode {ethernet | mpls-php-enable | mpls-php-disable} to set the

CES mode. Default is mpls-php-disable.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config)# ces-mode mpls-php-enable.

If you change the mode from Ethernet to MPLS (MPLS PHP disable or MPLS PHP

enable) and vice versa, the system resets after clearing the configuration. If you

change the mode from MPLS PHP disable to MPLS PHP enable and vice versa, the

system resets, but without clearing the configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If required, set the differential timestamp frequency for the system. From the Global

Config mode, enter

system-differential-timestamp-frequency {77.76 | 25}.

The values are specified in MHz. Default is 77.76 MHz.

You must ensure that the system at the other endpoint of the Circuit Emulation Service

has the same timestamp frequency that you set on this system.

On VL�C64 circuit packs, series S1:2 or later circuit packs are required to support the 25

MHz frequency.

Configuring this parameter will reset the circuit pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Configure VL�C64 OC3/STM1 interfaces, if required.


VLNC60/61/62/64

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-5

Reference: Procedure 15-2.1: “Configure VL�C64 OC3/STM1 interfaces” (p. 15-9)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Configure T1/E1 and Ethernet interfaces.

Reference: Procedure 15-2.2: “Configure T1/E1 and Ethernet interfaces” (p. 15-10)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Configure IP addresses and routes, if required. �ot required if ces-mode is set to

“ethernet”.

MEF-8 (ces-mode ethernet) is supported only on Ethernet switching networks. Therefore,

only a system level IP address is required (CLI commands: network parms, serviceport.)

Reference: Procedure 15-2.3: “Configure IP addresses and routes” (p. 15-13)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 If required, configure VLA�s on which the Ethernet interface participates. The VLA�s

created will be used later in configuring the PS� Tunnel.

Reference: Procedure 15-2.4: “Configure VLA�s for Ethernet interface” (p. 15-15).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Configure Timing.

Reference: Procedure 15-2.5: “Configure timing for VL�C6x Circuit Emulation

Service (CES)” (p. 15-17)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Configure Tunnel 1 (Remote to Hub) and Tunnel 2 (Hub to Remote) incoming/outgoing

parameters.

Tunnel 1 outgoing parameters at Remote and Tunnel 1 incoming parameters at Hub.

Tunnel 2 outgoing parameters at Hub and Tunnel 2 incoming parameters at Remote.

If ces-mode is mpls-php-enable or mpls-php-disable,

• Destination for Tunnel 1 is configured to be “Pack IP address” of Hub. �ext hop for

Tunnel 1 is configured to be “Interface IP address” of Hub.

• Destination for Tunnel 2 is configured to be “Pack IP address” of Remote. �ext hop

for Tunnel 2 is configured to be interface IP address of Remote.

If ces-mode is Ethernet,

• Destination for Tunnel 1 is configured to be “System MAC address” of Hub. �ext

hop for Tunnel 1 is configured to be “Interface IP address” of Hub.

The System MAC address can be retrieved using the show network command.

• Destination for Tunnel 2 is configured to be “System MAC address” of Remote. �ext

hop for Tunnel 2 is configured to be interface IP address of Remote.


VLNC60/61/62/64

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-6 365-372-406R7.0


Reference: Procedure 15-2.7: “Configure Tunnel parameters” (p. 15-30).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Configure pseudowire (PWE) name and parameters.

Reference: Procedure 15-2.8: “Configure pseudowire (PWE)” (p. 15-35)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Connect the Pseudowire and the underlying PS� Tunnels in the incoming and outgoing

directions. The PS� Tunnels must already be configured (Step 10) on the circuit pack on

the same physical interface. �ote that outgoing-tunnel-name/incoming-tunnel-name at

one end is incoming-tunnel-name/outgoing-tunnel-name at the other end.

From the Pseudowire Config Mode, enter

connect-psntunnel <outgoing-tunnel-name> <incoming-tunnel-name>

where:

• outgoing-tunnel-name - specifies the tunnel in the outgoing direction. Range is a 1 to

31 alphanumeric character string.

• incoming-tunnel-name - specifies the tunnel in the incoming direction. Range is a 1 to


Example: (ALU Switching) (Config-tdmpwe1)#

connect-psntunnel Tunnel1 Tunnel2.

When the PWE to PS� Tunnel association must be changed, you must explicitly

remove the existing association with the no connect form of the command, and create

new associations using the connect form of the command.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Attach T1 interface to Pseudowire (PWE). This command associates a Pseudowire to an

interface. Once this association is done, the traffic on the interface is emulated through the

Pseudowire.

Important! Once an association is created it cannot be modified or removed. The

Pseudowire must be deleted and recreated.


connect-interface <interface-number> where interface-number is a T1/E1 port

on the VL�C6x.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config-tdmpwe1)# connect-interface a-1-1 or

connect-interface m1-1-1-1-1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 From the Pseudowire Config Mode, enter no shutdown to enable the Pseudowire

(PWE).


VLNC60/61/62/64

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-7

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config-tdmpwe1)# no shutdown.

Figure 15-1 Circuit emulation service sample network (VLNC60s)

Remote

VLNC60

Hub

VLNC60

TDMSource

T1/E1 T1/E1

EATN

Tunnel 1

Tunnel 2

Remote to Hub

Hub to Remote

Ethernet Ethernet

T1/E1 interface

Ethernet interface

VLNC60_CES

Figure 15-2 Circuit emulation service sample network (VLNC60/61/62/64)

Remote

VLNC60

Hub

VLNC64

TDMSource

T1/E1 DS1/E1

EATN

Tunnel 1

Tunnel 2

Remote to Hub

Hub to Remote

Ethernet Ethernet

T1/E1 interface

Ethernet interface

Channelized OC3/STM1 (DS1/E1>VT1.5/VC12>OC3/STM1)

VLNC64_CES


VLNC60/61/62/64

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-8 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 15-2.1: Configure VLNC64 OC3/STM1 interfaces

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the VL�C64 OC3/STM1 interfaces used for circuit

emulation service.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Login to the VL�C64.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................




mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Interface Config Mode where “interface-number” is a number in the range of

main-{1-2}-{1} for the port you are provisioning.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config)# interface main-2-1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Specify a description for the interface.

From the Interface Config Mode, enter interface <description> where description

is in a range of 1-32 alphanumeric character string.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface main-2-1 HubSiteSlot1Port1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter exit to return to the Global Config Mode.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-2.1: Configure VLNC64 OC3/STM1 interfaces

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-9

Procedure 15-2.2: Configure T1/E1 and Ethernet interfaces

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the T1/E1 and Ethernet interfaces used for circuit

emulation service.

This procedure assumes that the VL�C6x has been previously installed.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................




mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Configure T1/E1 interface.

From the Global Config mode, enter interface <interface-number>, to enter the

Interface Config Mode where “interface-number” is the address for the T1/E1 port you

are provisioning.

On the VL�C60/61/62, a T1/E1 port is addressed by "T1-Port"/"E1-Port" respectively.

On the VL�C64, T1/E1 ports are addressed by "VTDS1-Port"/"VCE1-Port" respectively.



Example: (ALU Switching)(Config)# interface a-1-1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Specify a description for the T1/E1 interface.

From the Interface Config Mode, enter description <description> where

“description” is in a range of a 1-32 alphanumeric character string.

Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-2.2: Configure T1/E1 and Ethernet

interfaces

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-10 365-372-406R7.0


Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)#

description RemoteSiteSlot1Port1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Interface Config Mode, enter the following commands one at a time:

• signalformat {sf | esf | uf} — (T1 only) Used to set the signal format of

the T1 interface. The supported formats are: Super Frame (SF), Extended Super

Frame (ESF), and Unframed, (UF). Default is esf for T1 port.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# signalformat esf.

• signalformat {fas | crc4} — (E1 only) Used to set the signal format of the

E1 interface. The supported formats are: Frame Alignment Signal (FAS), and Cyclic

Redundancy Check-4 multiframe alignment (CRC4). Default is crc4 for E1 port.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# signalformat fas.

• linecode {b8zs | ami} — (VL�C60/61/62 T1 only) Sets the linecode value on

the T1 interface. These are Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI), and Bipolar 8 Zero

Substitution (B8ZS). Default is b8zs for T1 port.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# linecode b8zs.

• linebuildout {short} {{0-110 | 110-220 | 220-330 | 330-440 |

440-550 | 550-660} — (VL�C60/61/62 T1 only) Specifies the length of the

cable in feet that connects to the T1 interface on the other end of the VL�C60/61/62

T1 interface.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# linebuildout short 110-220.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If required at this time, specify the type of service associated with the T1/E1 interface.

From the Interface Config Mode, enter encapsulation {ppp | satop}.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# encapsulation satop.

Enter exit to exit the Interface Config Mode.

Important! If you are going to later provision “differential” as the timing source for

this interface using (Procedure 15-2.5: “Configure timing for VL�C6x Circuit

Emulation Service (CES)” (p. 15-17)) :

• Encapsulation may not be set to ppp.

• If you configure encapsulation now, you will have to remove the encapsulation

before you can configure the timing source to differential, then reconfigure

encapsulation.

• Alternatively, you can wait to configure encapsulation until after you have

provisioned the timing source.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Configure Ethernet interface.


interfaces

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-11



d{1-2}-{1-2} for the Ethernet port you are provisioning.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Specify a description for the Ethernet interface.



Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface d1-1)# RemoteSiteSlot1Port1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 If required, from the Interface Config Mode, enter auto-negotiate to enable

auto-negotiation. Default is disabled, except for 1000BASE-T ports which are always

enabled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Enable the Ethernet interface.


Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface d1-1)# no shutdown

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


interfaces

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-12 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 15-2.3: Configure IP addresses and routes

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the circuit pack IP address, interface IP address, and IP

routes used for circuit emulation service.

This procedure assumes that the VL�C6x has been previously installed.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Configure network port (circuit pack) IP addresses. This command sets the IP address, the

netmask and the gateway of the network port. The network port is an internal port used

for in-band management access. The network port is accessible via any of the faceplate

and/or backplane Ethernet ports. The IP Address and gateway must be on the same

subnet.

From the Privileged EXEC mode, enter

network parms <ipaddr> <netmask> [<gateway>], where:

• ipaddr - IP Address of the network port. Range: IPv4 Address Range.

• netmask - Subnet Mask of the Address. Range: 0-255.0-255.0-255.0-255.

• gateway (optional) - IP Address of the Gateway. Range: IPv4 Address Range..

Example: (ALU Switching) # network parms 152.148.2.2 255.255.255.0.


serviceport. The serviceport (see serviceport ip command) and network port must be on

different subnets.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enable global IP routing. From the Privileged EXEC prompt, enter ip routing.

Example: (ALU Switching) # ip routing.

Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-2.3: Configure IP addresses and routes

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Privileged EXEC prompt, enter configure to enter the Global Config mode.





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enable routing on the Ethernet interface. From the Interface Config Mode, enter

routing.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface d1-1) # routing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Specify the IP address of the Ethernet interface.

From the Interface Config Mode, enter ip address <ip-address> <mask>, where:

• ipaddr - IP Address of the interface port. Range: IPv4 Address Range.

• netmask - Subnet Mask of the Address. Range: 0-255.0-255.0-255.0-255.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface d1-1)#

ip address 1.1.1.20 255.255.255.0

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Enter exit to exit the Interface Config Mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Configure IP static routes.

From the Global Config mode, enter

ip route <destination ip address> <mask> <nexthop ip address>

where:

• destination ip address - destination IP address of Hub/Remote

• mask - subnet mask address of Hub/Remote

• nexthop ip address - nexthop to Hub/Remote

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config)#

ip route 152.148.1.1 255.255.255.0 1.1.1.10 .

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-2.3: Configure IP addresses and routes

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-14 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 15-2.4: Configure VLANs for Ethernet interface

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the VLA�s in which the Ethernet interface participates.

VLA�s to be configured are:

• VLA� for PS� tunnel as specified in command service-vlan when configuring

the PS� tunnel.

• VLA� for 1588 traffic as specified in command ptp-1588 vlan when configuring

the timing source.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 If required, login to the VL�C6x.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result: The Privileged EXEC prompt [(ALU switching)#] displays.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


mode.

Example: (ALU Switching)# vlan database.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the VLA� Config mode, enter vlan <vlanid> where vlanid is a value in the

range of 2-3965.

Example: (ALU Switching) (VLA�)# vlan 10

Enter exit to return to the Privileged EXEC mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Privileged EXEC mode, enter config to enter the Global Config Mode.

Example: (ALU Switching)# config.

Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-2.4: Configure VLANs for Ethernet interface

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-15

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 From the Interface Config Mode, enter vlan participation include <vlanid>

where:

• include - The interface is always a member of this VLA�.

• vlanid - VLA� identification number. Range: 1-3965.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface d1-1)# vlan participation include 10.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Configure the tagging behavior for the specific interface in a VLA� to enabled. If tagging

is enabled, traffic is transmitted as tagged frames. If tagging is disabled, traffic is

transmitted as untagged frames.

From the Interface Config Mode, enter vlan tagging <vlanid> where vlanid is the

same as specified in the vlan participation command in the previous step.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface d1-1)# vlan tagging 10.

Enter exit to exit the Interface Config Mode.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-2.4: Configure VLANs for Ethernet interface

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-16 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 15-2.5: Configure timing for VLNC6x Circuit

Emulation Service (CES)

Overview

Use this procedure to configure timing for the VL�C6x providing CES.

The system-timing-source

{bits [alternate-source-line]| ptp-1588 | free-running | line |

ge | backplane} command is used to specify a common timing source for all the

devices on the VL�C6x where:

• bits — Building Integrated Timing Supply This is a timing supply traceable to a

common Primary Reference Clock in the network. The shelf has a special T1/E1 input

interface associated with each main slot for receiving this timing.

• alternate-source-line — On the VL�C64, when the System Timing is BITS, an

alternate source of timing (Line) can be specified, which derives timing from the

OC3/STM1 interface on the pack. Specifying an alternate source for System Timing is

optional.

• ptp-1588 — Precision Timing Protocol-1588. This option specifies IEEE 1588 version

2, as a choice to drive the system timing. This is useful for remote locations where no

high-quality reference clock signal is available.


end-point time-alignment time precision measured in nanoseconds. The protocol is


communicate using a network. The protocol uses a master/slave relationship to

distribute timestamps from one device to the others.

• free-running — This option specifies that the System clock is in free-running mode.

This option is recommended to be used only on the VL�C60/61. The clock is derived

from a local SO�ET Stratum3 or SDH Type III (±4.6 ppm) oscillator in the

VL�C60/61.

This option is recommended to be used only when all T1/E1 interfaces offer MLPPP

service. By default, VL�C60/61 circuit packs have their System Timing source set as

Free Running.

• line — (VL�C64 circuit pack only). This option specifies that the System clock is

derived from the optical line (OC3/STM1 interface) on the VL�C64 pack.

• ge — This option specifies that the System clock is derived from SFP based GE

(Ethernet interface). This is also known as the SyncE Line timing.

• backplane — This option specifies that the System clock is derived from the

backplane 25 Mhz reference. In this mode timing is derived from the adjacent circuit

pack. This is also known as the Backplane timing.

Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-2.5: Configure timing for VLNC6x Circuit


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-17

The timing-source {system | loop | differential} command specifies the

timing source for the T1/E1 interfaces, where:

• system — The source of timing is derived from system timing configured using the

system-timing-source command.

• loop — The clocking information recovered from the received signal of the T1/E1

interface is used to drive the transmit side of the same T1/E1 interface.

• differential — The clock is recovered from the real time protocol (RTP) differential

timestamps on the incoming Pseudowire packet for the T1/E1. The reference timing

for recovery of this clock is System.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 If ... Then ...

�etwork timing distribution for CES is using

BITS at both Hub and Remote,

continue with Step 2.

�etwork timing distribution for CES is using

IEEE 1588v2,

go to Step 6.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 �etwork Timing Distribution for CES using BITS at both ends. See Figure 15-3,

“�etwork timing distribution for CES using BITS (VL�C60/61/62s)” (p. 15-21) and

Figure 15-4, “�etwork timing distribution for CES using BITS (VL�C6x)” (p. 15-21) for

reference.

Configure BITS Line Interface Unit (LIU) external timing reference (ref-1 or ref-2) at

both Remote and Hub ends. The interface <interface-number> command is used

to configure the BITS input. “Interface-number” is either ref-1 or ref-2 corresponding to

the BITS input for the Main slot equipped with the VL�C6x.

From the Global Config Mode at both the Remote end and Hub end, enter

interface ref-1 or ref-2 to enter the Interface Config Mode.

From the Interface Config Mode, enter the following commands one at a time:

• description <description> — Specifies a description for the interface where


Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface ref-2)# description bitsRef2.

• signalformat {sf | esf} (T1 only) — Used to set the signal format of the T1

interface. The supported formats are: Super Frame (SF) and Extended Super Frame

(ESF). Default is sf for BITS-LIU.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface ref-2)# signalformat esf.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-18 365-372-406R7.0


• signalformat {fas | crc4} (E1 only) — Used to set the signal format of the


Redundancy Check-4 multiframe alignment (CRC4). Default is crc4 for BITS-LIU.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface ref-2)# signalformat fas.

• linecode {b8zs | ami} (T1 only) — Sets the linecode value on the T1 interface.

These are Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI), and Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS).

Default is ami for BITS-LIU.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface ref-2)# linecode b8zs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 This command assumes that both the Remote end and Hub end have direct access to the

Primary Reference Source (PRS) or BITS.

Configure system timing source. The system-timing-source



devices on the VL�C6x.


system-timing-source bits.

If required, at a VL�C64 Hub end, enter an alternate-source of line.

Example (VL�C64 only): (ALU 1850TSS-5) (Config)#

system-timing-source bits alternate-source line

Reference: Procedure 8-1: “Configure system timing for circuit pack” (p. 8-3)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Configure Remote end T1/E1 interface Timing source. The timing-source

{system | loop | differential} command specifies the timing source for the

VL�C60/61/62 T1/E1 interfaces.

From the Global Config mode, enter interface <interface-number> to enter the

Interface T1/E1 Config Mode. The interface-number specifies the specific T1/E1 interface

on the VL�C60/61/62. This command changes the context to the Interface Config Mode

and all subsequent configuration in this mode will be applicable to the interface identified

by the interface-number.





If encapsulation has been configured on this interface and you are going to provision

“differential” as the timing source for this interface, you must first remove encapsulation

using no encapsulation {ppp | satop}.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-19

From the Interface Config Mode at the Remote end, enter

timing-source differential.

If encapsulation has not been provisioned or was removed, enter

encapsulation {ppp | satop}.

Reference: Procedure 8-3: “Configure interface timing for DS1/E1 ports” (p. 8-15)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Configure Hub end T1/E1 interface Timing source. The timing-source


T1/E1 interfaces.


Interface Config Mode. The interface-number is the specific interface on the VL�C6x.

This command changes the context to the Interface Config Mode and all subsequent

configuration in this mode will be applicable to the interface identified by the

interface-number.








From the Interface Config Mode at the Hub end, enter timing-source loop for

applications where there is one timing source traceable to a common reference clock for

the entire network. Enter timing-source differential for applications where the

timing source in each direction (Hub to Remote, Remote to Hub) can be asynchronous to

each other. For example: (ALU Switching) (Interface m2-1-1-1-1)#

timing-source loop (VL�C64), or (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)#

timing-source loop (VL�C60/61/62).

For the VL�C64 at the Hub end, configure the differential timing domain for the T1/E1

interface. This command specifies the differential timing domain being used to generate

and recover the differential timestamps on the VL�C64. From the Interface Config Mode

at the Hub end VL�C64, enter differential-timing-domain <domain-value>

where domain-value is in the range 1-28. For example: (ALU Switching) (Interface

m2-1-1-1-1)# differential-timing-domain 1.





...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-20 365-372-406R7.0


Figure 15-3 Network timing distribution for CES using BITS (VLNC60/61/62s)

Remote

VLNC60

Hub

VLNC60

TDMSource

T1/E1 T1/E1

EATN

Tunnel 1

Tunnel 2

Remote to Hub

Hub to Remote

Ethernet Ethernet

PRS

VLNC60 system-timing-source bitsT1/E1 interface “b” timing-source differentialT1/E1 interface “a” loop times from T1/E1 interface “b”

a b

VLNC60 system-timing-source bitsT1/E1 interface “g” timing-source loop or differential

g h

T1/E1 interface

Ethernet interface

CES_Timing_BITS

Figure 15-4 Network timing distribution for CES using BITS (VLNC6x)

Remote

VLNC60

Hub

VLNC64

TDMSource

T1/E1DS1/E1

EATN

Tunnel 1

Tunnel 2

Remote to Hub

Hub to Remote

Ethernet Ethernet

PRS

VLNC60 system-timing-source bitsT1/E1 interface “b” timing-source differentialT1/E1 interface “a” loop times from T1/E1 interface “b”

a b

VLNC64 system-timing-source bits (alternate-source Line)OC3/STM1interface “e” timing-source systemT1/E1 interface “g” timing-source loop or differential

differential-timing-domain <value>T1/E1 interface “g”

g h

e

T1/E1 interface

Ethernet interface


CES_Timing_BITS_64



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-21


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Configure timing distribution using IEEE 1588v2. See Figure 15-5, “�etwork timing

distribution for CES using ptp-1588 (VL�C60/61/62)” (p. 15-24) and Figure 15-6,

“�etwork timing distribution for CES using ptp-1588 (VL�C6x)” (p. 15-25) for

reference.

Configure BITS Line Interface Unit (LIU) external timing reference (ref-1 or ref-2) at the

Hub ends. The interface <interface-number> command is used to configure the

BITS input. “Interface-number” is either ref-1 or ref-2 corresponding to the BITS input

for the Main slot equipped with the VL�C6x.

From the Global Config Mode at the Hub end, enter interface ref-1 or ref-2 to

enter the Interface Config Mode.

From the Interface Config Mode, enter the following commands one at a time:

• description <description> — Specifies a description for the interface where


Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface ref-2)# description bitsRef2.

• signalformat {sf | esf} (T1 only) — Used to set the signal format of the T1

interface. The supported formats are: Super Frame (SF) and Extended Super Frame

(ESF). Default is sf for BITS-LIU.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface ref-2)# signalformat esf.

• signalformat {fas | crc4} (E1 only) — Used to set the signal format of the


Redundancy Check-4 multiframe alignment (CRC4). Default is crc4 for BITS-LIU.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface ref-2)# signalformat fas.

• linecode {b8zs | ami} (T1 only) — Sets the linecode value on the T1 interface.


Default is ami for BITS-LIU.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface ref-2)# linecode b8zs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Configure system timing source. The system-timing-source



devices on the VL�C6x.

From the Global Config Mode at the Hub end, enter system-timing-source bits. If

required, at a VL�C64 Hub end, enter an alternate-source of line.

From the Global Config Mode at the Remote end, enter

system-timing-source ptp-1588.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-22 365-372-406R7.0



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Configure ptp-1588 parameters.

Reference: Procedure 15-2.6: “Configure Precision Timing Protocol - 1588ver2

parameters” (p. 15-27)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Configure Remote end T1/E1 interface Timing source. The timing-source


T1/E1 interfaces.



on the VL�C60/61/62. This command changes the context to the Interface Config Mode

and all subsequent configuration in this mode will be applicable to the interface identified

by the interface-number.








From the Interface Config Mode at the Remote end, enter

timing-source differential.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Configure Hub end T1/E1 interface Timing source. The timing-source


T1/E1 interfaces.


Interface Config Mode. The interface-number is the specific interface on the VL�C6x.

This command changes the context to the Interface Config Mode and all subsequent

configuration in this mode will be applicable to the interface identified by the

interface-number.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-23








From the Interface Config Mode at the Hub end, enter timing-source loop for

applications where there is one timing source traceable to a common reference clock for

the entire network. Enter timing-source differential for applications where the

timing source in each direction (Hub to Remote, Remote to Hub) can be asynchronous to

each other. For example: (ALU Switching) (Interface m2-1-1-1-1)#

timing-source loop (VL�C64), or (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)#

timing-source loop (VL�C60/61/62).

For the VL�C64 at the Hub end, configure the differential timing domain for the T1/E1

interface. This command specifies the differential timing domain being used to generate

and recover the differential timestamps on the VL�C64. From the Interface Config Mode

at the Hub end VL�C64, enter differential-timing-domain <domain-value>

where domain-value is in the range 1-28. For example: (ALU Switching) (Interface

m2-1-1-1-1)# differential-timing-domain 1.



Figure 15-5 Network timing distribution for CES using ptp-1588 (VLNC60/61/62)

Remote

VLNC60

Hub

VLNC60

TDMSource

T1/E1 T1/E1

EATN

Tunnel 1

Tunnel 2

Remote to Hub

Hub to Remote

Ethernet Ethernet

PRS

VLNC60 system-timing-source ptp-1588T1/E1 interface “b” timing-source differentialptp-1588 mode slave

T1/E1 interface “a” loop times from T1/E1 interface “b”

a b

VLNC60 system-timing-source bitsT1/E1 interface “g” timing-source loop or differentialptp-1588 mode master

g h

CES_Timing_1588



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-24 365-372-406R7.0


Figure 15-6 Network timing distribution for CES using ptp-1588 (VLNC6x)

Remote

VLNC60

Hub

VLNC64

TDMSource

T1/E1 DS1/E1

EATN

Tunnel 1

Tunnel 2

Remote to Hub

Hub to Remote

Ethernet Ethernet

PRS

VLNC60 system-timing-source ptp-1588T1/E1 interface “b” timing-source differentialptp-1588 mode slave

T1/E1 interface “a” loop times from T1/E1 interface “b”

a b

VLNC64 system-timing-source bits

T1/E1 interface “g” timing-source loop or differentialdifferential-timing-domain <value>

ptp-1588 mode master

(alternate-source Line)OC3/STM1interface “e” timing-source system

T1/E1 interface “g”

g h

e

T1/E1 interface

Ethernet interface

Channelized OC3/STM1 (DS1/E1>VT1.5/VC12>OC3/STM1)CES_Timing_1588_64



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-25


E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 15-7 Network timing distribution for CES using ptp-1588 with two masters

Remote

VLNC60

Hub

VLNC64-a

TDMSource

T1/E1

T1/E1

EATNPRS

VLNC60 system-timing-source ptp-1588T1/E1 interfaces “b” and “j” timing-source differentialptp-1588 mode slave

Master source elected using priority, clock class

T1/E1 interface “a” and “i” loop timesfrom T1/E1 interface “b” and “j”

a

i

b

j

VLNC64s system-timing-source bits, m

T1/E1 interfaces “f, n” timing-source loop or differential

VLNC64-a: ptp-1588 mode master, priority 1b 2

(alternate-source Line)OC3/STM1interface “e ” timing-source system

T1/E1 interfaces “f, n” differential-timing-domain <value>

VLNC64- : ptp-1588 mode master, priority

f

n

g

h

o

e

m p

T1/E1 Interfaces a, b, i, j, f, g, n, o

OC3/STM1 Interfaces e, m, h, pPRS - Primary Reference Source (BITS)

1588 Master 1

1588 Master 2

1588 Slave

c

kVLNC64-b

Ethernet Interfaces c, k, d, l

d

l

CES2_Timing_1588_64



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-26 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 15-2.6: Configure Precision Timing Protocol -

1588ver2 parameters

Overview

Use this procedure to configure Precision Timing Protocol (ptp) 1588ver2 parameters, if

required.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 This command enables or disables the IEEE 1588 Precision Timing Protocol on the

system.

This protocol must be enabled on the system if clock synchronization across the network

is required for circuit emulation or if the application requires access to a high quality

clock, and one is not physically available.


ptp-1588-protocol.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Configure the specified ptp-1588 mode, master or slave, on the system.. The

ptp-1588 mode {master | slave} command specifies the mode. The master mode

must be enabled on the system that has access to a high-precision clock. The 1588

component derives timing from the system clock that is configured in "timing-source

system" command. The slave mode should be used on a remote system that does not have

access to high-precision clock source.

From the Global Config Mode at the Hub end, enter ptp-1588 mode master.

From the Global Config Mode at the Remote end, enter ptp-1588 mode slave.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The primary and backup ports for 1588 must be configured to participate in the vlanid

specified in the command. This was configured earlier using the command vlan

participation. When this command is not specified, 1588 traffic is sent untagged.

Specify the VLA� id over which the 1588 protocol packets are transmitted.

From the Global Config Mode at both the Remote and Hub end, enter

ptp-1588 vlan <vlan id>, where vlan-id is in the range 1-3965.

Example: ptp-1588 vlan 10.

Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-2.6: Configure Precision Timing Protocol -

1588ver2 parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-27

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Specify the port(s) over which 1588 protocol packets are transmitted and received. There

are 2 ports specified for the 1588 packet transmission/reception. These are the Primary

and Backup ports. When the primary port fails, the packets are transmitted/ received on

the Backup port. When the Primary port recovers after a failure, the 1588 protocol

packets transmission/reception is not reverted to the Primary port.

From the Global Config Mode at both the Remote and Hub end, enter

ptp-1588 port primary <primary port> backup <backup port> where

primary-port is the initial port used to send/receive 1588 packets and the backup port

is the backup to send/receive packets. The ports are Ethernet ports in the range

d{1-2}-{1-2}.

Example: ptp-1588 port primary d1-1 backup d1-1.

Important! This is a mandatory parameter. It must be configured in both directions

for the 1588 protocol messages to be exchanged. The primary-port and backup-port

may be the same port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Important! Use this command only if two 1588 Masters are deployed at the Hub end.

Use this command only on a system which runs the 1588 protocol in Master mode.

Use this command to specify the Priority1 or Priority2 parameter of the 1588 protocol. It

is used only in the Master mode while sending the 1588 protocol messages. Change the

default only if two 1588 Masters are deployed.

From the Global Config Mode at one of the Hub end nodes, enter

ptp-1588 priority1 <priority> where priority is in the range of 0-255,

default 255.

From the Global Config Mode at the other Hub end node, enter

ptp-1588 priority2 <priority> where priority is in the range of 0-255,

default 255.

Example: ptp-1588 priority1 200.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 The following is a list of optional commands that may be performed at the Hub end. For

more information on these commands, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service

Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide.

• ptp-1588 domain <domain-number> — Specifies the PTP domain value of the

1588 protocol.

Example: ptp-1588 domain 1

• ptp-1588 log-mean-sync-interval <mean-sync-interval-value> —

Specifies the log-mean-sync-interval parameter of the 1588 protocol.

Example: ptp-1588 log-mean-sync-interval 0


1588ver2 parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-28 365-372-406R7.0


• ptp-1588 log-mean-announce-interval <interval> — Specifies the

log-mean-announce-interval parameter of the 1588 protocol.

Example: ptp-1588 log-mean-announce-interval 1.

• ptp-1588 multicast <MAC-address> — Specifies the Multicast MAC address

on which to send the 1588 protocol messages.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 The following is a list of optional commands that may be performed at the Remote end.

For more information on these commands, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport

Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide.

• ptp-1588 log-min-mean-delay-req-interval <interval> — Specifies

the log-min-mean-delay-req-interval parameter of the 1588 protocol.

Example: ptp-1588 log-min-mean-delay-req-interval 5

• ptp-1588 log-mean-announce-interval <interval> — Specifies the

log-mean-announce-interval parameter of the 1588 protocol.

Example: ptp-1588 log-mean-announce-interval 1

• ptp-1588 announce-receipt-timeout <timeout-value> — Specifies the

announce-receipt-timeout parameter of the 1588 protocol.

Example: ptp-1588 announce-receipt-timeout 2.

• ptp-1588 multicast <MAC-address> — Specifies the Multicast MAC address

on which to listen for the 1588 protocol messages.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


1588ver2 parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-29

Procedure 15-2.7: Configure Tunnel parameters

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the incoming and outgoing parameters for Tunnels being

provisioned at Remote and Hub ends.

This procedure only illustrates the provisioning of two tunnels. If more than two tunnels

are required, use the same procedure for the other tunnels.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................



2. From the Privileged EXEC prompt, enter config to enter the Global Config mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Configure Tunnel 1 – outgoing parameters at Remote end and Tunnel 1 incoming

parameters at Hub end.

At both Remote or Hub, from the Global Config Mode, enter psntunnel <name>

command to enter the PS� Tunnel Config Mode. Parameter <name> is a 1 to 31

alphanumeric character string which creates the tunnel name if not already existing.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config)# psntunnel Tunnel1

Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-2.7: Configure Tunnel parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-30 365-372-406R7.0


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 At Tunnel1 Hub end, from the PS� Tunnel Config Mode,

• If CES mode is “MPLS PHP enable” or “ethernet” — Enter

insegment [incoming-interface <in-interface], where in-interface

specifies the incoming Ethernet interface through which the PS� Tunnel’s packets can

be received.

For example, (ALU Switching) (Config-Tunnel1)#

insegment incoming-interface d1-1.

• If CES mode is “MPLS PHP disable” — Enter

insegment inlabel <label> [incoming-interface <in-interface],

where in-interface specifies the incoming Ethernet interface through which the

PS� Tunnel’s packets can be received and label specifies the incoming label of the

PS� Tunnel (Range: 16-1048575).


insegment in-label 300 incoming-interface d2-1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 At Tunnel1 Remote end, from the PS� Tunnel Config Mode,

• If CES mode is “MPLS PHP enable”,

Enter

outsegment destination <dst-addr> nexthop <nexthop-addr>

[outgoing-interface <out-interface>] where:

– dst-addr specifies the IP address of the destination node of the PS� Tunnel.

– nexthop-addr specifies the next hop address of the PS� Tunnel.

– out-interface specifies the output Ethernet interface through which the PS�

Tunnel’s destination can be reached.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config-Tunnel1)#

outsegment destination 152.148.1.1 nexthop 1.1.1.10 outgoing-

interface d2-1.

• If CES mode is “MPLS PHP disable”,

Enter

outsegment destination <dst-addr> nexthop <nexthop-addr> out-

label <label> [outgoing-interface <out-interface>] where:



– label specifies the outgoing label of the PS� Tunnel, range 16-1048575.




outsegment destination 152.148.1.1 nexthop 1.1.1.10 out-label

200 outgoing-interface d2-1.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-31

• If CES mode is “ethernet”,

Enter

outsegment destination <MAC-addr> outgoing-interface <out-

interface> where:

– MAC-addr specifies the MAC address of the destination node of the PS� Tunnel.




outsegment destination 00:60:10:20:30:40 outgoing-interface

d2-1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 At both Remote or Hub, from the PS� Tunnel Config Mode enter no shutdown to

enable Tunnel 1.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config-Tunnel1)# no shutdown.

Enter exit to exit the PS� Tunnel Config Mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Configure Tunnel 2 – outgoing parameters at Hub end and Tunnel 2 incoming parameters

at Remote end.

At both Remote or Hub, from the Global Config Mode, enter psntunnel <name>

command to enter the PS� Tunnel Config Mode. Parameter <name> is a 1 to 31

alphanumeric character string which creates the tunnel name if not already existing.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config)# psntunnel Tunnel2.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 At Tunnel2 Remote end, from the PS� Tunnel Config Mode,

• If CES mode is “MPLS PHP enable” or “ethernet” — Enter

insegment [incoming-interface <in-interface], where in-interface

specifies the incoming Ethernet interface through which the PS� Tunnel’s packets can

be received.


insegment incoming-interface d1-1.

• If CES mode is “MPLS PHP disable” — Enter

insegment inlabel <label> [incoming-interface <in-interface],

where in-interface specifies the incoming Ethernet interface through which the

PS� Tunnel’s packets can be received and label specifies the incoming label of the

PS� Tunnel (Range: 16-1048575).


insegment in-label 300 incoming-interface d2-1.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-32 365-372-406R7.0


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 At Tunnel2 Hub end, from the PS� Tunnel Config Mode,

• If CES mode is “MPLS PHP enable”,

Enter

outsegment destination <dst-addr> nexthop <nexthop-addr>

[outgoing-interface <out-interface>] where:






outsegment destination 152.148.2.2 nexthop 1.1.1.20 outgoing-

interface d2-1.

• If CES mode is “MPLS PHP disable”,

Enter

outsegment destination <dst-addr> nexthop <nexthop-addr> out-

label <label> [outgoing-interface <out-interface>] where:



– label specifies the outgoing label of the PS� Tunnel, range 16-1048575.




outsegment destination 152.148.2.2 nexthop 1.1.1.20 out-label

200 outgoing-interface d2-1.

• If CES mode is “ethernet”,

Enter

outsegment destination <MAC-addr> outgoing-interface <out-

interface> where:

– MAC-addr specifies the MAC address of the destination node of the PS� Tunnel.




outsegment destination 00:60:1D:E8:08:50 outgoing-interface

d2-1.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-33

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 If required, specify the VLA� tag to append to the outgoing/incoming tunnels at both

ends. From the PS� Tunnel Config Mode, enter

service-vlan <vlan id> [pbit <pbit-value>] where vlan id is in the range

of 1-3965. The pbit-value specifies the VLA� priority for the Ethernet frame. The

highest priority is indicated by 7 (Range 0-7, default 7).

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config-Tunnel2)# service-vlan 10 p-bit 6.

The VLA� specified in this command was configured earlier using the command

vlan participation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 At both Remote or Hub, from the PS� Tunnel Config Mode enter no shutdown to

enable Tunnel 2.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config-Tunnel2)# no shutdown.

Enter exit to exit the PS� Tunnel Config Mode.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-34 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 15-2.8: Configure pseudowire (PWE)

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the pseudowire name and parameters.

A minimum set of parameters must be configured to enable the Pseudowire:

• outlabel using command outlabel <label-value>.

• inlabel using command inlabel <label-value>.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Global Config Mode, enter the pseudowire <name> command to enter the

Pseudowire Config Mode where <name> is a 1 to 31 alphanumeric character string which

creates the pseudowire name if not already existing.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config)# pseudowire tdmpwe1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Specify an inlabel and outlabel with which incoming and outgoing Ethernet frames for

this Pseudowire are identified. �ote that the inlabel/outlabel at one end is the

outlabel/inlabel at the other end.

• From the Pseudowire Config Mode, enter inlabel <label-value> where

label-value is a value in the range of 16-1048575.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config-tdmpwe1)# inlabel 20.

• From the Pseudowire Config Mode, enter outlabel <label-value> where

label-value is a value in the range of 16-1048575.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config-tdmpwe1)# outlabel 10.

Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-2.8: Configure pseudowire (PWE)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-35

The inlabel/outlabel label-value cannot be the same as any label-value used for

another Pseudowire on the same circuit pack. The label values 0-15 are reserved by

the IETF standard.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-2.8: Configure pseudowire (PWE)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-36 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 15-2.9: Configure circuit emulation service with

pseudowire protection

Overview

Use this procedure to configure pseudowire protection when ces-mode is set to

“mpls-php-enable” or “mpls-php-disable”.

When ces-mode is set to “ethernet”, no bfd related commands are supported. Also, the

protectionmode command used to enable UPSR/S�CP protection is not supported.

When ces-mode is set the “ethernet”, basic protection for PWEs is supported using the

psn-tunnel-protect command. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service

Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide, for help on using this command when

ces-mode is set to “ethernet”.

In addition to the general procedures used to configure circuit emulation service, other

procedures are required to configure CES with protection. See Figure 15-8, “Circuit

emulation service protection” (p. 15-43) and Figure 15-9, “Circuit emulation service

protection - UPSR/S�CP” (p. 15-44) for examples.

Configuring CES with protection consists of the following steps in addition to the general

CES configuration steps:

• Configuring two tunnels in the forward direction (for example, tunnels 1 and 3) and

two tunnels in the reverse direction (for example, tunnels 2 and 4).

• Associate forward and reverse tunnels as protection pairs.

• Configuring a pseudowire and associating it with a forward and reverse tunnel

(creating a tunnel aggregate), for example, tunnel 1 & 2.

• Configuring Bi-directional Forwarding Detection (BFD) on each Tunnel.

• Enabling protection mode on the Hub site if UPSR/S�CP protection is configured.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Circuit emulation service (CES) Procedure 15-2.9: Configure circuit emulation service

with pseudowire protection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-37




...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Configure VL�C6x circuit emulation mode. From the Global Config mode, enter

ces-mode {ethernet | mpls-php-enable | mpls-php-disable} to set the

CES mode. Default is mpls-php-disable.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config)# ces-mode mpls-php-enable.

If you change the mode from Ethernet to MPLS (MPLS PHP disable or MPLS PHP

enable) and vice versa, the system resets after clearing the configuration. If you

change the mode from MPLS PHP disable to MPLS PHP enable and vice versa, the

system resets, but without clearing the configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If required, set the differential timestamp frequency for the system. From the Global

Config mode, enter

system-differential-timestamp-frequency {77.76 | 25}.

The values are specified in MHz. Default is 77.76 MHz.

You must ensure that the system at the other endpoint of the Circuit Emulation Service

has the same timestamp frequency that you set on this system.

Configuring this parameter will reset the circuit pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Configure VL�C64 OC3/STM1 interfaces, as required.

Procedure 15-2.1: “Configure VL�C64 OC3/STM1 interfaces” (p. 15-9)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Configure T1/E1 and Ethernet interfaces at remote and hub ends.

Reference: Procedure 15-2.2: “Configure T1/E1 and Ethernet interfaces” (p. 15-10)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Configure IP addresses and routes, if required. �ot required if ces-mode is set to

“ethernet”.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-38 365-372-406R7.0


MEF-8 (ces-mode ethernet) is supported only on Ethernet switching networks. Therefore,

only a system level IP address is required (CLI commands: network parms, serviceport.)

Reference: Procedure 15-2.3: “Configure IP addresses and routes” (p. 15-13)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 If required, configure VLA�s on which the Ethernet interface(s) participates. The

VLA�s created will be used later in configuring the PS� tunnel.

Reference: Procedure 15-2.4: “Configure VLA�s for Ethernet interface” (p. 15-15).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Configure Timing.

Reference: Procedure 15-2.5: “Configure timing for VL�C6x Circuit Emulation

Service (CES)” (p. 15-17)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Configure Tunnel 1 and Tunnel 3 outgoing parameters at the Remote end, and Tunnel 1

and Tunnel 3 incoming parameters at Hub end.

Configure Tunnel 2 and Tunnel 4 incoming parameters at Remote end, and Tunnel 2 and

Tunnel 4 outgoing parameters at Hub end.

Reference: Procedure 15-2.7: “Configure Tunnel parameters” (p. 15-30)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Configure BFD sessions on all four of the tunnels.

From the Global Config mode, enter psntunnel <name>, where name is the name of

the tunnel you are configuring. For example: (ALU Switching) (Config)#

psntunnel Tunnel 1.


Interface Guide, and configure the following:

• udp <udp-port-id> — enables udp port configuration on outgoing PS� Tunnels.

Example: udp 49152.

• local-discriminator <local-discriminator-value> — enables the local

discriminator configuration. Example: local-discriminator 10.

• remote-discriminator <local-discriminator-value> — enables the

remote discriminator configuration. Example: remote-discriminator 20.

• min-rx-interval <rx-interval-value> — minimum interval, in

milliseconds, between received BFD Control packets. Example:

min-rx-interval 100.

• min-tx-interval <tx-interval-value> — minimum interval, in

milliseconds, between transmitted BFD Control packets. Example:

min-tx-interval 100.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-39

• multiplier <multiplier-value> — negotiated transmit interval, multiplied by

this value, provides the detection time for the transmitting pack in Asynchronous

mode. Example: multiplier 3

• bfd-flap-count <flap-count-value> — total number of flaps before the BFD

session enters dampening state. A flap is defined as a transition of the BFD session

from up to down state. Example: bfd-flap-count 15.

• bfd-flap-monitor-time <flap-monitor-time-value> — time interval (in

seconds) in which the flaps are detected for the BFD session. Example:

bfd-flap-monitor-time 15.

• bfd-max-dampening-time <max-dampening-time-value> — time interval

(in minutes) during which the BFD session will remain in dampening state. In the

dampening state, the pack will not monitor incoming BFD messages. This state

protects the pack from continuous transition between up and down state which could

be caused due to network events. Example: bfd-max-dampening-time 15.

Value 0 implies that the dampening mechanism is disabled for the session. 999

implies that once the BFD session enters dampening state it remains in it forever until

you explicitly enable the session.

From the PS� Tunnel Config Mode, enter bfd enable to enable BFD signalling on the

tunnel.

Repeat this step for all applicable tunnels.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Associate Tunnels 1 and 3, and Tunnels 2 and 4 as protection pairs.

From the Global Config mode, use the

psn-tunnel-protect <tunnel-name-1> <tunnel-name-2> command to specify

the protection pair.

For example: (ALU Switching) (Config)# psn-tunnel-protect Tunnel1 Tunnel3

or psn-tunnel-protect Tunnel2 Tunnel4

Tunnel-name-1 and tunnel-name-2 must be in the same direction, inbound or

outbound. The two Tunnels must be on two different interfaces. The command should

be run twice, for Tunnels in the inbound and outbound directions.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Configure pseudowire (PWE).

Reference: Procedure 15-2.8: “Configure pseudowire (PWE)” (p. 15-35)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Connect the Pseudowire with Tunnel1 and Tunnel2 in the outgoing and incoming

directions. The PS� Tunnels must already be configured on the circuit pack on the same

physical interface. �ote that outgoing-tunnel-name/incoming-tunnel-name at one end is

incoming-tunnel-name/outgoing-tunnel-name at the other end.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-40 365-372-406R7.0



connect-psntunnel <outgoing-tunnel-name> <incoming-tunnel-name>

where:

• outgoing-tunnel-name - specifies the tunnel in the outgoing direction. Range is a 1 to


• incoming-tunnel-name - specifies the tunnel in the incoming direction. Range is a 1 to


Example: (ALU Switching) (Config-tdmpwe1)#

connect-psntunnel Tunnel1 Tunnel2.

When the PWE to PS� Tunnel association must be changed, you must explicitly

remove the existing association with the no connect form of the command, and create

new associations using the connect form of the command.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Attach T1/E1 interface to Pseudowire (PWE). This command associates a Pseudowire to

an interface. Once this association is done, the traffic on the interface is emulated through

the Pseudowire.


connect-interface <interface-number> where interface-number is a T1/E1 port

on the VL�C6x circuit pack.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config-tdmpwe1)# connect-interface a-1-1 or

connect-interface m1-1-1-1-1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 From the Pseudowire Config Mode, enter no shutdown to enable the Pseudowire

(PWE).

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config-tdmpwe1)# no shutdown.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 For configurations using UPSR/S�CP protection, the protection mode at the Hub end

VL�C64s must be enabled.

From the Global Config mode, use the protectionmode {enable | disable}

command at both VL�C64 Hub nodes to enable protection.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config)# protectionmode enable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 For configurations on the VL�C64 using UPSR/S�CP protection, configure the PS�

Tunnel associated with the Pseudowire to be primary, secondary, or none.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-41


psntunnel-role {primary | secondary | none} where:

• primary — the Pseudowire is enabled for data transmission whenever the PS�

Tunnel is operationally up.

• secondary — the Pseudowire is disabled for data transmission. When the BFD

session associated with its PS� Tunnel receives a notification that the PS� Tunnel at

the other VL�C64 is down, it activates this Pseudowire for data transmission.

• none — the Pseudowire is enabled for data transmission only when it receives traffic

from the remote site.

Using the values primary and secondary enable end-to-end protection switchover

time of the about 50 milliseconds. The value none is supported for backward

compatibility of software up to Release 5.1. Using the value none will cause

protection switchover time to be about 5 seconds.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config-tdmpwe1)# psntunnel-role primary.

This command is applicable only when protectionmode is enabled on the pack. This

parameter is required only when UPSR compatible protection is offered on the pack,

for example, it is one of the 2 VL�C64 packs connecting to a DACS node to offer

UPSR compatible protection. See figure below for a typical configuration.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-42 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 15-8 Circuit emulation service protection

Remote

VLNC60

Hub

TDMSource

T1/E1

DS1/E1

EATN

Tunnel 1

Tunnel 3

Tunnel 4

Tunnel 2

T1/E1 interface

Ethernet interface


main-1-1

m1-1-1-1-1

d1-1

d1-2

d1-1

d1-2

a-1-1

VLNC64VLNC60

Active PWEBackup PWE CES_Prot



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


15-43

Figure 15-9 Circuit emulation service protection - UPSR/SNCP

Remote

VLNC60

Hub

TDMSource

T1/E1

DS1/E1

EATN

Tunnel 1

Tunnel 3

Tunnel 4

Tunnel 2

main-1-1

m1-1-1-1-1

d1-1

d1-2

d1-1

d1-2

a-1-1

VLNC64aVLNC60

d1-1

VLNC64b

main-1-1 m1-1-1-1-1

Hub

T1/E1 interface

Ethernet interface


Active PWEBackup PWE

DACS

DS1/E1

CES_Prot_upsr



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

15-44 365-372-406R7.0


16 16ML-PPP

Overview

Purpose

The MLL-PPP menu feature includes, but is not limited to:

• Multi Link Group

• PPP Link Member

This section covers requirements pertaining to the ML-PPP menu feature.

Contents



Procedure 16-2: Configure Multi-Link PPP (ML-PPP) Termination on

VL�C60/VL�C61/VL�C62

16-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


16-1

Before you begin

Before you begin







Required equipment




ML-PPP Before you begin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16-2 365-372-406R7.0



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 This is a place holder for ML-PPP Web GUI related procedures to be supplied at a later

date.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ML-PPP Procedure 16-1: Place holder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


16-3

Procedure 16-2: Configure Multi-Link PPP (ML-PPP)

Termination on VLNC60/VLNC61/VLNC62

Overview

Use this procedure to provision Multi Link Point-to-Point Protocol (ML-PPP) termination

on the VL�C60/61/62 to provide an interworking between ML-PPP and Ethernet

interfaces for IP backhaul applications. The VL�C60/61/62 terminates the ML-PPP

session and transmits the IP traffic directly over the packet network using Ethernet 802.1q

encapsulation.

It is assumed the circuit packs have been installed and the interface mode has been set.

The interface-mode {t1 | e1} command configures the pack’s T1/E1 mode. Refer

to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface

Guide, for help on using CLI commands.



(ALU 1850TSS-5-60, 61, or 62), for the VL�C60/61/62 circuit pack you are

logged into may appear or the prompt you chose when setting up the system using the

set prompt command.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Perform the following procedures :

1. Procedure 16-2.1: “Configure fragment map profiles” (p. 16-7)

2. If required, Procedure 16-2.2: “Configure VLA�s for multilink group (MLG)

interface” (p. 16-8). This is optional.

3. If required, Procedure 16-2.3: “Configure D�S server addresses” (p. 16-9). This is

optional.

4. Procedure 16-2.4: “Configure multi-link group interface” (p. 16-10).

5. Procedure 16-2.5: “Configure Ethernet interface for MLPPP” (p. 16-13)

6. Procedure 16-2.6: “Configure IP routing” (p. 16-15).

7. Procedure 16-2.7: “Configure T1/E1 interfaces and assign to MLG” (p. 16-17)

8. Procedure 16-2.8: “Configure timing for VL�C60/61/62 MLPPP service” (p. 16-20)

ML-PPP Procedure 16-2: Configure Multi-Link PPP (ML-PPP)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16-4 365-372-406R7.0


E N D O F S T E P S....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Multi-Link PPP Termination on VLNC60/61/62

See Figure 16-1, “Multi-Link PPP termination on VL�C60/61/62” (p. 16-6) for reference.

On the T1/E1 interface side, the VL�C60/61/62 supports T1/E1 access ports (VL�C60 [8

T1/E1 ports], VL�C61/62 [16 T1/E1 ports]) and a logical interface, called a multilink

interface, for each MLPPP multilink group. The multilink interface coordinates the

configuration of the bundled link, and presents a single object for the aggregate links. For

the VL�C60, the maximum number of T1/E1s per MLG is eight (8), and the maximum

number of MLGs is eight (8). For the VL�C61/62, the maximum number of T1/E1s per

MLG is 16, and the maximum number of MLGs is 16 per VL�C61/62.

On the Ethernet side, the VL�C60/61/62 supports two SFPs for GbE or 100Mbps ports as

uplinks to the EAT� network or connected to a VL�C40/42 (on the same Alcatel-Lucent

1850 TSS-5, or a different Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-5).

Up to 8 T1/E1s (VL�C60) or 16 T1/E1s (VL�C61/62) may be grouped into one or more

Multi-link Groups (MLGs). The application traffic is just treated as an IP packet payload

to the VL�C60/61/62. The VL�C60/61/62 terminates the ML-PPP, reassembling any

MLG fragments, and interworks the MLG with Ethernet. The VL�C60/61/62 performs a

layer 3 route lookup in a route table containing a configured default route and possibly

static routes to determine the layer 3 next hop, and then sends the IP packet encapsulated

in an 802.1q header over the appropriate port (using dynamic or static ARP to determine

the IP to MAC address mapping of the next hop). The Ethernet frames could (if

configured) be tagged with a VLA� that is mapped to a source IP address/port of the

MLG.

In the other direction, the traffic will be received by the VL�C60/61/62 as IP over

Ethernet, and then interworked to ML-PPP. The Ethernet header is stripped. Based on an

IP lookup of direct routes to the destination, the VL�C60/61/62 will bundle (and possibly

segment) nearly simultaneous traffic IP frames destined to the same MLG and send them

to the destination over the ML-PPP connection.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


16-5

Figure 16-1 Multi-Link PPP termination on VLNC60/61/62

VLNC60T1s

T1s

MLGs

VLNC60T1s

T1s

MLGs

VLNC60T1s

T1s

MLGs

VLNC40

EATN

IP over ML-PPP over TDM IP over Ethernet 802.1q

MLG - Multi-Link GroupML-PPP - Multi Link Point-to-Point Protocol

EATN - Ethernet Access Transport Network

VLNC60_MLPPP



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16-6 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 16-2.1: Configure fragment map profiles

Overview

Use this procedure to specify the name of a fragment map profile. This profile is used to

configure the size of fragments per class of an multilink interface. A maximum of 8

profiles is allowed.

This procedure assumes that the VL�C60/61/62 has been previously installed.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Login to the VL�C60/61/62.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................




mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Create a fragment-map-profile to be assigned later to the multilink interface you create.

This command specifies the name of a fragment map profile. This profile is used to

configure the size of fragments per class of an multilink interface. If no multiclass is

configured, only fragment size 1 is applicable.

Refer to the fragment-map-profile <fragment-map-name> and

fragment-size{1-4} <fragment-size>commands in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850

Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide for details.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config)# fragment-map-profile FMProfile1

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config - fragmentmap)# fragment-size1 128

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ML-PPP Procedure 16-2.1: Configure fragment map profiles

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


16-7

Procedure 16-2.2: Configure VLANs for multilink group (MLG)

interface

Overview

If required, use this procedure to configure the service VLA�s to be pushed on traffic

towards Ethernet links. If it is not specified, there will be no VLA� pushed on the traffic

coming in from the multilink interface. This command is optional if no VLA�s are to be

assigned to the multilink group (MLG) interface.

The VL�C60/61/62 supports VLA� tagging based on each MLG when forwarding traffic

from the MLPPP interface over the IEEE 802.1q Ethernet interface. This allows

separation of traffic within the EAT�. The VL�C60/61/62 supports 32 VLA�s for

ML-PPP.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 If required, login to the VL�C60/61/62.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result: The Privileged EXEC prompt [(ALU switching)#] displays.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


mode.

Example: (ALU Switching)# vlan database.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the VLA� Config mode, enter vlan <vlanid> where vlanid is a value in the

range of 2-3965.

Example: (ALU Switching) (VLA�)# vlan 10

Enter exit to return to the Privileged EXEC mode.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ML-PPP Procedure 16-2.2: Configure VLANs for multilink group

(MLG) interface

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16-8 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 16-2.3: Configure DNS server addresses

Overview

If required, use this procedure to configure D�S server addresses. This command is

optional if no D�S are required.

This command is used to provide D�S server addresses for the remote system connected

to the MLG interface. The address is provided through IPCP message.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................




mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Global Config mode, enter ip dhcp pool <name> to enter IP DHCP Pool

Config mode, where name specifies the name of the DHCP pool.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the IP DHCP Pool Config mode, enter

dns-server <primary ip address> <secondary ip address>, where

primary/secondary ip address is the IP address of the D�S servers being used.

The secondary IP address configuration is optional if only one IP address is to be

exchanged using IPCP.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ML-PPP Procedure 16-2.3: Configure DNS server addresses

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


16-9

Procedure 16-2.4: Configure multi-link group interface

Overview

A Multilink interface is a logical interface which represents a multilink PPP bundle. The

multilink interface serves to coordinate the configuration of the bundled link, and presents

a single object for the aggregate links. To enable Multilink PPP on multiple interfaces, the

multilink interface must first be configured, and the individual PPP links that are

aggregated together must be configured and added to the same multilink interface.




Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................




mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Create the multilink interface and enter the Multilink Interface Config mode.

From the Global Config mode, enter interface multilink <multilink-number>,

where multilink-number is a number in the range of 1-8. Default is none.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config)# interface multilink 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Specify the IP address for the multilink interface.

From the Multilink Interface Config Mode, enter

ip address <ip-address> <mask>.

Where:

• ip-address - Specifies the IP address of the interface.

• mask - Specifies the subnet mask of the IP address.

ML-PPP Procedure 16-2.4: Configure multi-link group interface

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16-10 365-372-406R7.0


This is a mandatory parameter. The MLG cannot be enabled if this parameter is not

configured. To change this parameter, the multilink interface must be disabled so that

the new option information can be negotiated. The remote and local IP addresses must

be in the same subnet.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface multilink-1)#

ip address 152.148.10.10 255.255.255.0

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 An optional parameter may be used to specify offset and operation from the local IP

address/mask to be used to generate the remote IP address of the MLG to be assigned to

the remote end, via the IPCP Address Option.


remote-ip-address-offset [add | subtract] <ip-address-offset>

Where:

• {add | subtract} - The operation to perform with offset-value to calculate remote IP

address.

• ip-address-offset - Offset value to generate remote IP address of multilink interface.

Range is 0-255.0-255.0-255.0-255. Default is 0.0.0.1.

If this parameter is not configured, the default will be an operation of add with a value

of 1. Validation should check that the remote and local IP addresses are in the same

subnet. To change this parameter, the multilink interface must be disabled so that the

new option information can be negotiated from scratch.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface multilink-1)#

remote-ip-address-offset add 0.0.0.2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enable routing on the multilink interface.

From the Multilink Interface Config Mode, enter routing.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface multilink-1)# routing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Important! The fragment-map specified in this command must already exist. See

Procedure 16-2.1: “Configure fragment map profiles” (p. 16-7).

Assign a pre-configured fragment-map which defines the maximum fragment size (per

class). If no multiclass is configured, only fragment size 1 is applicable.


assign-fragment-map <fragment-map-name> where fragment-map-name is in a

range of 1-31 case sensitive alphanumeric character string.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


16-11

This is a mandatory parameter. The MLG will not be allowed to be enabled if this

parameter is not configured.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface multilink-1)# assign-fragment-map

fragment-map-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 An optional command may be used to perform endpoint discriminator negotiation. �ote

that this command will only be accepted after a local IP address is configured on the

bundle. This parameter is optional. If it is not specified, all links join the same bundle.

Refer to the multilink bundle-name endpoint command in the Alcatel-Lucent

1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide for details.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface multilink-1)# multilink bundle-name endpoint

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Important! The VLA� specified in this command must already exist. See Procedure

16-2.2: “Configure VLA�s for multilink group (MLG) interface” (p. 16-8).

An optional command may be used to map a VLA� to be pushed on traffic towards

Ethernet links. If it is not specified, there will be no VLA� pushed on the traffic coming

in from the multilink interface.

Refer to the service vlan <vlan number> command in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850

Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide for details.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface multilink-1)# service-vlan 10

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 By default, the short-sequence option on the multilink interface is enabled. If you want to

disable it, from the Multilink Interface Config Mode, enter

no multilink short-sequence.

To enable the short-sequence option, enter multilink short-sequence.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 From the Multilink Interface Config Mode, enter no shutdown to enable the interface.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface multilink-1)# no shutdown.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16-12 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 16-2.5: Configure Ethernet interface for MLPPP

Overview

Use this procedure to configure the Ethernet interfaces used for MLPPP.




Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................




mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Configure the Ethernet interface port.





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Specify a description for the Ethernet interface.



Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface d2-1)# RemoteSiteSlot2Port1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If required, from the Interface Config Mode, enter auto-negotiate to enable

auto-negotiation. Default is disabled, except for 1000BASE-T ports which are always

enabled.

ML-PPP Procedure 16-2.5: Configure Ethernet interface for MLPPP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


16-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enable routing on the ethernet interface.

Example: Example: (ALU-Switching) (Interface d2-1) # routing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Configure IP address that is required for routing IP packets.

Example: Example: (ALU-Switching) (Interface d2-1) # ip address 100.100.100.1

255.255.255.0

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Enable the Ethernet interface.


Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface d2-1)# no shutdown

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Enter exit to return to the Global Config Mode, if required.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ML-PPP Procedure 16-2.5: Configure Ethernet interface for MLPPP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16-14 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 16-2.6: Configure IP routing

Overview

Use this procedure to configure default and/or static IP routes used for MLPPP.

The VL�C60/61/62 provides the ability to configure static IP routes, including a default

route. The default route can be used to forward all incoming packets to the gateway

router. Static routes could be used to forward specific IP destinations to nexthop IP

addresses.




Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................


From the Privileged EXEC prompt, enter configure to enter the Global Config mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Configure IP static routes.


ip route <destination ip address> <mask> <nexthop ip address>

where:

• destination ip address - destination IP address

• mask - subnet mask address

• nexthop ip address - nexthop address

On an VL�C60/61/62 circuit pack, an explicit static IP route is required for destination

addresses on same subnet as the IP address on Ethernet port.


ip route 152.148.1.1 255.255.255.0 1.1.1.10 .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Configure IP default routes.

ML-PPP Procedure 16-2.6: Configure IP routing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


16-15


ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 <nexthop ip address> where

nexthop ip address is the nexthop IP address.


ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 1.1.1.10 .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enable routing on the global level.

Example: (ALU Switching)(Config)# ip routing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Configure static ARP, if required. This is optional since dynamic ARP exists.

Example: (ALU-Switching) (Config) # arp 100.100.100.1 00:11:22:33:44:55.

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ML-PPP Procedure 16-2.6: Configure IP routing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16-16 365-372-406R7.0


Procedure 16-2.7: Configure T1/E1 interfaces and assign to

MLG

Overview

Use this procedure to assign member links into the multi-link group (MLG).

This procedure assumes that the VL�C60 has been previously installed.



Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................




mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



on the VL�C60/61/62.


Command Line Interface Guide for addresses and ranges.

This command changes the context to Interface T1/E1 Config Mode and all subsequent

configuration in this mode will be applicable to the T1/E1 interface identified by

interface-number.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Config)# interface a-1-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Specify a description for the T1/E1 interface.



Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# RemoteSiteSlot1Port1

ML-PPP Procedure 16-2.7: Configure T1/E1 interfaces and assign

to MLG

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


16-17

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Interface Config Mode, enter the following commands one at a time:

• signalformat {sf | esf | uf} — (T1 only) Used to set the signal format of

the T1 interface. The supported formats are: Super Frame (SF), Extended Super

Frame (ESF), and Unframed, (UF). Default is esf for T1 port.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# signalformat esf.

• signalformat {fas | crc4} — (E1 only) Used to set the signal format of the


Redundancy Check-4 multiframe alignment (CRC4). Default is crc4 for E1 port.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# signalformat fas.

• linecode {b8zs | ami} — (T1 only) Sets the linecode value on the T1 interface.


Default is b8zs for T1 port.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# linecode b8zs.

• linebuildout {short} {{0-110 | 110-220 | 220-330 | 330-440 |

440-550 | 550-660} — (VL�C60/61/62 [T1 only] only) Specifies the length of

the cable in feet that connects to the T1 interface on the other end of the

VL�C60/61/62 T1 interface.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# linebuildout short 110-220.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 From the Interface T1/E1 Config Mode, enter encapsulation ppp to configure PPP

encapsulation with HDLC framing specified.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# encapsulation ppp

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 By default, the Protocol Field Compression (pfc) on the interface is enabled. If you want

to disable pfc, from the Interface T1/E1 Config Mode, enter no ppp pfc.

To enable pfc, enter ppp pfc.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 By default, the Address and Control Field Compression (acfc) on the interface is enabled.

If you want to disable acfc, from the Interface T1/E1 Config Mode, enter no ppp acfc.

To enable acfc, enter ppp acfc.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 The following are optional commands for ppp configuration.


to MLG

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16-18 365-372-406R7.0


Refer to the following commands in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch

(TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide for details:

• ppp restart-timer number-of-seconds — specifies the LCP restart-timer

which is the general timer used to time out transmissions of LCP Control packets.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# ppp restart-timer 5

• ppp max-terminate <number of transmissions> — specifies the maximum

terminate value which indicates the number of Terminate-Request packets sent

without receiving a valid Terminate-Ack.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# ppp max-terminate 5

• ppp max-configure <number of transmissions> — specifies the maximum

configure value which indicates the number of Configure-Request packets sent

without receiving a valid Config-Ack, Config-�ak, or Config-Reject.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# ppp max-configure 5

• ppp max-failure <number of transmissions> — specifies the maximum

failure value which indicates the number of Configure-�AK packets sent without

receiving a valid Config-Ack.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# ppp max-failure 5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 From the Interface T1/E1 Config Mode, enter

assign-multilink-group <group-number> command to specify the multilink

interface that this interface is associated with. The group-number is in the range 1-8.

This is a mandatory parameter.

Example: (ALU Switching) (Interface a-1-1)# multilink-group 1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 From the Interface T1/E1 Config Mode, enter no ppp shutdown to enable PPP on this

link.

When PPP is enabled, if the T1/E1 line is not connected or the link is in an alarm

state, the PPP protocol will try to send and retransmit PPP request packets at a default

rate of every three (3) seconds. If the physical link does not come up or the alarm does

not clear within 30 seconds (default), the PPP link state will transit to a stopped state

and will continue to be down even after the T1/E1 link comes up or after the alarm

clears.

If this occurs, you must enter no ppp shutdown again to enable PPP after the

physical link status is good.

The 30 second default transmit rate is derived from ppp configuration parameters, as

follows: (ppp restart-timer [default: 3] X ppp max-configure [default: 10]).

You can increase this interval by increasing the values of ppp restart-timer and

max-configure (See Step 9).

E N D O F S T E P S

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


to MLG

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


16-19

Procedure 16-2.8: Configure timing for VLNC60/61/62 MLPPP

service

Overview

Use this procedure to configure timing for the VL�C60/61/62 providing ML-PPP service.

The system-timing-source

{bits | ptp-1588 | free-running | ge | backplane} command is used to

specify a common timing source for all the devices on the VL�C60/61/62 where:

• bits — Building Integrated Timing Supply. This is a timing supply traceable to a

common Primary Reference Clock in the network. The shelf has a special T1/E1 input

interface associated with each main slot for receiving this timing.

• ptp-1588 — Precision Timing Protocol-1588. This option specifies IEEE 1588 version

2 as a choice to drive the system timing. This is useful for remote locations where no

high-quality reference clock signal is available.


end-point time-alignment time precision measured in nanoseconds. The protocol is


communicate using a network. The protocol uses a master/slave relationship to

distribute timestamps from one device to the others.

• free-running — This option specifies that the System clock is in free-running mode.

This option is recommended to be used only on the VL�C60/61/62. The clock is

derived from a local SO�ET Stratum3 or SDH Type III (±4.6 ppm) oscillator in the

VL�C60/61/62.

This option is recommended to be used only when all T1/E1 interfaces offer MLPPP

service. By default, VL�C60/61/62 circuit packs have their System Timing source set

as Free Running.

• ge — This option specifies that the System clock is derived from SFP based GE

(Ethernet interface). This is also known as the SyncE Line timing.

• backplane — This option specifies that the System clock is derived from the

backplane 25 Mhz reference. In this mode timing is derived from the adjacent circuit

pack. This is also known as the Backplane timing.

The timing-source {system | loop | differential} command specifies the

timing source for the T1/E1 interfaces, where:

• system — The source of timing is derived from system timing configured using the

system-timing-source command.

• loop — The clocking information recovered from the received signal of the T1/E1

interface is used to drive the transmit side of the same T1/E1 interface.

• differential — The clock is recovered from the real time protocol (RTP) differential

timestamps on the incoming Pseudowire packet for the T1/E1. The reference timing

for recovery of this clock is System.

ML-PPP Procedure 16-2.8: Configure timing for VLNC60/61/62

MLPPP service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16-20 365-372-406R7.0




Refer to Figure 16-2, “Sample timing configurations for ML-PPP on VL�C60/61/62”

(p. 16-22) for an example.

Step

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Configure system timing source, if required. The system-timing-source

{bits | ptp-1588 | free-running | ge | backplane} command is used to

specify a common timing source for all the devices on the VL�C60/61/62. The default is

free-running.

From the Global Config Mode, enter system-timing-source free-running, or

bits, ptp-1588, ge, or backplane.

The free-running option is recommended to be used only when all T1/E1 interfaces offer

MLPPP service. Figure 16-2, “Sample timing configurations for ML-PPP on

VL�C60/61/62” (p. 16-22).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Configure interface Timing source. The timing-source


T1/E1 interface.



on the VL�C60/61/62.

This command changes the context to Interface T1/E1 Config Mode and all subsequent

configuration in this mode will be applicable to the T1/E1 interface identified by

interface-number. See Addressable Entities in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service

Switch (TSS-5) Command Line Interface Guide for addresses and ranges.

From the Interface T1/E1 Config Mode, enter timing-source system,

timing-source loop, or timing-source differential.

When two VL�C60/61/62s connect to the same source, the T1/E1s in first

VL�C60/61/62 would use system as the timing source. The T1/E1s on the second

VL�C60/61/62 would use loop as the timing source. Also, if all the MLGs from one

source terminate on the same VL�C60/61/62, the T1/E1s would use system timing.



MLPPP service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


16-21

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Example of ML-PPP termination on VLNC60/61/62

Figure 16-2 Sample timing configurations for ML-PPP on VLNC60/61/62

VLNC60T1s

T1s

MLGs

EATN

IP over ML-PPP over TDM IP over Ethernet 802.1q

MLG - Multi-Link GroupML-PPP - Multi Link Point-to-Point Protocol

EATN - Ethernet Access Transport Network

VLNC60

VLNC60T1s

MLG

VLNC60T1s

MLGs

T1s

Node B

Node C

Node D

Node E

VLNC60T1s

MLGs

Node AT1s

Timing configurations:Nodes A, B, C and Esystem-timing-source free-runninginterface-timing-source system

NodeDsystem-timing-source free-runninginterface-timing-source loop

T1/E1 Source

T1/E1 Source

T1/E1 Source

T1/E1 Source

MLPPP_timing


MLPPP service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16-22 365-372-406R7.0


Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Symbols

µ

Microns

µm

Micrometer

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Numerics

1+1 (unidirectional)

The 1+1 optical line protection switching architecture protects against failures of the optical

transmit/receive equipment and their connecting fiber facility. One optical line (two fibers plus

associated OLIUs on each end) is designated "service," and the other optical line is designated

"protection." In the transmit direction at each end, identical signals are bridged on the service and

protection lines ("dual-fed"). At each end, the receiving equipment monitors the incoming service

and protection lines independently, and selects traffic from one line (the "active" line) based on

performance criteria and technician/OS control. In unidirectional 1+1 both service and protection

lines could be active at the same time (service in one direction, protection in the other).

1xN, 1x1

1x� protection switching pertains to circuit pack protection that provides a redundant signal path

through the system (it does not cover protection switching of an optical facility; see "1+1"). In

1x� switching, a group of � service circuit packs share a single spare protection circuit pack. 1x1

is a special case of 1x�, with �=1. In 1x1 only one is active at a time.

802.1Q Mode

In 802.1Q Mode, a circuit pack can be provisioned to use an incoming frame's VLA� tag, to add

a VLA� tag associated with the port for untagged frames, or to drop an incoming frame if its

VLA� tagging does not meet provisioned specifications. The priority bits in an incoming frame's

VLA� tag can also be used to affect the handling of the frame.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A ABN

Abnormal (status condition)

AC

Alternating Current

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-1

Active

Active identifies any protected entity which is currently selected by the receiver at either end as

the payload carrying signal that is currently carrying service. (See Standby).

Add/Drop Multiplexer (ADM)

The term for a synchronous network element capable of combining signals of different rates and

having those signals added to or dropped from the stream.

ADM

Add/Drop Multiplexer

Administrative Unit (AU)

An information structure which provides adaptation between the higher-order path layer and the

multiplexer section layer.

AGNE

Alarm Gateway �etwork Element

AIS

Alarm Indication Signal

Alarm

Visible or audible signal indicating that an equipment failure or significant event/condition has

occurred.

Alarm Cut-Off (ACO/TST)

A button on the SYSCTL used to silence audible alarms. Alarms can also be silenced using the

Fault → Alarm Cutoff command.

Alarm Gateway Network Element (AGNE)

A defined �E in an alarm group through which members of the alarm group exchange

information.

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

A code transmitted downstream in a digital network that shows that an upstream failure has been

detected and alarmed.

Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)

A line code that employs a ternary signal to convey binary digits, in which successive binary ones

are represented by signal elements that are normally of alternating, positive and negative polarity

but equal in amplitude, and in which binary zeros are represented by signal elements that have

zero amplitude.

American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)

A standard 7-bit code that represents letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and special characters

in the interchange of data among computing and communications equipment.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-2 365-372-406R7.0


AMI

Alternate Mark Inversion

ANSI

American �ational Standards Institute

APS

Automatic Protection Switch

APS Channel

The signalling channel carried in the K1 and K2 bytes of the overhead on the protection line. It is

used to exchange requests and acknowledgments for protection switch actions.

ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)

A transmission technology characterized by high bandwidth and low delay. It utilizes a packet

switching and multiplexing technique which allocates bandwidth on demand.

ATM

Asynchronous Transfer Mode

AU

Administrative Unit

Auto

Automatic

Auto

One possible state of ports, lines, and channels. In this state, the port, line, or channel will

automatically be put in service if a good signal is detected coming from the DSX panel.

Automatic Protection Switch

A feature that allows another source to be automatically selected and reconfigured in the event of

a source failure or network change; for example, a fiber cut.

Autonomous Message

A message transmitted from the controlled �etwork Element to the ITM-SC which was not a

response to an ITM-SC originated command.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B B3ZS

Bipolar 3-Zero Substitution

B8ZS

Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-3

Backbone Ring

A host ring.

Backout

Refers to backing out of an upgrade in progress. A backout returns a node(s) to the pre-upgrade

state.

Backup

The backup and restoration features provide the capability to recover from loss of network

element data because of such factors as human error, power failure, and network element design

flaws.

Bandwidth

The difference in Hz between the highest and lowest frequencies in a transmission channel. The

data rate that can be carried by a given communications circuit.

Baud Rate

Transmission rate of data (bits per second) on a network link.

BDFB

Battery Distribution and Fuse Bay

BER

Bit Error Rate

BFD

Bidirectional Forwarding Detection

Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)

A protocol used to improve failure detection times on Ethernet links.

Bidirectional Line

A transmission path consisting of two fibers that handle traffic in both the transmit and receive

directions.

BIP

Bit Interleaved Parity

Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution (B8ZS)

A line coding technique that replaces eight consecutive zeros with a bit sequence having special

characteristics accomplishing two objectives: First, this bit sequence accommodates the density

requirements of the ones for digital T1 carrier; Second, the sequence is recognizable at the

destination (due to deliberate bipolar violations) and is removed to produce the original signal.

Bit

The smallest unit of information in a computer, with a value of either 0 or 1.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-4 365-372-406R7.0


Bit Error Rate (BER)

The ratio of error bits received to the total number of bits transmitted.

Bit Error Rate Threshold

The point at which an alarm is issued for bit errors.

Bit Interleaved Parity-N(BIP-N)

A method of error monitoring over a specified number of bits (BIP-3 or BIP-8).

BITS

Building Integrated Timing Supply

BITS clock

A BITS (Building Integrated Timing Source) clock is a clock within a central office that

distributes timing to all the equipment in that central office. The BITS clock is tied to an external,

stable timing source, such as a GPS (global positioning satellite).

Blocking

The state in which an Ethernet port does not participate in frame relay. The forwarding process

discards received frames.

BPDU

Bridge protocol data unit

Bridge Cross-Connection

Setting up a cross-connection leg with the same input tributary as that of an existing

cross-connection leg, forming a 1:2 bridge from an input tributary to two output tributaries.

Broadband

Any communications channel with greater bandwidth than a voice channel; sometimes used

synonomously with wideband.

BTS

Base Transceiver Station

Byte

Refers to a group of eight consecutive binary digits.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C C-Bit

A framing format used for DS3 signals produced by multiplexing 28 DS1s into a DS3. This

format provides for enhanced performance monitoring of both near-end and far-end entities.

CC

Clear Channel

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-5

CCITT

Comité Consultatif International Télégrafique & Téléphonique

(International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee)

CCITT - International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee

An international advisory committee under United �ations' sponsorship that has composed and

recommended for adoption worldwide standards for international communications. Recently

changed to the International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications Standards Sector

(ITU-TSS).

CD-ROM

Compact Disk, Read-Only Memory

CESoP

Circuit Emulation Service over Packet

Channel

A logical signal within a port. For example, for an OC-3 port, there are three STS-1 channels. See

Port.

Channel State

The channel state is also referred to as the primary state of an STS-n, VT1.5, or VC� tributary.

The values may be AUTO, �MO�, or IS. The primary state parameter affects alarm reporting and

performance monitoring.

Channel State Provisioning

A feature that allows a user to suppress reporting of alarms and events during provisioning by

supporting multiple states (automatic, in-service and not monitored) for VT1.5, STS-n, VC�

channels. See Port State Provisioning.

Circuit

A set of transmission channels through one or more network elements that provides transmission

of signals between two points, to support a single communications path.

Circuit Emulation Service over Packet (CESoP)

Trunking TDM data between two points. This provides a method to transport T1/E1 or T3/E3

streams over an IP network.

CIT

Craft Interface Terminal

Clear Channel (CC)

A provisionable mode for the DS3 output that causes parity violations not to be monitored or

corrected before the DS3 signal is encoded.

CLEI

Common Language Equipment Identifier

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-6 365-372-406R7.0


CLI

Command Line Interface

Client Signal Fail (CSF)

When a defect is detected in the incoming client signal, the Generic Framing Procedure uses the

Client Management Frame to report Client Signal Fail to the far-end customer equipment.

CO

Central Office

Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing (CWDM)

Coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) is a method of combining multiple signals on

laser beams at various wavelengths for transmission along fiber optic cables, such that the number

of channels is fewer than in dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) but more than in

standard wavelength division multiplexing (WDM).

Coding Violation (CV)

A performance monitoring parameter indicating that bipolar violations of the signal have

occurred.

Collocated

System elements that are located in the same location.

Command Line Interface (CLI)

The Command Line Interface (CLI) commands use either telnet-sessions (not secure) or secure

shell (ssh) sessions to communicate with the VL�C40/42/42B Ethernet Aggregator,

VL�C60/61/62 Circuit Emulator, and VL�C64 Circuit Emulation Mini-Hub circuit packs.

CPE

Customer Premises Equipment

CR

Critical (alarm status)

Craft Interface Terminal (CIT)

The user interface terminal used by craft personnel to communicate with a network element.

Credit Interval

The provisioned interval for adding tokens to the token bucket used by the peak information rate

policer. This affects policing for all VLA�s (in 802.1Q mode), all port tags (in transparent mode),

and all Private line services (in Private Line or �o Tag mode).

Critical (CR)

Alarm that indicates a severe, service-affecting condition.

Cross-Connect Capacity

The total bandwidth of cross-connections as measured by the bandwidth of input and output

tributaries. A system with � STS-1 equivalent input tributaries and � STS-1 equivalent output

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-7

tributaries (referred to as "�x�") provides a cross-connection capacity of � STS-1 equivalents.

This system could provide � one-way point-to-point cross-connections or �2

two-way

point-to-point cross-connections at the equivalent rate of STS-1.

Cross-Connection Rate

The attribute of a cross-connection that defines the constituent signal rates it can carry.

CSF

Client Signal Fail

CTS

Customer Technical Support; now known as Technical Support Services (TSS)

Cut-Through

Refers to a simple ASCII interface to an �E. It enables the user to send TL1 messages directly to

the �E with no interpretation or assistance provided by the WaveStar®

CIT.

CV

Coding Violation

CVFE

Coding Violation Far End

CWDM

Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

D Data Communications Channel (DCC)

The embedded overhead communications channel in the synchronous line, used for end-to-end

communications and maintenance. The DCC carries alarm, control, and status information

between network elements in a synchronous network.

Data Communications Equipment (DCE)

The equipment that provides signal conversion and coding between the data terminating

equipment (DTE) and the line. The DCE may be separate equipment or an integral part of the

DTE or of intermediate equipment. A DCE may perform other functions usually performed at the

network end of the line.

Data Terminating Equipment (DTE)

The equipment that originates data for transmission and accepts transmitted data.

dB

Decibels

DC

Direct Current

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-8 365-372-406R7.0


DCC

Data Communications Channel

DCE

Data Communications Equipment

Default Provisioning

The parameter values that are preprogrammed as shipped from the factory.

Demultiplexing

A process applied to a multiplexed signal for recovering signals combined within it and for

restoring the distinct individual channels of these signals.

DEMUX

Demultiplexer

DEMUX - Demultiplexer

The DEMUX direction is from the fiber toward the DSX.

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Digital Cross-Connect Panel (DSX)

A panel designed to interconnect to equipment that operates at a designated rate. For example, a

DSX-3 interconnects equipment operating at the DS3 rate.

Digital Multiplexer

Equipment that combines time-division multiplexing several digital signals into a single

composite digital signal.

Digital Signal Levels 0, 1, 3 (DS0, DS1, DS3)

An A�SI-defined signal or service level corresponding to the following: DS0 is 64 Kb/s, DS1 is

1.544 Mb/s (equivalent to T1), and DS3 is 44.736 Mb/s (equivalent to 28 T1 channels or T3).

Directory Services Network Element (DSNE)

A designated network element that is responsible for administering a database that maps network

element names (TIDs) to addresses (�SAPs - network service access points) in an OSI

subnetwork. There can be one DS�E per ring. Can also be a G�E.

Disable admin

An Ethernet port that does not participate in the spanning tree. The port is disabled by

management.

Disable failure

A port in this state does not participate in the spanning tree. The port is disabled due to a hardware

or software failure.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-9

DLC

Digital Loop Carrier

DS1

Digital Signal Level 1

DS3

Digital Signal Level 3

DS3 Format

Specifies the line format of a DS3 interface port, such as M23 or C-bit parity.

DSLAM

Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer

DSNE

Directory Services �etwork Element

DSX

Digital Cross-Connect Panel

DTE

Data Terminating Equipment

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E E1

E1 is an SDH/PDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy/Pleiseosynchronous Digital Hierarchy, the

European equivalent of SO�ET/DSx) electrical signal comparable to (but slightly faster than) a

DS1. E1 is also sometimes called CEPT-1 (Conference of European Posts and Telecommunica-

tions) and is at 2.048 Mbps.

EATN

Ethernet Access Transport �etwork

ECI

Equipment Catalog Item

EEPROM

Electrically-Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EIA

Electronic Industries Association

EIU

Ethernet Interface Unit

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

A measure of equipment tolerance to external electromagnetic fields.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-10 365-372-406R7.0


Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

High-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields that cause data corruption in cables passing

through the fields.

Electronic Industries Association (EIA)

A trade association of the electronic industry that establishes electrical and functional standards.

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

Static electrical energy potentially harmful to circuit packs and humans.

EMC

Electromagnetic Compatibility

EMI

Electromagnetic Interference

EOOF

Excessive Out of Frame

EPORT

Ethernet port

EPROM

Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EQ

Equipped (memory administrative state)

EQPT

Equipment

Equipment Catalog Item (ECI)

The bar code number on the faceplate of each circuit pack used by some inventory systems.

ERP

Ethernet Ring Protection

Errored Seconds (ES)

A performance monitoring parameter.

ES

Errored Seconds

ESD

Electrostatic Discharge

ESF

Extended Super Frame

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-11

EVC

Ethernet Virtual Connection

Event

A significant change. Events in controlled �etwork Elements include signal failures, equipment

failures, signals exceeding thresholds, and protection switch activity. When an event occurs in a

controlled �etwork Element, the controlled �etwork Element will generate an alarm or status

message and send it to the management system.

Extended Superframe Format (ESF)

A T1 format that uses the framing bit for non-intrusive signaling and control. A T1 frame is sent

8,000 times a second, with each frame consisting of a payload of 192 bits, and with each frame

preceeded by a framing bit. Because ESF only requires 2,000 framing bits for synchonization, the

remaining 6,000 framing bits can be used for error detection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

F Facility

A one- or two-way circuit that carries a transmission signal.

Facility Loopback

A facility loopback is where an entire line is looped back.

Facility Roll

The disconnection of the circuit cross-connecting input tributary to an output tributary followed,

within the required completion time, by a cross-connection of an input tributary to an output

tributary.

Failures in Time (FIT)

Circuit pack failure rates per 109

hours as calculated using the method described in Reliability

Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment, Telcordia®

Method I, Issue 5, September 1995.

Far End (FE)

Any other network element in a maintenance subnetwork other than the one the user is at or

working on. Also called remote.

Far End (FE)

Any other network element in a maintenance subnetwork other than the one the user is at or

working on. Also called remote.

Far End Alarm and Control (FEAC)

The FEAC data link is used by the channelized, cbit framed, b-3 DS3 port of the VL�C50/52

circuit pack to transmit a subset of FEAC codewords defined in A�SI T1.107. FEAC requested

DS1 and DS3 loopbacks requests may also be accepted for the DS3 line, individual constituent

DS1 signals, or all constituent DS1 signals simultaneously.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-12 365-372-406R7.0


Fault

Term used when a circuit pack has a hard (not temporary) fault and cannot perform its normal

function.

Fault Management

Collecting, processing, and forwarding of autonomous messages from network elements.

FCC

Federal Communications Commission

FE

Fast Ethernet

FE ACTY

Far End Activity

FEAC

Far End Alarm and Control

FEBE

Far End Block Error

FEPROM

Flash EPROM

File Transfer and Access Management (FTAM)

FTAM is the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) standard for file transfer, file access, and file

management.

FIT

Failures in 109

hours of operation.

Flash EPROM

A technology that combines the nonvolatility of EPROM with the in-circuit reprogrammability of

EEPROM (electrically-erasable PROM).

Forced

Term used when a protected entity (either working or protection) has been locked into a

service-providing state by user command.

Forced Switch to Protection

The WaveStar®

CIT command that forces the protection group to be the "Active Unit." The clear

command is required to remove the Forced Switch state. While in the Forced Switch state the

system may not switch the active unit either automatically, by means of the WaveStar®

CIT

Forced Switch, or Manual Switch command.

Forwarding

The state in which an Ethernet port participates in frame relay.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-13

Free Running

An operating condition of a clock in which its local oscillator is not locked to an external

synchronization reference and is using no storage techniques to sustain its accuracy.

FTAM

File Transfer and Access Management

FTAM-FTP Gateway

This is also referred to as file transfer translation device (FTTD). The FTTD translates FTAM

over OSI presentation to FTP over TCP/IP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

G GARP

Generic Attribute Resolution Protocol

Gateway Network Element (GNE)

A network element that passes information between other network elements and management

systems through a data communication network.

GB

Gigabytes

Gb/s

Gigabits per second

GbE

Gigabit Ethernet

Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)

The Generic Framing Procedure, described in ITU-T G.7041/Y1303, provides a generic

mechanism to adapt traffic from higher-layer client signals over a SO�ET/SDH network.

GFP

Generic Framing Procedure

GHz

Gigahertz

GMRP

GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (based on GARP)

GNE

Gateway �etwork Element

GR-XXX

Telcordia®

General Requirement-XXX

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-14 365-372-406R7.0


GUI

Graphical User Interface

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

H Hashed FTP

The hashed FTP (digital signature) capability prevents tampering with a downloadable software

image.

Holdover

An operating condition of a network element in which its local oscillator is not locked to any

synchronization reference but is using storage techniques to maintain its accuracy with respect to

the last known frequency comparison with a synchronization reference.

Hz

Hertz

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I I/O

Input/Output

IAO LAN

Intraoffice Local Area �etwork

ID

Identifier

IEC

International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

In-Service (IS)

A memory administrative state for ports. IS refers to a port that is fully monitored and alarmed.

INC

Integrated �etwork Controller

Intermediate Reach (IR)

A term used to describe distances of 15 to 40 km between optical transmitter and receiver without

regeneration. See long reach.

IP

Internet Protocol

IP-BH

IP Backhaul

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-15

IR

Intermediate Reach

IS

In Service

ISDN

Integrated Services Digital �etwork

ISO

International Standards Organization

ISP

Internet Service Provider

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

J Jitter

Timing jitter is defined as short-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from

their ideal positions in time.

Jumbo frame

Jumbo frames increase network efficiency by reducing the number of frames to be processed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

K Kb/s

Kilobits per second

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

L L2CP

Ethernet Layer 2 Control Protocol

LAN

Local Area �etwork

LAPD

Link Access Procedure "D"

LBC

Laser Bias Current

LBO

Lightguide Build Out

LCAS

Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-16 365-372-406R7.0


LCN

Local Communications �etwork

LCP

Link Control Protocol

LEC

Local Exchange Carrier

LED

Light-Emitting Diode

LFD

Loss of Frame Delineation

LGX

Lightguide Cross-Connect

Light Emitting Diode (LED)

Used on a circuit pack faceplate to show failure (red) or service state. It is also used to show the

alarm and status condition of the system.

Lightguide Build-Out (LBO)

An attenuating (signal-reducing) element used to keep an optical output signal strength within

desired limits.

Lightguide Cross-Connect (LGX)

A device that contains ports for optical fiber connections to an optical network element (�E). An

LGX is used to make and change connections to an �E without changing the cabling on the �E

itself.

Line

A transmission medium, together with the associated equipment, required to provide the means of

transporting information between two consecutive network elements. One network element

originates the line signal; the other terminates it.

Line Timing

The capability to directly derive clock timing from an incoming OC-� signal while providing the

user the capability to provision whether switching to an alternate OC-� from a different source

(as opposed to entering holdover) will occur if the OC-� currently used as the timing reference

for that �E becomes unsuitable as a reference.

Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS)

LCAS is an enhancement to SO�ET/SDH Virtual Concatenation that allows adding or removing

Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG) members, to vary its bandwidth, by management command.

It also automatically removes and restores failed members.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-17

Listening

The state in which an Ethernet port is preparing to participate in frame relay. In the listening state,

frame relay is disabled. This is an interim state between blocking and learning.

LOA

Loss of Alignment

Local

See �ear-End.

Local Area Network (LAN)

A communications network that covers a limited geographic area, is privately owned and user

administered, is mostly used for internal transfer of information within a business, is normally

contained within a single building or adjacent group of buildings, and transmits data at a very

rapid speed.

LOF

Loss of Frame

Long Reach (LR)

A term used to describe distances of 40 km or more between optical transmitter and receiver

without regeneration. See Intermediate Reach.

Loopback

Type of diagnostic test used to compare an original transmitted signal with the resulting received

signal. A loopback is established when the received optical or electrical external transmission

signal is sent from a port or tributary input directly back toward the output.

LOP

Loss of Pointer

LOS

Loss of Signal

Loss of Alignment (LOA)

One or more STS-1s that compose a VCG are out of multiframe alignment because of excess

delay difference.

Loss of Frame (LOF)

A failure to synchronize to an incoming signal.

Loss of Frame Delineation (LFD)

Lack of sufficient bandwidth that is reported when there is a mismatch in the number of STS

tributaries.

Loss of Pointer (LOP)

A failure to extract good data from an STS-n/VC� payload.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-18 365-372-406R7.0


Loss of Signal (LOS)

The complete absence of an incoming signal.

LPBK

Loopback

LR

Long Reach

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

M Major

Indicates a service-affecting failure, main or unit controller failure, or power supply failure.

MB

Megabytes

Mb/s

Megabits per second

MEF

Metro Ethernet Forum (a standards body)

Minor (MN)

Indicates a non-service-affecting failure of equipment or facility.

Miscellaneous Discrete Interface

Allows an operations system to control and monitor equipment collocated within a set of input

and output contact closures.

MLG

Multilink Group

MLPPP

Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol

MM

Multimode

MN

Minor Alarm

MPLS

Multi-Protocol Label Switching

MS

Multiplex Section

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-19

MSPP

Multi-Service Provisioning Platform

Mult

Multipling

Multi-link Point-to-Point Protocol (ML-PPP)

Multi-link Point-to-Point Protocol (ML-PPP) with Multi-class extension is a standards based layer

2 protocol used to transmit data over a group of serial point-to-point links which are treated as a

single aggregated pipe.

Multilink Group (MLG)

Multilink Group (MLG) interface is used to aggregate T1 bandwidth and provide a single routing

entity for the bundle in Multi-link Point-to-Point Protocol applications.

Multiplexer

A device (circuit pack) that combines two or more transmission signals into a combined signal on

a shared medium.

Multiplexing

The process of combining multiple signals into a larger signal at the transmitter by a multiplexer.

The large signal is then split into the original smaller signals at the receiver by a demultiplexer.

MUX

Multiplex

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

N NA

�ot Applicable

NE

�ear End

NE

�etwork Element

NE ACTY

�ear-End Activity

Near End

The network element the user is at or working on. Also called local.

NEBS

�etwork Equipment-Building System

Network Element (NE)

A node in a telecommunication network that supports network transport services and is directly

manageable by a management system.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-20 365-372-406R7.0


Network Element (NE)

The basic building block of a telecommunications equipment within a telecommunication

network that meets SO�ET/SDH standards. Typical internal attributes of a network element

include: one or more transmission ports, built-in intelligence, synchronization and timing

capability, and access interfaces for use by technicians and/or operation systems. In addition, a

network element may also include a timeslot interchanger.

Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address

�etwork Service Access Point Address (used in the OSI network layer 3). An automatically

assigned number that uniquely identifies a �etwork Element for the purposes of routing DCC

messages.

Network Time Protocol

�etwork time protocol is an easy, accurate, and automatic method to get and synchronize

date/time.

nm

�anometer (10-9

meters)

NMA

�etwork Monitoring and Analysis

NMON

�ot Monitored (provisioning state)

NNI

�etwork-�etwork Interface

No Request State

This is the routine-operation quiet state in which no external command activities are occurring.

Node

A network element in a ring or, more generally, in any type of network. In a network element

supporting interfaces to more than one ring, node refers to an interface that is in a particular ring.

�ode is also defined as all equipment that is controlled by one system controller. A node is not

always directly manageable by a management system.

Non-Revertive Switching

In non-revertive switching, an active and standby line exist on the network. When a protection

switch occurs, the standby line is selected to support traffic, thereby becoming the active line. The

original active line then becomes the standby line. This status remains in effect even when the

fault clears. That is, there is no automatic switch back to the original status.

Non-Volatile Memory (NVM)

Memory that retains its stored data after power has been removed. An example of �VM would be

a hard disk.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-21

Not Monitored (NMON)

A provisioning state for equipment that is not monitored or alarmed.

NR

�ot Reported

NRZ

�onreturn to Zero

NSA

�ot Service Affecting

NSAP Address

�etwork Service Access Point Address (used in the OSI network layer 3)

NTF

�o Trouble Found

NTP

�etwork time protocol

NVM

�on-Volatile Memory

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

O OAM&P

Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning

OAMPDU

Operations, Administration and Maintenance Protocol Data Unit

OC, OC-n - Optical Carrier

The optical signal that results from an optical inversion of an STS signal; that is, OC-1 from

STS-1 and OC-n from STS-n.

OC-12

Optical Carrier, Level 12 Signal (622.08 Mb/s)

OC-3

Optical Carrier, Level 3 Signal (155.52 Mb/s)

OC-48

Optical Carrier, Level 48 Signal (2488.32 Mb/s) (2.5 Gb/s)

OI

Operations Interworking

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-22 365-372-406R7.0


OLIU

Optical Line Interface Unit

OMS

Optical Management System

OOF

Out of Frame

OOL

Out of Lock

OOS

Out-of-Service

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)

Referring to the OSI reference model, a logical structure for network operations standardized by

the International Standards Organization (ISO).

Operations Interface

Any interface providing you with information on the system behavior or control. These include

the equipment LEDs, SYSCTL faceplate, WaveStar®

CIT, office alarms, and all telemetry

interfaces.

Operations Interworking (OI)

The capability to access, operate, provision, and administer remote systems through craft interface

access from any site in a SO�ET/SDH network or from a centralized operations system.

Operations System (OS)

A central computer-based system used to provide operations, administration, and maintenance

functions.

OPS/INE

Operations System/Intelligent �etwork Element

OS

Operations System

OSI

Open Systems Interconnection

OSMINE

Operations Systems Modifications for the Integration of �etwork Elements

OSP

Outside Plant

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

P P-bit

Performance Bit

Pass Through

Paths that are cross-connected directly across an intermediate node in a ring network.

Path

A logical connection between the point at which a standard frame format for the signal at the

given rate is assembled, and the point at which the standard frame format for the signal is

disassembled.

Path Protection Group

The part of a cross-connection topology that is provisioned to provide path-level protection

switching for all the constituent signals carried by the cross-connection. A path protection group

can be identified as an entity by its logical output tributary and its cross-connection rate. A path

protection group consists of one or more constituent path selectors.

PC

Personal Computer

PCMCIA

Personal Computer Memory Card International Association

PDU

Protocol Data Unit

Peak Information Rate Policer

The peak information rate policer meters packet traffic leaving the internal packet switch and

going toward the SO�ET/SDH network. If the packets exceed the provisioned peak information

rate, the packets are dropped.

Performance Monitoring (PM)

Measures the quality of service and identifies degrading or marginally operating systems (before

an alarm would be generated).

PID

Program Identification

PJC

Pointer Justification Count

Plesiochronous Network

A network that contains multiple maintenance subnetworks, each internally synchronous and all

operating at the same nominal frequency, but whose timing may be slightly different at any

particular instant. For example, in SO�ET/SDH networks, each timing traceable to their own

Stratum 1 clock are considered plesiochronous with respect to each other

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-24 365-372-406R7.0


PLL

Phase-Locked Loop

PM

Performance Monitoring

POP

Points of Presence

Port (also called Line)

The physical interface, consisting of both an input and output, where an electrical or optical

transmission interface is connected to the system and may be used to carry traffic between

network elements. The words "port" and "line" may often be used synonymously. "Port"

emphasizes the physical interface, and "line" emphasizes the interconnection. Either may be used

to identify the signal being carried.

Port Protection Group

A user provisioned association of protected optical interface ports. This association is used for line

protection. The group of ports represent both a protection switching entity and also a set of lines

that carry services to/from another network element. The port protection groups also determine

the set of logical tributaries from and to which cross-connections can be provisioned.

Port State Provisioning

A feature that allows a user to suppress alarm reporting and performance monitoring during

provisioning by supporting multiple states (automatic, in-service, and not monitored) for

transmission ports.

Proactive Maintenance

Refers to the process of detecting degrading conditions not severe enough to initiate protection

switching or alarming, but indicative of an impending signal fail or signal degrade defect (for

example, performance monitoring).

Protection

Extra capacity (channels, circuit packs) in transmission equipment that is not intended to be used

for service, but rather to serve as backup against failures.

Protection Group

A logical grouping of ports or circuit packs that share a common protection scheme, for example,

UPSR/S�CP switching or 1+1 line.

PROTN

Protection

Provisioning

The modification of certain programmable parameters that define how the node functions with

various installed entities. These modifications are initiated locally or remotely by either a CIT or

an OS. They may arrive at the node via the IAO LA�, CIT port, or any DCC channel. The

provisioned data is maintained in �VM and/or hardware registers.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-25

PSN

Packet Switched �etwork

PTM

Pluggable Transmission Module

PW

Pseudowire

PWR

Power

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R RAI

Remote Alarm Indication

RAM

Random Access Memory

RDI

Remote Defect Indication

Reactive Maintenance

Refers to detecting defects/failures and clearing them.

Remote

See Far-End (FE).

Remote Defect Indication (RDI)

An indication returned to a transmitting terminal that the receiving terminal has detected an

incoming section failure. [Previously called far-end-receive failure (FERF).]

Remote Network Element

Any �etwork Element that is connected to the referenced �etwork Element through either an

electrical or optical link. It may be the adjacent node on a ring, or � nodes away from the

reference. It also may be at the same physical location but is usually at another (remote) site.

Revertive

A protection switching mode in which, after a protection switch occurs, the equipment returns to

the nominal configuration (that is, the service equipment is active, and the protection equipment is

standby) after the clearing of any failure conditions that caused a protection switch to occur or

after any external switch commands are reset. See �on-Revertive.

RFI

Remote Failure Indication

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-26 365-372-406R7.0


Ring

A configuration of nodes comprised of network elements connected in a circular fashion. Under

normal conditions, each node is interconnected with its neighbor and includes capacity for

transmission in either direction between adjacent nodes. Path switched rings use a head-end

bridge and tail-end switch. Line switched rings actively reroute traffic over a protection line.

RPL

Ring Protection Link

RS

Regenerator Section

RSTP

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RTP

Real-time Transport Protocol

RTRV

Retrieve

RU

Rack Unit

RZ

Return to Zero

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

S SA

Service Affecting

SAToP

Structure Agnostic Transport over Packet

SD

Signal Degrade

SDH

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SEC

SDH Equipment Clock, Option 2

SEFS

Severely Errored Frame Seconds

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-27

Self-Healing

Ring architecture in which two or more fibers are used to provide route diversity. �ode failures

only affect traffic dropped at the failed node.

Service

The operational mode of a physical entity that indicates that the entity is providing service. This

designation will change with each switch action.

SES

Severely Errored Seconds

Severely Errored Seconds (SES)

This performance monitoring parameter is a second in which a signal failure occurs, or more than

a preset amount of coding violations (dependent on the type of signal) occur.

SF

Super Frame (format for DS1 signal)

SFP

Small Form-factor Pluggable

Shelf View

A graphical depiction of one shelf. Selectable objects in this view are the shelf, the slots/circuit

packs, and the ports.

SID

System Identification

Slot

A physical position in a shelf for holding a circuit pack and connecting it to the backplane. This

term is also used loosely to refer to the collection of ports or tributaries connected to a physical

circuit pack placed in a slot.

SM

Single Mode

SMC

SO�ET Minimum Clock

SNCP

Subnetwork Connection Protection

SNMP

Simple �etwork Management Protocol

Software Backup

The process of saving an image of the current network element's databases, which are contained

in its �VM, to a remote location. The remote location could be the WaveStar®

CIT or an OS.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-28 365-372-406R7.0


Software Download

The process of transferring a software generic from a remote entity to the target network element's

memory. The remote entity may be the WaveStar®

CIT or an OS. The download procedure uses

bulk transfer to move an uninterpreted binary file into the network element.

SONET

Synchronous Optical �ETwork

Spanning Tree Group

�odes can be provisioned to belong to a spanning tree group. Only the nodes within that group

participate in the spanning tree for the group.

SPE

Synchronous Payload Envelope

SRD

Software Release Description

Standby

Standby identifies a protected entity which is not currently selected by the receiver at either end as

the payload carrying signal hat is not currently carrying service. See Active.

Standing Condition

A standing condition (SC) is either an event (usually user initiated such as a switch request) or an

alarm that is provisioned �A (�ot Alarmed).

Status

The indication of a short-term change in the system.

STM

Synchronous Transport Module (SDH)

STM-1

Synchronous Transport Module Level 1 Signal (155 Mb/s).

STM-4

Synchronous Transport Module Level 4 Signal (622 Mb/s).

STM-n - Synchronous Transport Module Level n

The basic optical signal building block information structure that supports the SDH section layer

connections.

Stratum 3 Timing Generator

The timing generator circuit pack, located in an OLIU circuit pack, that generates clock signals

for distribution to the transmit circuits. It operates in the free-running, line-timing, externally

times, and holdover modes.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-29

STS, STS-n

Synchronous Transport Signal

STS-1 SPE

STS-1 Synchronous Payload Envelope

STS-1 SPE - STS-1 Synchronous Payload Envelope

A 125-microsecond frame structure composed of STS path overhead and the STS-1 payload.

STS-12c

Synchronous Transport Level 12 Concatenated Signal

STS-3c

Synchronous Transport Level 3 Concatenated Signal

STS-n - Synchronous Transport Signal

The basic building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-1 signal and a rate of n

times 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-n signal.

STU

Synchronized - Traceability Unknown

Subnetwork

A group of interconnected/interrelated �etwork Elements. The most common connotation is a

synchronous network in which the �etwork Elements have data communications channel (DCC)

connectivity.

Superframe Format (SF)

A DS1 framing format in which 24 DS0 timeslots plus a coded framing bit are organized into a

frame which is repeated 12 times to form the superframe.

Suspend

Suspend refers to temporarily stopping an upgrade in progress.

Synchronization Messaging

SO�ET/SDH synchronization messaging is used to communicate the quality of network timing,

internal timing status, and timing states throughout a subnetwork.

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

The European standard for the rates and formats that defines optical signals and their constituents.

Synchronous Network

The synchronization of transmission systems with synchronous payloads to a master (network)

clock that can be traced to a reference clock.

Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)

The �orth American standard for the rates and formats that defines optical signals and their

constituents.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-30 365-372-406R7.0


Synchronous Payload

Payloads that can be derived from a network transmission signal by removing integral numbers of

bits from every frame. Therefore, no variable bit-stuffing rate adjustments are required to fit the

payload in the transmission signal.

Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE)

The combined payload and path overhead of an STS-1, STS-3c, or VC� signal.

SYSCTL

System Controller (circuit pack)

SYSCTL - System Controller

The system controller circuit pack that provides overall administrative control of the terminal.

System View

A graphical depiction of the entire �etwork Element. Selectable objects in this view are the bays

and shelves.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

T T-MPLS

Transport Multi-Protocol Label Switching

T1

A carrier system that transmits at the rate of 1.544 Mbps (a DS1 signal).

T1X1 and T1M1

The A�SI committees responsible for telecommunications standards

T2


T3


TA

Telcordia®

Technical Advisory

Target Identifier (TID)

A provisionable parameter that is used to identify a particular �etwork Element within a network.

It is a character string of up to 20 characters where the characters are letters, digits, or hyphens (-).

TARP

Target Identifiers Address Resolution Protocol

TBD

To Be Determined

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-31

TCA

Threshold-Crossing Alert

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TDC

TARP Data Cache

TDM

Time Division Multiplexing

Telcordia®

Telcordia®

(formerly Bellcore) is a well-recognized telecommunications standards organization.

TFTP

Trivial File Transport Protocol

Threshold-Crossing Alert (TCA)

A message type sent from a �etwork Element that indicates that a certain performance monitoring

parameter has exceeded a specified threshold.

Through (or Continue) Cross-Connection

A cross-connection within a ring, where the input and output tributaries have the same tributary

number but are in lines opposite each other.

THz

Terahertz (1012

Hz)

TID

Target Identifier

Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)

A technique for transmitting a number of separate data, voice, and/or video signals simultaneously

over one communications medium by interleaving a portion of each signal one after another.

Time Slot Assignment (TSA)

A capability that allows any tributary in a ring to be cross-connected to any tributary in any

lower-rate, non-ring interface or to the same-numbered tributary in the opposite side of the ring.

Time Slot Interchange (TSI)

A set of nodes configured as a ring with paths established in both directions of the ring. Switching

occurs per-path at the drop nodes.

TIRKS

Trunks Integrated Records Keeping System

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-32 365-372-406R7.0


TIU

TDM Interface Unit

TL1

Transaction Language 1

TMUX

TransMultiplexer service

TR

Telcordia®

Technical Requirement

Transaction Language One (TL1)

The permission level associated with each user login that defines which commands the user can

execute.

Transparent Mode

In Transparent Mode, port tags (which are actually VLA� tags with a TPID value other than

8100hex) are used to separate traffic for different customers. A port tag is added to each incoming

frame at the ingress LA� port. The port tag contains a provisionable customer ID and priority

level.

Tributary

A path-level unit of bandwidth within a port, or the constituent signal(s) being carried in this unit

of bandwidth, for example, an STS-1 tributary within an OC-� port.

Trivial File Transport Protocol (TFTP)

SolarWinds Trivial File Transport Protocol (TFTP) server software.

TSA

Time Slot Assignment

TSI

Time Slot Interchange

TSO

Technical Support Organization

TU (Tributary Unit)

An information structure which provides adaptation between the lower order path layer and the

higher order path layer.

TUG

Tributary Unit Group

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

U UAS

Unavailable Seconds

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-33

Unavailable Seconds (UAS)

In performance monitoring, the count of seconds in which a signal is declared failed or in which

10 consecutively severely errored seconds (SES) occurred, until the time when 10 consecutive

non-SES occur.

UNI

User-�etwork Interface

Unidirectional Path-Switched Ring (UPSR)

Path-Switched rings employ redundant fiber optic transmission facilities in a pair configuration,

with one fiber transmitting in one direction (for example, East) and the backup fiber transmitting

in the other direction (for example, West). If the primary ring fails, then the protection ring takes

over.

UPD/INIT

Update/Intialize

UPD/INIT

A push-button on the SYSCTL faceplate.

UPSR

Unidirectional Path Switched Rings

User Privilege

Permits a user must perform on the computer system on which the system software runs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

V VAC

Volts Alternating Current

VC

Virtual Container

VCG

Virtual Concatenation Group

VDC

Volts Direct Current

Virtual LAN (VLAN)

A virtual LA� (VLA�) is a subset of a LA�. A VLA� is created by putting VLA� IDs in

packets that indicate membership to a VLA� of that ID. A Local Area �etwork (LA�) can have

multiple VLA�s within it, up to the number of IDs available. Members (ports) of different

VLA�s do not see the traffic of VLA�s of which they are not members. A port may be a member

of many VLA�s (LA� ports in 802.1Q mode, WA� ports). In the Transparent mode, a LA� port

is typically assigned membership to a single VLA�.

In Transparent mode, VLA�s are assigned to ports using Port Tag (ed-eport and ed-vcg. In

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-34 365-372-406R7.0


802.1Q mode, VLA�s are assigned to ports using VLA� IDs (ent-vlan/ed-vlan).

A VLA� tag is the specific field of information in a packet that carries the VLA� ID number.

Virtual Switch

A virtual switch is a grouping of ports on an Ethernet switch that results in partitioning of the

switch into multiple "logical" switches. A port may only be a member of one virtual switch.

Virtual Tributary (VT)

A structure designed for transport and switching of sub-STS-1 payloads. There are currently four

sizes: VT1.5 (1.728 Mb/s), VT2 (2.304 Mb/s), VT3 (3.456 Mb/s), and VT6 (6.912 Mb/s).

VLAN

Virtual Local Area �etwork

VM

Violation Monitor

VMR

Violation Monitor and Removal

VoIP

Voice over Internet Protocol

VT

Virtual Tributary

VT-G - Virtual Tributary Group

A 9-row by 12-column SO�ET structure (108 bytes) that carries one or more VTs of the same

size. Seven VT groups (756 bytes) are byte-interleaved within the VT-organized STS-1

synchronous payload envelope

VT1.5

Virtual Tributary 1.5 (1.728 Mb/s)

VT1.5 Tributary

A SO�ET logical signal with a data rate of 1.728 Mbps. In the 9-row structure of the STS-1 SPE,

a VT1.5 occupies three columns. VT-structured STS-1 SPEs are divided into seven VT groups.

Each VT group occupies twelve columns of the 9-row structure and, for VT1.5s, contains four

VTs per group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

W WAN

Wide Area �etwork

Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM)

A means of increasing the information-carrying capacity of an optical fiber by simultaneously

transmitting signals at different wavelengths.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


GL-35

WDCS

Wideband Digital Cross-Connect System

WDM

Wavelength Division Multiplexing

Wide Area Network (WAN)

A communication network that uses common-carrier provided lines and covers an extended

geographical area.

Wizard

A form of user assistance that automates a procedure through a dialog with the user.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Z Zero Code Suppression

A technique used to reduce the number of consecutive zeros in a line-codes signal (B3ZS for DS3

signals and B8ZS for DS1 signals).

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-36 365-372-406R7.0


Index

A ARP

display arp cache, 5-4

arp

routing, 10-3

audience, UOG, xvii

authentication

radius, 5-69

.............................................................

B barred-hand symbol, 1-19

.............................................................

C CES Service

vlnc60/61/62 ces, 15-4

vlnc64 ces, 15-4

Command Line Interface

backup configuration, 4-4

configure connection, 2-10,

2-12, 2-14, 2-16, 2-18, 2-20,

2-22

connect, 2-3, 2-5, 2-7, 2-9

copy image, 4-3

show software, 4-2

configuration

reset defaults, 5-46

save changes, 5-44

console port

configuration, 5-28

conventions used, xviii

copy, 5-48, 5-50

copy image, 5-56

.............................................................

D danger, potential sources of, 1-4

dhcp, 10-8

download

file, 5-48

download file, 5-43

dual image

configuration, 5-52

.............................................................

E electrostatic discharge, 1-4, 1-18,

1-18

ERP

vlnc40/42, 11-21

ESD, 1-18

establish

CLI session, 2-3, 2-7, 2-9,

2-10, 2-14, 2-16, 2-18, 2-20

local CLI session, 2-5, 2-12,

2-22

.............................................................

G ground strap, ESD, 1-18

.............................................................

H http

configuration, 5-22

.............................................................

I image

configuration, 5-52

configuration; copy, 5-43

copy, 5-56

inventory, 5-6

IP routing, 10-6

.............................................................

L lasers

classes, 1-13

eye damage, 1-13

safety, 1-6

warning labels, 1-17

logs

buffered, 5-36

command, 5-36

configuration, 5-36

console, 5-36

event, 5-36

.............................................................

M MGMT LA� port, 5-15

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


IN-1

ML-PPP Termination

vlnc60 mlppp, 16-4

.............................................................

N network port

in-band connectivity, 5-18

.............................................................

O oam

performance monitoring, 14-14

.............................................................

P password

reset, 5-47

performance monitoring

oam, 14-14

ping, 5-54

potential sources of danger, 1-4

.............................................................

R radius server, 5-69

reset, 5-45

default configuration, 5-46

password, 5-47

router, 10-9

routing

dhcp, 10-8

IP, 10-6

router, 10-9

running configuration, 5-55

.............................................................

S safety instructions

general notes, 1-4

important, 1-21

laser, 1-6, 1-15

precautions (enclosed

systems), 1-15

special, 1-4

save, 5-44

secure shell

configuration, 5-72

serial port

configuration, 5-28

serviceport, 5-15

simple network time protocol,

5-59

Simple �etwork Time Protocol

configure sntp, 5-66

snmp

community configuration, 5-39

MIBs, 5-39

trap receiver configuration,

5-39

sntp, 5-66

configuration, 5-59

software

dual image status, 5-9

show version, 4-2

ssh, 5-72

supporting elements (SE), xx

system

configuration, 5-11

description, 5-12

network port connectivity, 5-18

reset, 5-43, 5-45

reset password, 5-43

reset to default, 5-43

save changes, 5-43, 5-43

serviceport, 5-15

utilities, 5-43

.............................................................

T telnet

configuration, 5-24

outbound configuration, 5-26

trap

manager, 5-57

.............................................................

U upload

file, 5-50

upload file, 5-43

user

accounts, 5-29

authentication, 5-29

logins, 5-29

.............................................................

V VL�C40/42

add node to erp, 11-28

configure erp, 11-23

delete node from erp, 11-35

Ethernet service OAM, 14-4

move rpl, 11-32

VL�C40/42/42B

L2CP tunneling, 11-3

VL�C40/VL�C42

linkoam 802.3ah, 13-4

service-multiplexing, 11-5

service-multiplexing nni, 11-8,

11-17

service-multiplexing uni, 11-9

service-multiplexing uni-nni,

11-10

service-multiplexing uni-uni,

11-14

Index

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-2 365-372-406R7.0


VL�C40/VL�C42/42B

service-multiplexing delete

mapping, 11-19

VL�C60

configure fragment map

profile, 16-7

VL�C60/61/62

configure dns, 16-9

configure Ethernet interface,

15-10, 16-13

configure IP addresses, 15-13,

16-15

configure IP routes, 15-13,

16-15

configure links, 16-17

configure mlg, 16-10

configure protection, 15-37

configure pseudowire, 15-35

configure t1 interface, 15-10

configure timing, 15-17, 16-20

configure tunnel, 15-30

configure VLA�, 15-15, 16-8

ptp 1588ver2, 15-27

VL�C64

configure Ethernet interface,

15-10

configure IP addresses, 15-13

configure IP routes, 15-13

configure OC3/STM1

interface, 15-9

configure protection, 15-37

configure t1 interface, 15-10

configure timing, 15-17

configure tunnel, 15-30

configure VLA�, 15-15

ptp 1588ver2, 15-27

.............................................................

W warning labels, laser, 1-17

WaveStar CIT

using, xix

Index

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-372-406R7.0


IN-3

Documents

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 - Nokia Documentation